You are on page 1of 343

ApeosPort-III C3300/C2200/C2201 DocuCentre-III C3300/C2200/C2201 User Guide

Microsoft, Windows, Windows NT, Windows Server, Windows Vista, and Microsoft Network are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and other countries. NetWare is a registered trademark of Novell, Inc. in the United States and other countries. Adobe, Acrobat, PostScript, and Adobe PostScript 3 are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated. EtherTalk, Macintosh, and Mac OS are registered trademarks of Apple Inc. PCL, HP-GL, and HP-GL/2 are registered trademarks of Hewlett-Packard Corporation. RSA and BSAFE are either registered trademarks or trademarks of RSA Security Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. RSA Security Inc. All right reserved. All product/brand names are trademarks or registered trademarks of the respective holders. Permission has been obtained from Microsoft Corporation for use of software screen shots. For information on license, refer to About License. The data saved in the hard disk of the machine may be lost if there is any problem in the hard disk. Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any direct and indirect damages arising from or caused by such data loss. Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due to infection of computer virus or computer hacking. Important 1. This manual is copyrighted with all rights reserved. Under the copyright laws, this manual may not be copied or modified in whole or part, without the written consent of the publisher. 2. Parts of this manual are subject to change without prior notice. 3. We welcome any comments on ambiguities, errors, omissions, or missing pages. 4. Never attempt any procedure on the machine that is not specifically described in this manual. Unauthorized operation can cause faults or accidents. Fuji Xerox is not liable for any problems resulting from unauthorized operation of the equipment. An export of this product is strictly controlled in accordance with Laws concerning Foreign Exchange and Foreign Trade of Japan and/or the export control regulations of the United States. XEROX, THE DOCUMENT COMPANY, Ethernet, CentreWare, and the stylized X are registered trademarks of Xerox Corporation. DocuWorks is a trademark of Xerox Corporation or Fuji Xerox Co., Ltd. All Xerox and Fuji Xerox product names are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Xerox Corporation or Fuji Xerox Co., Ltd.

Table of Contents

Table of Contents
Table of Contents ........................................................................................................ 1 1 Before Using the Machine ........................................................................................ 9 Preface ...................................................................................................................... 10 Types of Manuals ...................................................................................................... 11 Using This Guide ....................................................................................................... 12 Organization of This Guide ................................................................................... 12 Conventions .......................................................................................................... 13 Safety Notes .............................................................................................................. 15 Electrical Safety .................................................................................................... 16 Machine Installation .............................................................................................. 17 Operational Safety ................................................................................................ 20 Consumable.......................................................................................................... 22 Regulation ................................................................................................................. 24 Radio Frequency Emissions (Class B) ................................................................. 24 Product Safety Certification (UL, CB) ................................................................... 24 Environment .............................................................................................................. 25 About License............................................................................................................ 26 RSA BSAFE.......................................................................................................... 26 Heimdal................................................................................................................. 26 LZMA .................................................................................................................... 26 JPEG Code ........................................................................................................... 27 Libcurl ................................................................................................................... 27 FreeBSD ............................................................................................................... 27 OpenLDAP............................................................................................................ 28 DES....................................................................................................................... 30 AES....................................................................................................................... 30 TIFF (libtiff)............................................................................................................ 30 ICC Profile (Little cms) .......................................................................................... 30 XPS (XML Paper Specification) ............................................................................ 30 EDICT and COMPDIC .......................................................................................... 30 Legal Notice............................................................................................................... 32 2 Product Overview .................................................................................................... 33 Machine Components................................................................................................ 34 Power On / Off........................................................................................................... 43 Powering On ......................................................................................................... 43 Powering Off ......................................................................................................... 44 Circuit Breaker........................................................................................................... 45 Energy Saver Mode................................................................................................... 46 Entering the Energy Saver Mode.......................................................................... 46 Exiting the Energy Saver Mode ............................................................................ 47

Control Panel..............................................................................................................48 Full Size Color UI (Optional) ..................................................................................50 Screens and Buttons Displayed.............................................................................52 Entering Text ..............................................................................................................53 Installing the Tray Attachment on the Finisher-B1 .....................................................54 3 Copy ..........................................................................................................................55 Copying Procedure.....................................................................................................56 Step 1 Loading Documents ...................................................................................56 Step 2 Selecting Features .....................................................................................58 Step 3 Entering a Quantity.....................................................................................59 Step 4 Starting the Copy Job.................................................................................60 Step 5 Confirming the Copy Job in Job Status ......................................................61 Operations during Copying.........................................................................................62 Stopping the Copy Job ..........................................................................................62 Changing the Number of Copies ...........................................................................63 Interrupting the Copy Job ......................................................................................64 Copy ...........................................................................................................................65 Reduce/Enlarge (Making Enlarged/Reduced Copies) ...........................................65 Paper Supply (Selecting the Paper for Copying) ...................................................69 Output Color (Selecting the Color for Copying) .....................................................71 Original Type (Selecting the Document Type).......................................................75 Copy Output (Specifying Finishing Options)..........................................................75 Multiple-Up (Copying Multiple Pages onto One Sheet) .........................................75 Lighten/Darken (Adjusting the Copy Density)........................................................75 Image Quality .............................................................................................................76 Original Type (Selecting the Document Type).......................................................76 Image Options (Adjusting Copy Density / Sharpness / Saturation of Images) ......77 Image Enhancement (Erasing the Background Color of Documents / Adjusting Contrast) ................................................................................................................78 Color Effects (Selecting an Image Quality)............................................................79 Color Balance (Adjusting Color Balance) ..............................................................79 Color Shift (Adjusting the Color Tone) ...................................................................80 Layout Adjustment......................................................................................................81 Book Copying (Copying Facing Pages onto Separate Sheets) .............................81 2 Sided Book Copying (Making 2 Sided Copies of Facing Pages)........................82 Original Size (Specifying the Scan Size for the Document)...................................84 Mixed Sized Originals (Scanning Different Size Documents Simultaneously) ......85 Edge Erase (Erasing Edges and Margin Shadows of the Document) ...................86 Image Shift (Adjusting the Image Position)............................................................87 Image Rotation (Changing the Orientation of Images) ..........................................89 Invert Image (Making Reversed Copies of Images) ..............................................91 Original Orientation (Specifying the Orientation of Loaded Documents) ...............91 2 Sided Copying (Making 2 sided Copies).............................................................92 Output Format ............................................................................................................94

Table of Contents

Booklet Creation (Creating a Booklet) .................................................................. 94 Covers (Attaching Covers to Copies).................................................................... 98 Transparency Options (Inserting Blank Sheets between Transparencies) ........... 99 Multiple-Up (Copying Multiple Pages onto One Sheet) ...................................... 100 Poster (Making Enlarged Copies Spread over Multiple Sheets)......................... 101 Repeat Image (Making Multiple Copies on One Sheet)...................................... 102 Annotations (Adding a Comment / a Date / Page Numbers to Copies) .............. 103 Watermark (Printing Control Numbers on the Background of Copies) ............... 109 Secure Watermark (Managing Document Security) ........................................... 112 Folding (Outputting Bi-Folded Paper) ................................................................. 113 Preset Repeat Image (Making Multiple Copies on a Single Sheet) .................... 114 2 Sided Copying (Making 2 Sided Copies) ......................................................... 114 Copy Output (Specifying Finishing Options) ....................................................... 115 ID Card Copying (Copying Both Sides of an ID Card) ........................................ 116 Job Assembly .......................................................................................................... 118 Build Job (Processing Documents Scanned with Different Settings as One Job) ........................................................................................................ 118 Sample Job (Checking the Finished Output of the Copy)................................... 122 Combine Original Sets (Adding Originals) .......................................................... 123 Delete Outside/Delete Inside (Deleting Outside or Inside of the Selected Area)............................................... 124 Stored Programming (Calling a Stored Program for Build Job) .......................... 126 4 Fax .......................................................................................................................... 127 Fax Procedure ......................................................................................................... 128 Step 1 Loading Documents................................................................................. 128 Step 2 Selecting Features................................................................................... 130 Step 3 Specifying Destinations ........................................................................... 131 Step 4 Starting the Fax Job ................................................................................ 132 Step 5 Confirming the Fax Job in Job Status...................................................... 133 Operations during Faxing ........................................................................................ 134 Stopping the Fax Job .......................................................................................... 134 Changing the Scan Settings ............................................................................... 135 About Internet Fax ................................................................................................... 136 Internet Fax Overview......................................................................................... 136 Sending Internet Fax........................................................................................... 138 Receiving Internet Fax ........................................................................................ 139 Useful Features................................................................................................... 140 About Server Fax..................................................................................................... 143 Sending Server Fax ............................................................................................ 143 Fax/Internet Fax ...................................................................................................... 145 Internet Fax/Fax (Selecting Internet Fax/Fax) .................................................... 145 + Add (Sending Faxes to Multiple Recipients) .................................................... 145 Specifying a Destination Using the Address Book.............................................. 146 Speed Dialing (Specifying a Destination Using an Address Number) ................ 148

Specifying a Destination using a One Touch Button ...........................................148 Specifying a Destination using the Keyboard Screen..........................................149 Specifying a Destination using the Redial Feature ..............................................150 Entering Specific Symbols ...................................................................................150 Removing/Confirming a Recipient .......................................................................151 Lighten/Darken (Adjusting Fax Density) ..............................................................151 2 Sided Scanning (Transmitting 2-sided Originals) .............................................152 Original Type (Selecting the Document Type).....................................................153 Resolution (Specifying the Scanning Resolution)................................................153 Layout Adjustment....................................................................................................155 2 Sided Scanning (Transmitting 2-sided Originals) .............................................155 Original Size (Specifying the Scan Size for the Original).....................................155 Mixed Sized Originals (Scanning Different Size Documents Simultaneously) ....156 Book Faxing (Scanning Facing Pages onto Separate Sheets)............................157 Reduce/Enlarge (Specifying a Scan Ratio) .........................................................158 Fax/Internet Fax Options..........................................................................................159 Acknowledgement Report (Confirming Transmission Results) ...........................159 Starting Rate (Selecting a Communication Mode)...............................................161 Priority Send / Delay Start (Specifying Send Priority/Send Time) .......................162 Transmission Header Text (Adding Sender Name and Phone Number to Faxes).....................................................................................163 Cover Page (Transmitting Documents With a Cover Page) ................................164 Internet Fax Subject (Specifying the Internet Fax Subject) .................................166 Internet Fax Message (Editing the Internet Fax Mail Contents) ..........................166 Recipient Print Sets (Printing Multiple Sets at the Destination Machine) ............167 Multiple-Up (Combining Multiple Pages into One Sheet) ....................................168 Remote Mailbox (Using Remote Mailbox) ...........................................................168 F Code (Using F Code Transmission) .................................................................170 Internet Fax Profile (Specifying Internet Fax Profiles) .........................................172 Encryption (Sending Internet Fax Encrypted by S/MIME) ...................................173 Digital Signature (Sending iFax with a Digital Signature by S/MIME)..................174 More Options............................................................................................................175 Remote Polling (Retrieving Documents from Remote Machines) .......................175 Store for Polling (Allowing Remote Machines to Retrieve Documents from Your Machine) ..............................................................................................................177 On-hook (Confirming Remote Machine Response Prior to Transmission)..........178 Broadcast .................................................................................................................180 Broadcast Send (Transmitting to Multiple Recipients).........................................180 Relay Broadcast (Transmitting Documents Through a Relay Station) ................180 Remote Relay Broadcast (Performing Relay Broadcast to Remote Locations) ..184 Receiving Faxes.......................................................................................................189 Switching between Auto Receive and Manual Receive.......................................189 Using Auto Receive .............................................................................................189 Using Manual Receive.........................................................................................190 Using Mailbox Receive ........................................................................................190

Table of Contents

Facsimile Information Services................................................................................ 191 Using the Receiver.............................................................................................. 191 When Not Using a Receiver................................................................................ 192 5 Scan ........................................................................................................................ 193 Scanning Procedure ................................................................................................ 194 Step 1 Loading Documents................................................................................. 194 Step 2 Selecting Features................................................................................... 196 Step 3 Starting the Scan Job .............................................................................. 197 Step 4 Confirming the Scan Job in Job Status ................................................... 199 Step 5 Saving the Scanned Data........................................................................ 199 Operations during Scanning .................................................................................... 200 Stopping the Scan Job........................................................................................ 200 Changing Scan Settings ..................................................................................... 201 E-mail ...................................................................................................................... 203 Address Book (Specifying an E-mail Address) ................................................... 203 New Recipient (Entering an Address)................................................................. 206 Add Me (Adding the Senders Address).............................................................. 207 Recipient(s) (Editing a Recipient) ....................................................................... 207 From (Setting the Senders Address).................................................................. 208 Subject (Setting the Subject) .............................................................................. 209 Message (Entering the E-mail Body) .................................................................. 209 Color Scanning (Selecting an Output Color)....................................................... 209 2 Sided Scanning (Scanning Both Sides of a Document)................................... 209 Original Type (Selecting the Document Type) .................................................... 209 File Format (Selecting a File Format for Output Data)........................................ 209 Scan to Mailbox ....................................................................................................... 210 Color Scanning (Selecting an Output Color)....................................................... 210 2 Sided Scanning (Scanning Both Sides of a Document)................................... 210 Original Type (Selecting the Document Type) .................................................... 210 Network Scanning ................................................................................................... 211 Color Scanning (Selecting an Output Color)....................................................... 212 2 Sided Scanning (Scanning Both Sides of a Document)................................... 212 Original Type (Selecting the Document Type) .................................................... 212 File Format (Selecting a File Format for Output Data)........................................ 212 Scan to PC .............................................................................................................. 213 Transfer Protocol ................................................................................................ 213 Address Book (Specifying a Destination PC Using the Address Book) .............. 214 Browse... (Specifying a Destination PC by Browsing Your Network).................. 214 Specifying a Destination (Specifying a Destination PC Using the Screen Keyboard)............................................................................... 215 Color Scanning (Selecting an Output Color)....................................................... 216 2 Sided Scanning (Scanning Both Sides of a Document)................................... 216 Original Type (Selecting the Document Type) .................................................... 216 File Format (Selecting a File Format for Output Data)........................................ 216

General Scan Features ............................................................................................217 Color Scanning (Selecting an Output Color)........................................................217 2 Sided Scanning (Scanning Both Sides of a Document) ...................................218 Original Type (Selecting the Document Type).....................................................219 File Format (Selecting a File Format for Output Data).........................................220 Advanced Settings ...................................................................................................227 Photographs (Scanning a Color Photograph)......................................................227 Image Options (Adjusting Scan Density and Image Sharpness).........................228 Image Enhancement (Erasing the Background Color of Documents/Adjusting Contrast) ..............................................................................................................228 Shadow Suppression (Suppressing the Document Background)........................229 Color Space (Specifying Color Space) ................................................................229 Layout Adjustment....................................................................................................230 Resolution (Specifying a Scanning Resolution)...................................................230 2 Sided Scanning (Scanning Both Sides of a Document) ...................................230 Book Scanning (Scanning Facing Pages on Separate Sheets) ..........................231 Original Size (Specifying a Scan Size) ................................................................232 Mixed Sized Originals (Scanning Different Size Documents Simultaneously) ....232 Edge Erase (Erasing Edges and Margin Shadows in the Document) .................233 Reduce/Enlarge (Specifying a Scanning Ratio)...................................................234 E-mail Options/Filing Options...................................................................................236 Quality/File Size (Specifying an Image Compression Ratio When Scanning).....236 Read Receipts (Specifying Read Receipts).........................................................237 Split Send (Sending in Sections) .........................................................................237 File Name (Specifying a Name for the File to be Sent) .......................................238 Reply To (Specifying a Reply Address) ...............................................................238 File Name Conflict (Setting the Action to be Taken for File Name Conflict) ........239 Document Name (Specifying a Name for the File to be Saved) ..........................239 Encryption (Sending E-mail Encrypted by S/MIME) ............................................239 Digital Signature (Sending E-mail with a Digital Signature by S/MIME) ..............240 Login Name .........................................................................................................240 Password .............................................................................................................240 Meta Data ............................................................................................................240 6 Send from Mailbox .................................................................................................241 Mailbox Operating Procedure...................................................................................242 Step 1 Opening the [Send from Mailbox] Screen ................................................242 Step 2 Selecting a Mailbox ..................................................................................242 Step 3 Checking/Selecting Mailbox Documents ..................................................243 Step 4 Operating Mailbox Documents .................................................................243 Selecting a Mailbox ..................................................................................................244 Checking/Operating Documents in a Mailbox ..........................................................245 Checking Document Details .....................................................................................247 Printing Documents in a Mailbox..............................................................................248 Configuring/Starting Job Flow ..................................................................................251

Table of Contents

Job Flow Restrictions.......................................................................................... 255 7 Job Flow Sheets .................................................................................................... 257 Job Flow Procedure................................................................................................. 258 Step 1 Opening the [Job Flow Sheets] Screen ................................................... 258 Step 2 Selecting a Job Flow Sheet ..................................................................... 259 Step 3 Confirming/Changing the Job Flow Sheet ............................................... 259 Step 4 Starting the Job Flow Sheet .................................................................... 259 Selecting/Changing a Job Flow Sheet..................................................................... 260 8 Stored Programming............................................................................................. 263 Stored Programming Overview ............................................................................... 264 Registering/Deleting/Renaming Stored Programs................................................... 265 Registering Stored Programs.............................................................................. 266 Registering Stored Programs for Build Job......................................................... 267 Deleting Stored Programs................................................................................... 268 Entering/Changing a Stored Program Name ...................................................... 268 Assigning/Changing Icons for Stored Programs ................................................. 269 Calling a Stored Program ........................................................................................ 270 Calling a Stored Program for Build Job............................................................... 271 9 Web Applications .................................................................................................. 273 Web Applications..................................................................................................... 274 Accessing Web Applications ................................................................................... 275 Accessing Using Buttons Registered on the All Services Screen ........................... 276 10 Media Print (Text and Photos).............................................................................. 277 Overview of Media Print .......................................................................................... 278 Supported Media and File Formats..................................................................... 278 Notes and Restrictions........................................................................................ 279 Components and their Functions............................................................................. 281 Inserting and Ejecting Media ................................................................................... 282 Inserting Media ................................................................................................... 282 Ejecting Media .................................................................................................... 282 Selecting Files ......................................................................................................... 283 [Select From List] Screen.................................................................................... 284 Setting the Printing Options..................................................................................... 285 Media Print - Photos ........................................................................................... 285 Media Print - Text................................................................................................ 286 Index Print........................................................................................................... 287 11 Job Status .............................................................................................................. 289 Job Status Overview................................................................................................ 290 Checking Current/Pending Jobs.............................................................................. 291 Checking Completed Jobs....................................................................................... 292

Printing and Deleting Stored Documents .................................................................293 Secure Print .........................................................................................................293 Sample Set ..........................................................................................................295 Delayed Print .......................................................................................................296 Charge Print.........................................................................................................298 Private Charge Print ............................................................................................300 Public Mailbox......................................................................................................302 Undelivered Faxes...............................................................................................303 Printing Pending Jobs ..............................................................................................304 Handling Error Terminations ....................................................................................305 12 Computer Operations ............................................................................................307 Features Overview ...................................................................................................308 Print ..........................................................................................................................309 Print Features ......................................................................................................309 Setup ...................................................................................................................310 Printing.................................................................................................................311 E-mail Printing ..........................................................................................................312 Setup ...................................................................................................................312 Sending E-Mail ....................................................................................................312 Sending Fax .............................................................................................................314 Registering Destinations......................................................................................314 Importing Scanned Data...........................................................................................316 Importing to a TWAIN Compatible Application ....................................................316 Importing Using Mailbox Viewer 3 .......................................................................318 Importing Using CentreWare Internet Services ...................................................320 Importing Using EasyOperator ............................................................................322 CentreWare Internet Services ..................................................................................323 13 Appendix .................................................................................................................327 Glossary ...................................................................................................................328 Index...............................................................................................................................335

1 Before Using the Machine


This chapter describes how to use this guide, as well as safety notes and legal notice you need to read before using the machine. Preface .......................................................................................................10 Types of Manuals .......................................................................................11 Using This Guide ........................................................................................12 Safety Notes ............................................................................................... 15 Regulation...................................................................................................24 Environment................................................................................................ 25 About License .............................................................................................26 Legal Notice................................................................................................ 32

1 Before Using the Machine

Preface
Thank you for selecting the ApeosPort-III C3300/C2200/C2201, DocuCentre-III C3300/ C2200/C2201 (hereafter referred to as the machine). This guide explains how to operate the machine and the precautions that must be followed during operation. To get the most out of the machine and to use it effectively, be sure to read this guide before use. This guide assumes that an operator has a basic knowledge of the operating environment of the personal computer in use, networking environments, and how to operate a personal computer. For information on the environment of the personal computer in use, basic knowledge of networking environments, and how to operate a personal computer, refer to the manuals provided with the personal computer, operating system, and network system. After reading this guide, be sure to keep it handy for quick reference. It will be useful in case you forget how to perform operations or if a problem occurs with the machine. For instructions on configuring your network environment, refer to the Administrator Guide. For information about optional accessories for the printer functionality, also refer to the guide provided with each optional accessory.
Before Using the Machine

In this manual, safety instructions are preceded by the symbol . Always read and follow the instructions before performing the required procedures.

The equipment is certified by NEMKO in compliance with [IEC60950-1 (AS/NZS 3260)]. The equipment is manufactured under an ISO 9001 Quality System. The equipment is also certified in compliance with applicable standards by various national bodies. The equipment was tested and is certified by the New Zealand Ministry of Commerce in conformance with CISPR publ. 22 (AS/NZISS CISPR22:2002) which relates to radio frequency interference regulations, and also complies with the Australian Communication Authority requirements. NOTE: Machines intended for use in South Korea and Taiwan have been certified separately in compliance with their requirements. Any unauthorized alteration, which includes the addition of new functions or the connection of external devices, may impact this certification. Contact your local Xerox representative for a list of approved accessories.

10

Types of Manuals

Types of Manuals
We provide the following guides for optimum usage of the machine.
Before Using the Machine

Accompanying Manuals
The machine comes with the following documentation, which is referred to as accompanying manuals. The accompanying manuals include the descriptions of how to configure and use the machine. User Guide (this guide) Describes all the necessary steps for copy/print/scan/fax. Administrator Guide Aimed toward machine administrators, this guide describes how to set up the network environment and how to solve problems that may occur with the machine. Quick Reference Guide Introduces the basic operations of the machine, as well as daily management and maintenance. Manual (HTML) A guide for installing print drivers, configuring the printer environment, etc. This manual is included in the CD-ROM on the Driver CD Kit.

Guides for Optional Accessories


Optional accessories are available for this machine. Some of them come with user guides. The user guides, provided as printed or online documentation, are referred to as guides for optional accessories. The guides for optional accessories describe all the necessary steps for using the optional accessories and installing the software.

11

1 Before Using the Machine

Using This Guide


This guide provides all the necessary copy/print/fax/scan operating procedures, and precautions.
Before Using the Machine

Organization of This Guide


This guide consists of the following chapters. 1 Before Using the Machine Describes how to use this guide as well as cautions on using the product safely and legally. 2 Product Overview Describes machines basic information such as the names of components, how to switch on and off, how to use the touch screen, and how to set the energy saver feature. 3 Copy Describes the copy features and operations. 4 Fax Describes the fax features and operations. 5 Scan Describes the scan features and operations 6 Send from Mailbox Describes the mailbox features and how to work with mailboxes. 7 Job Flow sheets Describes operations using a job flow created on a remote system. 8 Stored Programming Describes the stored programming feature. 9 Web Applications Describes the operations to connect to web applications. 10 Media Print (Text and Photos) Describes basic operations and features of Media Print that allows you to print image data or document files. 11 Job Status Describes how to check job status and to cancel jobs. 12 Computer Operations Describes operations performed from a computer, such as printing documents, importing scanned documents, Direct Fax, as well as using CentreWare Internet Services. 13 Appendix A glossary of terms used in this guide.

12

Using This Guide

Conventions
The screen images and illustrations that are used in this guide are based on the machine configuration with the various options. Some of the items in the screen images may not be displayed or there may be features that cannot be used depending on the machine configuration. In this document, "Computer" refers to a personal computer or workstation. The following terms are used in this guide: Important Note " " : Indicates important information that you should read. : Indicates additional information on operations or features. : : [ ] : A cross-reference included in this guide. Refers to names of CD-ROM, features, and touch screen messages and input text. Refers to folders, files, applications, button or menu names displayed in the touch screen. The names of menus, commands, windows, or dialog boxes displayed on the computer screen and their buttons and menu names. < < > > button : > key : : Indicates a hardware button on the computer. Indicates a key on the keyboard of the computer. Indicates a path to a certain item within a procedure on the control panel. Example: When you see the procedure "select [Tools] > [Setup] > [Mailbox]", this means that you need to select [Tools], select [Setup], and then select [Mailbox]. Indicates a path to a certain item within a procedure on a computer. Example: When you see the procedure "to search for files and folders, click [Start] > [Search] > [For Files or Folders]", this means that you need to click [Start], click [Search], and then click [For Files or Folders] in order to search for files and folders. The reference is indicated in the following manner: "Refer to "5 Tools" > "Common Service Settings" > "Audio Tone" in the Administrator Guide." The sentence above means that you need to refer to the section "Audio Tone", which can be found under "Common Service Settings" in chapter 5 Tools of the Administrator Guide.

Before Using the Machine

The following symbols are used in this guide:

13

1 Before Using the Machine

Orientation of documents or paper is described in this guide as follows: , ,Long Edge Feed (LEF):Loading with one of the long edges of the document or paper. , ,Short Edge Feed (SEF):Loading with one of the short edges of the document or paper.
LEF Orientation SEF Orientation

Before Using the Machine

Paper feed direction

Paper feed direction

14

Safety Notes

Safety Notes
Before using this product, read "Safety Notes" carefully for safety use. This product and recommended supplies have been tested and found to comply with strict safety requirements including safety agency approvals and compliance with environmental standards. Follow the following instructions for safety use. WARNING Any unauthorized alteration including an addition of new functions or connection to external devices may not be covered by the product warranty. Contact your local Fuji Xerox representative for more information. Follow all warning instructions marked on this product. The warning marks stand for the followings:
Used for item that if not followed strictly, can lead death or severe or fatal injuries and the possibility to do it is comparatively high. Used for items that if not followed strictly, can lead to severe or fatal injuries. Used for items that if not followed strictly, can cause injuries to user or damages to machine. : A symbol for items to pay attention to when handling machine. Follow instructions carefully to use machine safely.

Before Using the Machine

Static Sensitive

Caution

Flammable Explodable

Electric shock

Heated surface

Moving object

Pinched fingers

: A symbol for prohibited items. Follow instructions carefully to avoid any dangerous acts.

Prohibited

No fire

Do not touch

Do not use Do not in bathroom tear down

Keep away from wet

Never touch

: A symbol for items that must be performed. Follow instructions carefully to carry out these essential tasks.

Instructions

Unplug

Ground/ Earth

15

1 Before Using the Machine

Electrical Safety

Before Using the Machine

This product shall be operated by the power source as indicated on the product's data plate. Consult your local power company to check if your power source meets the requirements. WARNING: Connect this product to a protective earth circuit. This product is supplied with a plug that has a protective earth pin. The plug fits only into an earthed electrical outlet. This is a safety feature. If the plug doesn't fit to the outlet, contact an electrician to replace the outlet to avoid risk of electric shock. Never use an earthed adapter plug to connect the product to the electrical outlet that has no earth connection terminal. Improper connection of a grounding conductor may cause electric shock. Plug the power cord directly into a grounded electrical outlet. To prevent overheat and a fire accident, do not use an extension cord, a multi-plug adaptor or a multiple connector. Consult your local Fuji Xerox representative to check if an outlet is grounded. Connect this product to a branch circuit or an outlet that has larger capacity than the rated ampere and voltage of this product. See the data plate on the rear panel of this product for its rated ampere and voltage. Never touch the power cord with wet hands. It may cause electric shock.

Do not place an object on the power cord.

Always keep the plug connection free of dust. The dusty and damp environment may bring about minute electric current in a connector. It may generate heat and eventually cause a fire accident. To avoid the risk of electric shock and a fire accident, only use the power cord supplied with this product or the ones designated by Fuji Xerox. The power cord is exclusive use for this product. Do not use it for any other product. Do not damage or alter the power cord. Damage and alteration may generate heat and eventually cause electric shock or a fire accident. If the power cord is damaged or insulated wires are exposed, contact your local Fuji Xerox representative for its replacement. Do not use a damaged or uninsulated cord to avoid the risk of electric shock and a fire accident.

When cleaning this product, always switch off and unplug it. Access to a live machine interior may cause electric shock. Do not unplug or re-plug this product with the switch on. Plugging and unplugging a live connector may deform the plug and generate heat, and eventually cause a fire accident. Hold the plug not the cord when unplugging this product, or it may damage the cord and cause electric shock or a fire accident. Switch off and unplug the product when it (i.e., fax function) is not used over weekends or long holidays. Please note that it cannot receive fax message during switch-off.

16

Safety Notes

Once a month, switch off this product and check if the power cord is plugged firmly into an electrical outlet; the plug is not excessively heated, rusted or bent; the plug and electrical outlet are free of dust; and the power cord is not cracked or worn down. Once you notice any unusual condition, switch off and unplug this product first and contact your local Fuji Xerox representative.

Before Using the Machine

Machine Installation

Do not locate this product where people might step on or trip over the power cord. Friction or excessive pressure may generate heat and eventually cause electric shock or a fire accident.

Never locate this product in the following places: Near radiators or any other heat sources Near volatile flammable materials such as curtains In the hot, humid, dusty or poorly ventilated environment In the place receiving direct sunlight Near cookers or humidifiers Locate this product on a level and sturdy surface that can withstand a weight of 230 Kg (maximum weight when Full Size Color UI, Full Size Color UI Installation Kit and Finisher-C1 with Booklet Maker are installed). Otherwise, if tilted, the product may fall over and cause injuries. Locate this product in a well-ventilated area. Do not obstruct ventilation openings of the product. Keep the minimum clearance as follows for ventilation and an access to the power plug. Unplug the product if an abnormal condition is noted.

With the document cover


100

679

1582

403

70

1046

100

400 (Unit: mm)

1216

17

1 Before Using the Machine

Main Body
100

Before Using the Machine

679

1582 403

70

1046

100

400 (Unit: mm)

1216

With Finisher-A1 (optional)


100

679

1582

403

70

1129

50

400 (Unit: mm)

1249

With Finisher-B1 (optional) and Side Tray (optional)


100

679

1582

403

70

1666

50

400 (Unit: mm)

1786

18

Safety Notes

With Booklet Maker Unit for Finisher-B1 (optional) and Side Tray (optional)
100

Before Using the Machine

685

1582

397

70

1666

50

400 (Unit: mm)

1786

With Finisher-C1 (optional) and Side Tray (optional)


100

679

1582

403

70

1863

80

400 (Unit: mm)

2013

With Finisher-C1 with Booklet Maker (optional) and Side Tray (optional)
100

679

1582

403

70

1922

80

400 (Unit: mm)

2072

19

1 Before Using the Machine

Do not incline the product at more than 10 degree angle. Otherwise, it may fall over and cause injuries.
Before Using the Machine

Always lock the wheels of this product after installation. Otherwise, it may fall over or slide and cause injuries.

To keep this product in a good performance and condition, always use it in the following environment: Temperature: 10 - 32C Humidity: 15 - 85% When the product is left in a chilly room and the room is rapidly warmed up by heater, dew condensation may form inside the product and cause a partial deletion on printing.

Operational Safety

The operator's product maintenance procedures are described in the customer documentation supplied with this product. Do not carry out any other maintenance procedures not described in the documentation. This product features safety design not to allow operators access to hazard areas. The hazard areas are isolated from operators by covers or protectors which require a tool to remove. To prevent electric shock and injuries, never remove those covers and protectors.

20

Safety Notes

To avoid the risk of electric shock and a fire accident, switch off and unplug the product promptly in the following conditions, then contact your local Fuji Xerox representative. The product emits smoke or its surface is unusually hot. The product emits unusual noise or odor. The power cord is cracked or worn down. A circuit breaker, fuse or any other safety device is activated. Any liquid is spilled into the product. The product is soaked in water. Any part of the product is damaged. Do not insert any object into slots or openings of this product. Do not place any of the followings on the product: Liquid container such as flower vases or coffee cups Metal parts such as staples or clips Heavy objects If liquid is spilled over or metal parts are slipped into the product, it may cause electric shock or a fire accident. Do not use conductive paper such as origami paper, carbonic paper or conductively-coated paper. When paper jam occurs, it may cause short-circuit and eventually a fire accident. When cleaning this product, use the designated cleaning materials exclusive to it. Other cleaning materials may result in poor performance of the product. Never use aerosol cleaners, or it may catch fire and cause explosion. If you need to pull out a tray to remove paper jam, contact your local Fuji Xerox representative. Do not pull out a tray, otherwise it may cause injuries. Never play the CD-ROM supplied with the product on an audio player. Always use a CD-ROM player. Otherwise, large sound may damage audio players or your ears.

Before Using the Machine

Always follow all warning instructions marked on or supplied with this product. To avoid the risk of burn injuries and electric shock, never touch the area with the "High Temperature" or "High Voltage" marks on. Keep electrical and mechanical safety interlocks active. Keep the safety interlocks away from magnetic materials. Magnetic materials may accidentally activate the product and cause injuries or electric shock.

21

1 Before Using the Machine

A circuit breaker is embedded in this product. If current leakage occurs, the circuit breaker automatically cuts off power circuit to prevent electric shock and a fire accident. The circuit breaker is normally ON ("|"). Check once a month if the circuit breaker works properly in accordance with the following procedures: (1) Turn off the power of the product. (2) Push the RESET button of the circuit breaker and make sure the button is kept retracted even after the pushing force is released. (3) Push the TEST button lightly with a sharp edge such as pen tip and make sure that the RESET button returns to the projected position. This is the end of the check procedure. (4) Push the RESET button again and make sure the button is kept retracted.
Power Switch

Before Using the Machine

1
Test button Reset button

If the circuit does not work properly, contact your local Fuji Xerox representative. Do not attempt to remove a paper jammed deeply inside the product, particularly a paper wrapped around a fuser or a heat roller. Otherwise, it may cause injuries or burns. Switch off the product promptly and contact your local Fuji Xerox representative. Never touch the paper output area of the finisher during operation. It may cause injuries. Be careful in removing jammed staples.

Do not apply excessive force to hold thick document on the platen glass. It may break the glass and cause injuries. Ventilate well during extended operation or mass copying. It may affect the office air environment due to odor such as ozone in a poorly ventilated room. Provide proper ventilation to ensure the comfortable and safe environment. Never touch the exposed connectors around this label. It may cause damage to the parts due to static discharge.

Consumable

Store all consumables in accordance with the instructions given on its package or container.

22

Safety Notes

Use a broom or a wet cloth to wipe off spilled toner. Never use a vacuum cleaner for the spills. It may catch fire by electric sparks inside the vacuum cleaner and cause explosion. If you spill a large volume of toner, contact your local Fuji Xerox representative. Never throw a toner cartridge into an open flame. Remaining toner in the cartridge may catch fire and cause burn injuries or explosion. If you have a used toner cartridge no longer needed, contact your local Fuji Xerox representative for its disposal. Never throw a waste toner bottle into an open flame. Toner may catch fire and cause burn injuries or explosion. If you have a used waste toner bottle no longer needed, contact your local Fuji Xerox representative for its disposal. Fuser Safety Do not remove the fuser unit. When removing paper jam from the fuser unit, contact your local Fuji Xerox representative. Otherwise, it may cause injuries.
Before Using the Machine

Keep the drum cartridges and toner cartridges out of the reach of children. If a child accidentally swallows toner, spit it out, rinse mouth with water, drink water and consult a physician immediately. When replacing the drum cartridges and toner cartridges, be careful not to spill the toner. In case of any toner spills, avoid contact with clothes, skin, eyes and mouth as well as inhalation. If toner spills onto your skin or clothing, wash it off with soap and water. If you get toner particles in your eyes, wash it out with plenty of water for at least 15 minutes until irritation is gone. Consult a physician if necessary. If you inhale toner particles, move to a fresh air location and rinse your mouth with water. If you swallow toner, spit it out, rinse your mouth with water, drink plenty of water and consult a physician immediately.

23

1 Before Using the Machine

Regulation
Radio Frequency Emissions (Class B)
This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to the International Standard for Electromagnetic Interference (CISPR Publ. 22) and Radiocommunications Act 1992 in Australia/New Zealand. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This product generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this product does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning this product off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between this product and the receiver. Connect this product into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. Changes and modifications to this product not specifically approved by Fuji Xerox may void the users authority to operate this product.
Before Using the Machine

Product Safety Certification (UL, CB)


This product is certified by the following agency using the safety standards listed. Agency NEMKO Standard IEC60950-1:ed. 2

24

Environment

Environment
Emissions of dust, ozone, benzene, total volatile organic compounds(TVOC) and styrene from this product have been tested and found to comply with the Eco Mark criteria on chemical emission for copiers. According to the test procedures defined by Blue Angel RAL UZ-122: 2006 Appendix 2, the test was performed under the condition of monochrome copying, using the toner type ApeosPort-III C3300/C2200/ C2201, DocuCentre-III C3300/C2200/C2201 toner (black) that is recommended for this product. For environmental protection and efficient use of resources, Fuji Xerox reuses returned toner cartridges and drum cartridges to make recycle parts, recycle materials or energy recovery. Proper disposal is required for toner cartridges and drum cartridges no longer needed. Do not open toner cartridges and drum cartridges. Return them to your local Fuji Xerox representative.
Before Using the Machine

25

1 Before Using the Machine

About License
This section describes information about licenses. Be sure to read through it.
Before Using the Machine

RSA BSAFE

This product includes RSA BSAFE Cryptographic software from RSA Security Inc.

Heimdal
Copyright (c)2000 Kungliga Tekniska Hgskolan (Royal Institute of Technology, Stockholm, Sweden). All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. 3. Neither the name of the Institute nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE INSTITUTE AND CONTRIBUTORS ''AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE INSTITUTE OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

LZMA
LZMA SDK 4.21 Copyright (c) 1999-2005 Igor Pavlov (2005-06-08) http://www.7-zip.org/ LZMA SDK 4.22 Copyright (c) 1999-2005 Igor Pavlov (2005-06-10) http://www.7-zip.org/

26

About License

JPEG Code
Our printer software uses some of the codes defined by the Independent JPEG Group.
Before Using the Machine

Libcurl
COPYRIGHT AND PERMISSION NOTICE Copyright (c) 1996 - 2006, Daniel Stenberg, <daniel@haxx.se>. All rights reserved. Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software for any purpose with or without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above copyright notice and this permission notice appear in all copies. THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. Except as contained in this notice, the name of a copyright holder shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization of the copyright holder.

FreeBSD
This product contains the part of FreeBSD codes. The FreeBSD Copyright Copyright 1994-2006 The FreeBSD Project. All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

27

1 Before Using the Machine

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE FREEBSD PROJECT ''AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FREEBSD PROJECT OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. The views and conclusions contained in the software and documentation are those of the authors and should not be interpreted as representing official policies, either expressed or implied, of the FreeBSD Project.

Before Using the Machine

OpenLDAP
Copyright 1998-2006 The OpenLDAP Foundation All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted only as authorized by the OpenLDAP Public License. A copy of this license is available in the file LICENSE in the top-level directory of the distribution or, alternatively, at <http://www.OpenLDAP.org/license.html>. OpenLDAP is a registered trademark of the OpenLDAP Foundation. Individual files and/or contributed packages may be copyright by other parties and/or subject to additional restrictions. This work is derived from the University of Michigan LDAP v3.3 distribution. Information concerning this software is available at <http://www.umich.edu/~dirsvcs/ldap/ldap.html>. This work also contains materials derived from public sources. Additional information about OpenLDAP can be obtained at <http://www.openldap.org/>. --Portions Copyright 1998-2006 Kurt D. Zeilenga. Portions Copyright 1998-2006 Net Boolean Incorporated. Portions Copyright 2001-2006 IBM Corporation. All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted only as authorized by the OpenLDAP Public License. ---

28

About License

Portions Copyright 1999-2005 Howard Y.H. Chu. Portions Copyright 1999-2005 Symas Corporation. Portions Copyright 1998-2003 Hallvard B. Furuseth.
Before Using the Machine

All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that this notice is preserved. The names of the copyright holders may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without their specific prior written permission. This software is provided ''as is'' without express or implied warranty. --Portions Copyright (c) 1992-1996 Regents of the University of Michigan. All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms are permitted provided that this notice is preserved and that due credit is given to the University of Michigan at Ann Arbor. The name of the University may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. This software is provided ''as is'' without express or implied warranty. -----------------------------------------The OpenLDAP Public License Version 2.8, 17 August 2003 Redistribution and use of this software and associated documentation ("Software"), with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: 1. Redistributions in source form must retain copyright statements and notices, 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce applicable copyright statements and notices, this list of conditions, and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution, and 3. Redistributions must contain a verbatim copy of this document.. The OpenLDAP Foundation may revise this license from time to time. Each revision is distinguished by a version number. You may use this Software under terms of this license revision or under the terms of any subsequent revision of the license. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OPENLDAP FOUNDATION AND ITS CONTRIBUTORS ''AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OPENLDAP FOUNDATION, ITS CONTRIBUTORS, OR THE AUTHOR(S) OR OWNER(S) OF THE SOFTWARE BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,

29

1 Before Using the Machine

WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. The names of the authors and copyright holders must not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use or other dealing in this Software without specific, written prior permission. Title to copyright in this Software shall at all times remain with copyright holders. OpenLDAP is a registered trademark of the OpenLDAP Foundation. Copyright 1999-2003 The OpenLDAP Foundation, Redwood City, California, USA. All Rights Reserved. Permission to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this document is granted.
Before Using the Machine

1
DES
This product includes software developed by Eric Young(eay@mincom.oz.au)

AES
Copyright (c) 2003. Dr Brian Gladman. Worcester. UK. All rights reserved. This product uses published AES software provided by Dr Brian Gladman under BSD licensing terms.

TIFF (libtiff)
Lib TIFF copyright (c) 1988-1997 Sam leffler Copyright (c) 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics. Inc.

ICC Profile (Little cms)


Little cms copyright (c) 1988-2004 Marti Maria

XPS (XML Paper Specification)


This product may incorporate intellectual property owned by Microsoft Corporation. The terms and conditions upon which Microsoft is licensing such intellectual property may be found at http://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=52369.

EDICT and COMPDIC


The Japanese-English dictionaries (EDICT and COMPDIC) edited by The Electronic Dictionary Research and Development Group under the coordination of Professor James William Breen at Monash University are used in the searchable PDF kit option of Fuji Xerox.

30

About License

These Japanese-English dictionary files are licensed to customers under the terms and conditions of a Creative Commons Attribution-ShareAlike License. Prior to use, be sure to check the terms and conditions of this license at the URL below. Use of these Japanese-English dictionaries is not permitted unless you agree to the terms and conditions of this license. Furthermore, care should be taken because at the point in time that you begin to use these Japanese-English dictionaries as specified in the said license, you accept and agree to be bound by the terms and conditions of this license. The Japanese-English dictionaries are provided to customers on an as-is basis, and Fuji Xerox and the original supplier make no representations of warranties of any kind. Original Author Information (extracted from http://www.csse.monash.edu.au/~jwb/ edrdg/licence.html) Copyright over the documents covered by this statement is held by James William BREEN and The Electronic Dictionary Research and Development Group at Monash University. Monash University License Information http://www.csse.monash.edu.au/~jwb/edrdg/licence.html Information Regarding EDICT and COMPDIC http://www.csse.monash.edu.au/~jwb/edict.html http://www.csse.monash.edu.au/~jwb/compdic_doc.html Information Regarding the Creative Commons Attribution-ShareAlike License http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/2.5/legalcode

Before Using the Machine

31

1 Before Using the Machine

Legal Notice
Copying or printing certain documents may be illegal in your country. Penalties of fines or imprisonment may be imposed on those found guilty. The following are examples of items that may be illegal to copy or print in your country. Currency Banknotes and checks Bank and government bonds and securities Passports and identification cards Copyright material or trademarks without the consent of the owner Postage stamps and other negotiable instruments This list is not inclusive and no liability is assumed for either its completeness or accuracy. In case of doubt, contact your legal counsel.
Before Using the Machine

32

2 Product Overview
This chapter describes machines basic information such as the names of components, how to switch on and off, and how to use the touch screen. Machine Components.................................................................................34 Power On / Off ............................................................................................43 Circuit Breaker ............................................................................................45 Energy Saver Mode .................................................................................... 46 Control Panel ..............................................................................................48 Entering Text ..............................................................................................53 Installing the Tray Attachment on the Finisher-B1......................................54

2 Product Overview

Machine Components
This section describes the main components and functions of the machine. 4-Tray Model

Product Overview

2 3 12 4 5 6 7 11 8

10 9

No.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

Component
Document cover Document glass Control panel Inner output tray (optional) Center tray (Output tray) Power switch Front cover Tray 1, 2, 3, 4 Locking casters Adjusting foot Tray 5 (Bypass) Side tray (optional) Holds the document down. Load the originals.

Function

Consists of operation buttons, LED indicators, and a touch screen. Refer to "Control Panel" (P.48). Enables to deliver outputs by separating the center tray into two levels. Delivers copies and prints, facing down. Switches the power of the machine on/off. Open this cover to replace the consumables. Load paper. Used for locking the wheels of the machine. Lock these casters after moving the machine to its installation site. Prevents the machine from toppling over. Set this adjuster after moving the machine to its installation site. Used for loading non-standard paper (thick-stock paper, and other special media) that cannot be loaded in Trays 1 to 4. Delivers copies and prints, facing up.

34

Machine Components

Left side and rear views of the machine

5 9 8 7 6

1 2

Product Overview

No.
1 2 3 4 5 6

Component
Top left cover Upper left cover Bottom left cover Circuit breaker Parallel interface connector (optional) Interface connector to fax

Function
Open this cover to clear paper jams. Open this cover to clear paper jams by pressing the release lever. Open this cover to access the insides of the machine to clear paper jams. Automatically turns the machine off when a current leakage is detected. Connects to a Centronics-conformed interface cable, and connects the machine to a computer. Used when connecting to a fax kit. When not using the fax feature, it can be used to connect to a memory card reader or a USB memory. Connects to a USB cable for printer. Connects a memory card reader or a USB memory cable. Connects to a network cable.

7 8 9

USB 2.0 interface connector Memory card reader/USB memory connector 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX connector
Note

Before you open the upper left cover, exit the Low Power Mode and turn off the machine.

35

2 Product Overview

Inside

1 2 6

Product Overview

3 4 5

2
No.
1 2 3 4 5 6

Component
Drum cartridge release lever Toner cartridges Waste toner bottle (R5) Drum cartridges (R1, R2, R3, AR) Drum cartridge cover Fuser unit (R8)

Function
Unlock this cover when replacing a drum cartridge. Contains Black (K), Cyan (C), Magenta (M), and Yellow (Y) toner (image forming powder). Used to collect waste toner. Contains photoconductors R1, R2, R3, and R4. Open this cover when replacing a drum cartridge or cleaning the interior of the machine. Fuses toner on paper. Do not touch this unit as it is extremely hot.

36

Machine Components

Duplex automatic document feeder

1 2

Product Overview

2
No.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Lever Left cover Inner cover Document guides Document feeder tray Document output tray Document glass
Note

Component
Confirmation indicator

Function
Lights to confirm that the document is loaded correctly. Turn this lever to clear paper jams. Open this cover to access the insides of the machine to clear paper jams. Open this cover to access the insides of the machine to clear paper jams. Use these guides to align the edges of documents. Load the originals. Delivers scanned documents Scans the loaded documents.

In this guidebook, Duplex Auto Document Feeder is referred to as Document Feeder.

37

2 Product Overview

Telephone Line Connectors

LINE3

Product Overview

4
LINE2

3
TEL LINE1

No.
1

Name marked on the cover of the machine


TEL

Name displayed on the touch screen

Function
Enables you to connect the machine to a telephone device. When the add-on G3 port kit (optional) is installed, do not use this connector.

2 3 4

LINE 1 LINE 2 LINE 3


Note

Line 1 Line 2 Line 4

Use this connector to connect to a telephone line. Use this connector to connect to a telephone line. Use this connector to connect to a telephone line.

Fax feature is not provided for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more information, contact our Customer Support Center. LINE 2 (line 2) and LINE 3 (line 4) are optional. Normally, TEL is capped with a cover. When connecting a telephone device to the connector, contact our Customer Support Center.

38

Machine Components

Finisher-B1 (optional)

Product Overview

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

14 13 12 11

No.
1

Component
Tray attachment

Function
Install this attachment when delivering A4 finisher tray without stapling. Staples creased outputs Open this cover when replacing the booklet staple cartridge. Contains staples. Draw out this cartridge when replacing or adding staples, or clearing staple jams. Open this cover to access the insides of the machine to clear paper jams. Receives stapled or creased outputs. Creases outputs in half. Contains staples. Open this cover when clearing paper jams or replacing staples. Staples copies or prints. Open this cover when throwing punch scraps. Receives punch scraps from the puncher. or A5 paper to the

For details, refer to "Installing the Tray Attachment on the Finisher-B1" (P.54).

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

Booklet unit (optional) Booklet unit side cover Booklet staple cartridge Top cover Finisher tray Creaser unit Staple cartridge Front cover Finisher-B1 (optional) Front transport cover Hole-punch waste container

39

2 Product Overview

No.
13

Component
Hole-punch unit 2 and 4 holes Hole-punch unit 2 and 3 holes (US standard) (optional) Center tray (Front transport cover) Hole-punches outputs.
Note

Function
The distance between the two holes made with the Hole-punch unit 2 and 3 holes (US standard) is 70 mm, which is different from the 80 mm distance made with the Hole-punch unit 2 and 4 holes.

14

Delivers copies and prints when they are unable to be delivered to the output or finisher tray. Pull the cover upward when clearing paper jams.
Note Remove outputs delivered to the center tray constantly.

Product Overview

Note

Finisher-B1 is optional. In this guide, the Finisher-A1, Finisher-B1, and Finisher-C1 are referred to as the "Finisher". The power cord connected to Finisher-B1 is a connecting cord dedicated to the machine. Do not connect this cord to any other devices than the machine.

40

Machine Components

Finisher-A1 (optional)

5 4

1 2

Product Overview

2
No.
1 2 3 4 5

Component
Center tray Finisher-A1 (optional) Staple cartridge Front cover Top cover
Note

Function
Delivers copies or prints. Staples copies or prints. Contains staples. Draw out this cartridge when replacing or adding stables, or clearing staple jams. Open this cover when replacing staples or clearing staple jams. Open this cover to access the inside of the machine to clear paper jams.

Finisher-A1 is optional. In this guide, the Finisher-A1, Finisher-B1, and Finisher-C1 are referred to as the "Finisher".

41

2 Product Overview

Finisher-C1 (optional) and Finisher-C1 with Booklet Maker (optional)

1 2 3 4

Product Overview

5 6 7

No.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Component
Front cover Output tray Exit cover Finisher tray Staple cartridge Booklet tray Booklet unit Center tray (Front transport cover)

Function
Open this cover when clearing paper jams, replacing or adding staples, clearing staple jams, or throwing punch scraps. Receives documents. Open this cover to access the insides of the machine to clear paper jams. Delivers stapled outputs. Contains staples. Draw out this cartridge when replacing or adding staples, or clearing staple jams. Documents are delivered here when Folding is selected in the booklet creation function. Folds and staples outputs. Delivers copies and prints when they are unable to be delivered to the output or finisher tray. Pull the cover upward when clearing paper jams.
Note Remove outputs delivered to the center tray constantly.

Note

Finisher-C1 and Finisher-C1 with Booklet Maker are optional. In this guide, the Finisher-A1, Finisher-B1, and Finisher-C1 are referred to as the "Finisher".

42

Power On / Off

Power On / Off
To use the machine, turn its power on. The machine takes approximately 35 seconds to warm up and to be ready to copy or print. This may take more time depending on your machine configuration. Switch the power off at the end of the day or when not using the machine for an extended period of time. Use also the Energy Saver feature to save power consumption while the machine is not in use.
For information on the Energy Saver feature, refer to"Energy Saver Mode" (P.46).
Important If the machine is powered off, all the features of the machine will stop. When using the machine throughout the day for jobs such as receiving fax, do not power it off.

Product Overview

Powering On
Follow the step below to switch the power on.

Press the power switch to the [|] position to turn the power on.
Note The Please wait... message indicates that the machine is warming up. The machine is not available during warming up. The machine will be ready for use in 35 seconds. The time may vary depending on the machine configuration.

Note

If the machine does not power on, check that the power cord is plugged in, and the RESET button is in the reset position (depressed).

43

2 Product Overview

Powering Off
Follow the steps below to switch the power off.
Important Switching the power off may erase the data being processed.

Before turning the power off, make sure that all copy or print jobs have completely finished. Also, make sure that the <Online> indicator is not lit.
Important Do not switch the power off in the following situations: - While data is being received - While a job is being printed. - While a job is being copied - While a job is being scanned When turning off the machine, wait 5 seconds after outputs have been delivered.

Product Overview

Press the power switch to the [ ] position.


Important Power off processing is performed internally on the machine for a while after the power switch is turned off. Therefore, do not unplug the power cord from the power outlet immediately after turning the power switch off. Note When powering the machine on after it has been turned off, wait 10 seconds after the touch screen has gone dark.

44

Circuit Breaker

Circuit Breaker
The machine is provided with a circuit breaker. In the event of a current leakage, the breaker will automatically cut off the power circuit to prevent any leakage or fire from occurring. Set the RESET button to a depressed position as shown in the diagram. If the machine is not going to be used for a long period of time, turn off the power and unplug the power cord.
Power Switch

Test button Reset button

Product Overview

Press the TEST button at least once a month to see if the circuit breaker works properly. Make sure to connect the machine to a protective earth circuit. When the machine is not earthed, the circuit breaker may not work properly, and can cause a current leakage. When there is a fault in the circuit breaker, contact our Customer Support Center.
Note The RESET button automatically turns the machine off when a current leakage is detected. Normally, you do not operate the button. When you release the depressed RESET button, make sure that the machine has been switched off.

For information on how to check if the circuit breaker is working, refer to "Electrical Safety" (P.16).

45

2 Product Overview

Energy Saver Mode


The machine is installed with the Energy Saver feature that will automatically cut off the electricity to the machine if no copy or print data is received for a certain duration. The Energy Saver feature has two modes: Low Power mode and Sleep mode. The machine enters the Low Power mode after the preset time has elapsed if the machine is left unused for a fixed period of time. The machine then enters the Sleep mode if a further preset time elapses.
Product Overview

By default, the machine is set to enter the Low Power mode or the Sleep mode after one minute has lapsed. If the machine is left unused for one minute, it enters the Sleep mode. To enter the Energy Saver mode, press the <Energy Saver> button on the control panel, and then the machine enters the Energy Saver mode straight away. Low Power Mode In this mode, the power to the control panel and fuser unit is lowered to save power. The touch screen goes out, and the <Energy Saver> button on the control panel lights. To use the machine, press the <Energy Saver> button. The <Energy Saver> button goes out to indicate that the Energy Saver feature is cancelled. Sleep Mode In this mode, the power is lowered more than in the Low Power mode. The touch screen goes out, and the <Energy Saver> button on the control panel lights. To use the machine, press the <Energy Saver> button. The <Energy Saver> button goes out to indicate that the Energy Saver feature is cancelled.

Entering the Energy Saver Mode


The following describes how to enter the Energy Saver mode.

Press the <Energy Saver> button.


Note The machine will not enter the Energy Saver mode while copy or print jobs are in progress. Press the <Energy Saver> button after finishing the jobs.
1 4 7 2 5 8 0 C 3 6 9 #

<Energy Saver> button

46

Energy Saver Mode

Exiting the Energy Saver Mode


The following describes how to exit the Energy Saver mode. The Energy Saver mode is exited in the following instances: Pressing the <Energy Saver> button Receiving data Selecting [Apply] in CentreWare Internet Services

Press the <Energy Saver> button.


1 4 7 2 5 8 0 C 3 6 9 #

Product Overview

<Energy Saver> button

47

2 Product Overview

Control Panel
The following describes the names and functions of components on the control panel.

Product Overview

001

002

003

016

017

018

004

005

006

019

020

021

1 4 7

2 5 8 0 C

3 6 9

007

008

009

022

023

024

010

011

012

025

026

027

013

014

015

028

029

030

2
No.
1

Component
Touch screen

Function
Displays messages required for operation and buttons for various features. You can directly touch the touch screen to instruct operations and set features. Lights when the machine is sending or receiving data to or from a client. Lights when data is stored in the machine's memory.
You can check stored documents in [Stored Documents List]. For information on [Stored Documents List], refer to 4 Machine Status > Machine Information > Print Reports > Job Status > Stored Document List in the Administrator Guide.

2 3

<Online> indicator <Job in Memory> indicator

4 5

<Job Status> button <Review> button

Press this button to check or cancel the current job, to check or print saved documents, or to check completed jobs. Press this button to display the [Review] screen. In this screen, you can check a list of the status of copy and scan features whose settings have changed from the defaults. You can also check the details of fax and email recipients. Press this button to check the machine status and meters, to check the status of consumables, and to print reports. Press this button to display the User ID entry screen for logging into the System Administration mode, Authentication mode, or Account Administration mode. Press this button to log out as well. If the machine is not operated for a while, the machine's power consumption is lowered to enter the Energy Saver mode. In the Energy Saver mode, this button lights up. To enter the Energy Saver mode, press this button. To cancel the Energy Saver mode, press this button again. Returns the settings you made to the default values. The machine returns to the same state as when it is powered on.

6 7

<Machine Status> button <Log In/Out> button

<Energy Saver> button

<Clear All> button

48

Control Panel

No.
10

Component
<Interrupt> button

Function
Press this button to suspend a copy or print job in progress to have the machine process another job. During the Interrupt mode, the <Interrupt> button lights up. Pressing the <Interrupt> button again exits the Interrupt mode and resumes the suspended job. Some types of jobs cannot be executed in the Interrupt mode. Refer to 15
Appendix > Notes and Restrictions > Notes and Restrictions in the Interrupt Mode in the Administrator Guide.

11 12 13 14 15 16 17

<Stop> button <Start> button Numeric keypad <Speed Dial> button <C (Clear)> button <Dial Pause> button <Custom> buttons

Press this button to stop the current copy job or communications. Press this button to start scanning a document. Use the numeric buttons on the keypad to enter the number of copies, passwords and other numerical values. Press this button to specify a recipient with an address number when sending a fax or e-mail. Press this button if you have entered a wrong numerical value with the numeric keypad. Used to insert a pause into a destination number. Press this button to call their associated features. To the buttons, you can assign [Language] or any features displayed on the [All Services] screen.
For how to assign features to the buttons, refer to 1 Before Using the Machine > Customizing the Control Panel > Assigning Features to <Custom> Buttons in the Administrator Guide.

Product Overview

18

<All Services> button

Press this button to display the [All Services] screen.


You can change the features that appear on the [All Services] screen. For information, refer to 1 Before Using the Machine > Customizing the Control Panel > Customizing the [All Services} Screen in the Administrator Guide.

19

One touch panels

Contains one touch buttons. Turn over the panels to display buttons 001 - 030, 031- 060 and 061070. Buttons M01 to M20 are for stored programs. The buttons corresponds to the stored jobs 01 to 20.
Note The feature is not available for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more information, contact our Customer Support Center.

20

One touch buttons

Allows you to specify a recipient with the simple press of a button. You can use the buttons for fax and Internet Fax jobs. The registered address numbers 001 to 070 can be specified with the buttons.
Note The feature is not available for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more information, contact our Customer Support Center.

49

2 Product Overview

Full Size Color UI (Optional)


When you install the Full Size Color UI (optional), you can change the layout of the components displayed on the screen. The following describes the names and functions on the control panel.
Note As the Full Size Color UI does not support the One Touch Panels, you cannot specify recipients with the One Touch Buttons.

Product Overview

No.
1

Component
Touch screen

Function
Displays messages required for operation and buttons for various features. You can directly touch the touch screen to instruct operations and set features. Press this button to call the associated features. To the buttons, you can assign [Language] or any features displayed on the [All Services] screen.
For how to assign features to the buttons, refer to 1 Before Using the Machine > Customizing the Control Panel > Assigning Features to <Custom> Buttons in the Administrator Guide.

<Custom> buttons

50

Control Panel

No.
3

Component
<All Services> button

Function
Press this button to display the [All Services] screen.
You can change the features that appear on the [All Services] screen. For information, refer to 1 Before Using the Machine > Customizing the Control Panel > Customizing the <All Services> Button in the Administrator Guide.

<Energy Saver> button

If the machine is not operated for a while, the machine's power consumption is lowered to enter the Energy Saver mode. In the Energy Saver mode, this button lights up. To enter the Energy Saver mode, press this button. To cancel the Energy Saver mode, press this button again. Returns the settings you made to the default values. The machine returns to the same state as when it is powered on. Press this button to suspend a copy or print job in progress to have the machine process another job. During the Interrupt mode, the <Interrupt> button lights up. Pressing the <Interrupt> button again exits the Interrupt mode and resumes the suspended job. Press this button to stop the current copy job or communications. Press this button to start scanning a document. Use the numeric buttons on the keypad to enter the number of copies, passwords and other numerical values. Press this button to specify a recipient with an address number when sending a fax or e-mail Press this button if you have entered a wrong numerical value with the numeric keypad. Used to insert a pause into a destination number. Press this button to display the User ID entry screen for logging into the System Administration mode, Authentication mode, or Account Administration mode. Press this button to log out as well. Press this button to check the machine status and meters, to check the status of consumables, and to print reports. Press this button to open the [Review] screen. In this screen, you can check a list of the status of copy and scan features whose settings have changed from the defaults. You can also check the details of fax and email recipients. Press this button to check or cancel the current job, to check or print saved documents, or to check completed jobs. Adjusts the brightness of the touch screen. Use this dial to enhance or decrease the contrast. Lights when data is stored in the machine's memory. Lights when the machine is sending or receiving data to or from a client.

Product Overview

5 6

<Clear All> button <Interrupt> button

7 8 9 10 11 12 13

<Stop> button <Start> button Numeric keypad <Speed Dial> button <C (Clear)> button <Dial Pause> button <Log In/Out> button

14 15

<Machine Status> button <Review> button

16 17 18 19

<Job Status> button Brightness dial <Job in Memory> indicator <Online> indicator

51

2 Product Overview

Screens and Buttons Displayed


The machine allows you to change the features and buttons displayed on the touch screen. The screens you can customize are as follows: Screen displayed when the power is turned on Screen displayed when the machine exited the Energy Saver mode Screen displayed after Auto Reset Assigning features to the <Custom> buttons The [All Services] screen
Note The following screens and buttons may have been changed by the system administrator. Use the machine according to the changes being made.

Product Overview

Setting the Initial Screen


You can set the screen displayed after turning the machine on or exiting the Energy Saver mode.

Setting the Screen Displayed after Auto Clear


You can select from [Last Selection Screen] to [All Services] to be displayed after Auto Clear.

Assigning Features to the <Custom> Buttons


Assign features to the <Custom> buttons on the control panel: Custom 1 to Custom 3. By assigning frequently-used features to the <Custom> buttons, you can switch to the features without returning to the [All Services] screen.
Note By factory default, [Copy] is assigned to the <Copy> button, and no feature is assigned to the <Custom2> and <Custom 3> button.

Customizing the [All Services] Screen


You can customize the layout of features and buttons on the [All Services] screen that is displayed when you press the <All Services> button on the control panel.

Changing the [Feature] Screen


You can customize the screen layouts for the following features listed on the [All Services] screen. Copy Fax / Internet Fax E-mail Scan to Mailbox Scan to PC
For how to change the screens for copy feature, refer to 5 Tools > Copy Service Settings > Copy Tab - Features Allocation in the Administrator Guide. For how to change the screens for fax feature, refer to 5 Tools > Fax Service Settings > Screen Defaults in the Administrator Guide. For how to change the screens for scan feature, refer to 5 Tools > Scan Service Settings > First Tab in the Administrator Guide.

52

Entering Text

Entering Text
During operations, a screen for entering text sometimes appears. This section describes how to enter text.

Product Overview

You can enter the following characters: numerals, letters, and symbols. Item
Entering letters and numerals Entering symbols

Description
If you select [Shift], uppercase letters appear. To return to the lowercase letters, select [Shift] again. Select [Symbol].
Note Depending on the keyboard, the [Symbol] button may be displayed as [More Characters].

Entering a space Deleting characters

Select [Space]. Select [Backspace]. You can delete one character at a time.

53

2 Product Overview

Installing the Tray Attachment on the Finisher-B1


When delivering A4 or B5 paper to the finisher tray without stapling, you can stack the outputs more neatly by installing the tray attachment supplied with the finisher tray.

1
Product Overview

Remove the tray attachment from the rear of the finisher tray.

Install the tray attachment onto the middle of the finisher tray as shown in the diagram.

54

3 Copy
This chapter describes the basic copy procedures and the copy features provided by the machine. Copying Procedure ..................................................................................... 56 Operations during Copying ......................................................................... 62 Copy ........................................................................................................... 65 Image Quality..............................................................................................76 Layout Adjustment ......................................................................................81 Output Format.............................................................................................94 Job Assembly ...........................................................................................118

3 Copy

Copying Procedure
This section describes the basic copy procedures. The following shows the reference section for each procedure.
Step 1 Loading Documents .........................................................................................................56 Step 2 Selecting Features ............................................................................................................58 Step 3 Entering a Quantity ..........................................................................................................59 Step 4 Starting the Copy Job.......................................................................................................60 Step 5 Confirming the Copy Job in Job Status ...........................................................................61

Step 1 Loading Documents


There are two methods for loading documents:
Copy

Document Feeder Single sheet Multiple sheets Document Glass Single sheet Bound documents, such as books

Document Feeder
The document feeder supports single and multiple sheet documents with sizes from 139.7 x 210 mm (A5, 5.5 x 8.5 inches) to 297 x 432 mm (A3, 11 x 17 inches). The document feeder automatically detects standard size documents. For nonstandard size documents, input the size in the [Original Size] screen.
For information on entering document sizes, refer to "Original Size (Specifying the Scan Size for the Document)" (P.84). The standard document sizes that can be detected automatically depend on the [Paper Size Settings] in the System Administration mode. For information about paper size settings, refer to "5 Tools" > "Common Service Settings" > "Other Settings" > "Paper Size Settings" in the Administrator Guide.

The document feeder accepts the following number of sheets. Document Type (Weight)
Lightweight paper (38 - 49 g/m2) Plain paper (50 - 80 g/m2) Heavyweight paper (81 - 128 g/m2)

Number of Sheets
75 sheets 75 sheets 50 sheets

Important To avoid paper jams, use the document glass for folded or creased documents. Two sided scanning of lightweight paper 38 - 49 g/m2 is not supported.

For information about copying mixed sized documents, refer to "Mixed Sized Originals (Scanning Different Size Documents Simultaneously)" (P.85).

56

Copying Procedure

1 2

Remove any paper clips and staples before loading the document. Place the documents face up (when the documents are 2-sided, place the front side up) in the center of the document feeder.
Note The indicator lights up when the document is loaded correctly. When the indicator is not lit, the document glass is detecting the documents. Press the <Clear (C)> button and load the documents again.

Indicator

Adjust the movable document guides to match the size of the document loaded.

Copy

3
Document Glass
The document glass supports a single sheet, a book, or other similar documents up to 297 x 432 mm (A3, 11 x 17 inches).
Important After using the document glass, close the document cover.

The document glass automatically detects standard size documents. For non-standard size documents, input the size in the [Original Size] screen.
For information on entering document sizes, refer to "Original Size (Specifying the Scan Size for the Document)" (P.84). The standard document sizes that can be detected automatically depend on the [Paper Size Settings] in the System Administration mode. For information on the paper size settings, refer to "5 Tools" > "Common Service Settings" > "Other Settings" > "Paper Size Settings" in the Administrator Guide.

CAUTION Do not apply excessive force to hold thick document on the platen glass. It may break the glass and cause injuries.

Open the document cover.


Important Ensure that a screen is displayed on the control panel, and then load a document. If a document is loaded before a screen is displayed, the machine may not properly detect the document size.

57

3 Copy

2 3

Place the document face down, and align it against the top left corner of the document glass. Close the document cover.
Note When a standard size document is placed on the document glass, the size of the document is displayed in the message area.

Step 2 Selecting Features


You can select copy features under [Copy] on the [All Services] screen.
Note Features displayed may vary depending on the configuration of your machine. When the Authentication or Account Administration feature is used, a user ID and passcode may be required. Ask your system administrator for the user ID and passcode.

Copy

Press the <All Services> button.


1 4 7 2 5 8 0 C 3 6 9 #

<All Services> button

Select [Copy].

If the previous settings still remain, press the <Clear All> button.
1 4 7 2 5 8 0 C 3 6 9 #

<Clear All> button

58

Copying Procedure

Select each tab, and configure features as necessary.

The following shows the reference section for each feature.


"Copy" (P.65) "Image Quality" (P.76) "Layout Adjustment" (P.81)

Copy

"Output Format" (P.94) "Job Assembly" (P.118)

Step 3 Entering a Quantity


You can enter up to 999 for the number of copies.

Enter the number of copies using the numeric keypad. The number of copies entered appears on the upper right of the touch screen.

1 4 7

2 5 8 0 C

3 6 9 #

Numeric keypad

If you enter an incorrect value, press the <C> button and then enter the correct value.
1 4 7 2 5 8 0 C 3 6 9 #

<C> button

59

3 Copy

Step 4 Starting the Copy Job


The following explains how to start a copy job.

Press the <Start> button.


Important If the document has been set in the document feeder, do not hold down the document while it is being conveyed. Copies cannot be made if a copy protection code is detected. Note If a problem occurs, an error message appears in the touch screen. Solve the problem in accordance with the message. You can set the next job during copying.
1 4 7 2 5 8 0 C 3 6 9 #

<Start> button

If you have more documents If you have more documents to copy, select [Next Original] on the touch screen while the current document is being scanned. This allows you to scan the documents as a single set of data.
Copy

Select [Next Original] while scanning is in progress.


Note When using the document feeder, load the next document after the machine has finished scanning the first document. When the screen on the right is displayed and no operation is performed during a certain period of time, the machine automatically assumes that there are no more documents. You can change the number of copies by selecting [Change Quantity...], which is displayed when you select [Next Original]

Load the next document.

3 4

Press the <Start> button. If you have more documents, repeat Steps 2 and 3. When all documents have been scanned, select [Last Original].

60

Copying Procedure

Step 5 Confirming the Copy Job in Job Status


The following explains how to confirm the job status of a copy job.

Press the <Job Status> button.


1 4 7 2 5 8 0 C 3 6 9 #

<Job Status> button

Confirm the job status. From the pull-down menu, you can select and display the types of jobs ([All Jobs], [Printer & Print from Mailbox Jobs], [Scan, Fax, & Internet Fax Jobs], [Job Flow & Auto File Transfer Jobs]).
Note Select [ ] to return to the previous screen or [ ] to move to the next screen.

Copy

61

3 Copy

Operations during Copying


This section describes available operations during copying. The following shows the reference section for each feature.
Stopping the Copy Job ................................................................................................................62 Changing the Number of Copies.................................................................................................63 Interrupting the Copy Job ...........................................................................................................64

Stopping the Copy Job


To cancel the copy job in progress, follow the procedure below.

1
Copy

Press either [Stop] on the touch screen or the <Stop> button on the control panel.
1 4 7 2 5 8 0 C 3 6 9 #

<Stop> button

Select [Cancel].

62

Operations during Copying

If the screen shown in Step 2 does not appear even after you press the <Stop> button on the control panel:

Press the <Job Status> button.


1 4 7 2 5 8 0 C 3 6 9 #

<Job Status> button

Select the job to cancel, and then select [Stop].


Copy

3
Changing the Number of Copies
During scanning or copying the document, you can change the number of copy sets.

Press either [Stop] on the touch screen or the <Stop> button on the control panel.
1 4 7 2 5 8 0 C 3 6 9 #

<Stop> button

63

3 Copy

Select [Change Quantity...].

3 4

Set the number of copy sets with the numeric keypad. The new quantity must include the number of copies that have already been printed. You cannot enter a number less than the number of copies that have already been printed. Press the <Start> button.
Note If you enter the same value as the number of copies that have already been printed, the machine will not execute a copy job even when you press the <Start> button.

Copy

Interrupting the Copy Job


You can temporarily stop the copy job to have the machine process another job.
Important Press the <Interrupt> button only after all the documents have been scanned. The machine does not accept another job while it is scanning the documents, or [Next Original] is being selected.

Press the <Interrupt> button.


Note The interrupt indicator lights up to indicate that the machine is in the interrupt mode.
1 4 7 2 5 8 0 C 3 6 9 #

<Interrupt> button

2 3 4 5

Load a document and set features if necessary. Set the number of copy sets with the numeric keypad. Press the <Start> button. After you have finished making the interrupt copy, press the <Interrupt> button.
Note The interrupt indicator goes out to indicate that the interrupt mode is exited. If you used the document glass to copy the document, remove the document from the document glass.

Press the <Start> button. The suspended copy job is resumed.

64

Copy

Copy
You can set the basic features on the [Copy] screen. The following shows the reference section for each feature.
Reduce/Enlarge (Making Enlarged/Reduced Copies)................................................................ 65 Paper Supply (Selecting the Paper for Copying) ....................................................................... 69 Output Color (Selecting the Color for Copying)........................................................................ 71 Original Type (Selecting the Document Type) .......................................................................... 75 Copy Output (Specifying Finishing Options) ............................................................................ 75 Multiple-Up (Copying Multiple Pages onto One Sheet)............................................................ 75 Lighten/Darken (Adjusting the Copy Density) .......................................................................... 75

1 2

On the [All Services] screen, select [Copy]. Select a feature on the [Copy] screen.
Copy

Reduce/Enlarge (Making Enlarged/Reduced Copies)


This feature allows you to select a copy ratio to make enlarged or reduced copies.

Specify a copy ratio.

65

3 Copy

Copy ratio entry box Allows you to enter a value between 25 and 400% in 1% increments, by touching the entry box and then using numeric keys, or by using the [ ] and [ ] buttons. When you make enlarged/reduced copies from standard sized documents on standard sized paper, the following copy ratios will be applied. Copy A6 Original A6 B6 A5
Copy
100% 82% 71% 58% 50% 41% 35% 122% 100% 86% 70% 61% 50% 43% 141% 116% 100% 81% 70% 58% 50% 173% 142% 122% 100% 86% 70% 61% 200% 164% 141% 115% 100% 81% 70% 245% 200% 174% 141% 122% 100% 86% 283% 232% 200% 163% 141% 115% 100%

B6

A5

B5

A4

B4

A3

B5 A4 B4 A3

How to load document depends on the size and orientation of a document. For details, refer to "Step 1 Loading Documents" (P.56)". For paper that can be loaded, refer to "2 Paper and Other Media" > "Paper Types" in the Administrator Guide.

100% Copies at the same image size as the original document. Auto % Automatically determines the copy ratio based on the document size and the paper size specified in [Paper Supply], and copies the document to fit into the paper.
Note If you select [Auto %], select an option other than [Auto Paper Select] in [Paper Supply].

Ratios (3rd to 5th buttons) Displays preset copy ratios.


You can change the copy ratio associated with each button. For information on the settings, refer to "5 Tools" > "Copy Service Settings" > "Preset Buttons" in the Administrator Guide.

More... Displays the [Reduce/Enlarge] screen.


Refer to "When [Proportional %] is Selected" (P.67), "When [Independent X - Y%] is Selected" (P.67), or "When [Calculator %] is Selected" (P.68).

66

Copy

When [Proportional %] is Selected


You can select a ratio from standard copy ratios, or can enter a ratio directly.

Select a copy ratio, or specify a value.

Copy ratio entry box Touch the entry box, and then use the numeric keypad or the [ ] and [ ] buttons to specify a ratio within the range of 25 to 400% in 1% increments. 100% Copies at the same image size as the original document. Auto % Automatically determines the copy ratio based on the document size and the paper size specified in [Paper Supply], and copies the document to fit into the paper.
Note If you select [Auto %], options other than [Auto Paper] is specified in [Paper Supply].

Copy

Presets% Selects from the preset ratios.


You can change the copy ratio associated with each button. For information on the settings, refer to "5 Tools" > "Copy Service Settings" > "Reduce/Enlarge Presets" in the Administrator Guide.

Copy All Slightly reduces the specified copy ratio to copy the complete image onto the paper. When this option is selected, a check mark is displayed in the box.
Important If you select [Copy All] and you do not want to erase the edges of the document, set the amount of edge erase to 0 mm. Note that if the amount is set to 0 mm, the edges of the copied document may get dirty or the image loss may occur.

When [Independent X - Y%] is Selected


Allows you to specify reduction/enlargement ratios for the width and length separately.

Select any item.

Width - X%, Length -Y% Specifies reduction/enlargement ratios for the width and length within the range of 25 to 400% in 1% increments. Use the [ ] and [ ] buttons or the numeric keypad to specify a ratio.

67

3 Copy

Lock X - Y% Allows you to make the same ratio adjustment for the width and length at the same time. 100%/100% Copies at the same image size as the original document. Auto X-Y% Automatically determines the reduction/enlargement ratios for the width and length so that the document image fits in the paper. When this option is selected, a check mark is displayed in the box. Copy All X-Y% Automatically determines the reduction/enlargement ratios for the width and length so that the document image fits in the paper, and then slightly reduces the ratios so that the complete image is copied onto the paper. When this option is selected, a check mark is displayed in the box. X:Width/Y:Length Allows you to specify preset reduction/enlargement ratios.

Copy

When [Calculator %] is Selected


You can specify values for the length and width individually. If you specify both the original document size and the desired copy size, the copy ratios for the length and width are calculated automatically within the range from 25 to 400% according to the values that you entered.
Important The [Calculator%] screen allows you to specify ratios. [Original Size] and [Copy Size] are the items into which you enter to calculate ratios. The values entered into [Original Size] and [Copy Size] will not be reflected in a scan size for the document or paper size. Be sure to specify a scan size for the document. Also, specify a paper tray when necessary.

For details on how to set a scan size for the document, refer to "Original Size (Specifying the Scan Size for the Document)" (P.84)". For how to set a paper tray, refer to "Paper Supply (Selecting the Paper for Copying)" (P.69)"

1 2 3

Enter the width of the original document into [Original Size] of [Width X%] using the numeric keypad. Enter the width of the output copy into [Copy Size] of [Width X%] using the numeric keypad. In the same way, enter the [Original Size] and [Copy Size] of [Length Y%]. Width X% / Length Y% Displays the ratios that are automatically calculated using the values entered in [Original Size] and [Copy Size]. Original Size Allows you to enter the width and length of the original document, in the range of 1 to 999 mm in 1 mm increments.

68

Copy

Copy Size Allows you to enter the width and length of output copies, in the range of 1 to 999 mm in 1 mm increments.

Paper Supply (Selecting the Paper for Copying)


This feature allows you to select the tray that holds the paper you want to use.

Select a paper tray.

Copy

Auto Paper Select Automatically determines the tray holding the appropriate paper, based on the document size and the specified copy ratio.
Note If you select [Auto Paper Select], specify an option other than [Auto %] in [Reduce/Enlarge].

Trays (2nd to 5th Buttons) Allows you to directly select the desired tray.
You can change the paper tray associated with each button. For information on the settings, refer to "5 Tools" > "Copy Service Settings" > "Copy Defaults" > "Paper Supply" in the Administrator Guide.

More... Displays the [Paper Supply] screen.


Refer to "[Paper Supply] Screen" (P.70)".

69

3 Copy

[Paper Supply] Screen


You can select a paper tray from all trays available on the machine.

Select a paper tray.

Paper Tray Allows you to select a paper tray. When [Auto Paper] is selected, the machine automatically determines the tray holding the appropriate paper based on the document size and the specified copy ratio. When [Bypass] is selected, the [Tray 5 (Bypass)] screen is displayed.
Refer to "[Tray 5] Screen" (P.70).

Copy

% Full Displays the remaining amounts of paper loaded in trays. Paper Size Displays paper sizes. Paper Type Displays paper types. Paper Color Displays paper colors.
For how to set [Paper Color], refer to "5 Tools" > "Common Service Settings" > "Paper Tray Settings" > "Paper Tray Attributes" in the Administrator Guide.

Size Detection Displays how the machine detects a paper size.


For how to set [Size Detection], refer to "5 Tools" > "Common Service Settings" > "Paper Tray Settings" > "Paper Tray Attributes" in the Administrator Guide.

[Tray 5] Screen
If you want to use paper that cannot be loaded in Tray 1, 2, 3, or 4, use Tray 5 (Bypass).

Select a paper size and a paper type.


Note Select [ ] to return to the previous screen or [ ] to move to the next screen. [Auto Size Detect] is available only when standard sized paper is loaded.

70

Copy

Paper Size Select from [Auto Size Detect], [Standard Size], and [Custom Size (Variable Size)]. When you select [Auto Size Detect], the paper size is identified automatically.
When you select [Standard Size] or [Custom Size (Variable Size)], refer to "When [Standard Size] is Selected" (P.71) or "When [Custom Size] is Selected" (P.71) respectively.

Paper Type Select a paper type.

When [Standard Size] is Selected


Select a paper size from standard paper sizes, and then select a paper type.

Select a paper size and a paper type.


Note Select [ ] to return to the previous screen or [ ] to move to the next screen.

Copy

3
When [Custom Size] is Selected
Set the X (width) within the range from 98 to 483 mm, and the Y (height) within the range from 89 to 320 mm in 1 mm increments.
Important If the X (width) of non-standard size paper is less than 140 mm, documents may not be printed properly. When copying on both sides of non-standard size paper, specify the size within the range from 140 to 483 mm for the X (horizontal) direction and from 128 to 320 mm for the Y (vertical) direction. When the C1-Finisher with Booklet Maker is installed, paper of which X direction is less than 140 mm will be delivered to the center tray. Every now and then, remove the paper delivered to the center tray.

1 2

Enter a paper size using [ [ ]. Select a paper type.


Note

], [

], [

], and

Select [ ] to return to the previous screen or [ ] to move to the next screen.

Output Color (Selecting the Color for Copying)


This feature allows you to select copy colors.
Note If output color restrictions are set, the available colors will be restricted. For information, refer to "5 Tools" > "Accounting" > "Create/View User Accounts" > "Account Limit" in the Administrator Guide.

71

3 Copy

Select a color mode.

Auto Detect The machine automatically determines the colors of the original document and makes copies in full color if the original document is colored, and in single color (black) if the document is black-and-white.
Note If a color document is in one of the following conditions, the machine may copy the document in black and white. - The colored area is too small. - The colors are too light. In that case, change a level from the five levels used by the machine when it recognizes color. For details, refer to "5 Tools" > "Common Service Settings" > "Image Quality Adjustment" > "Image Quality" > "Output Color Recognition" in the Administrator Guide.

Copy

3
Color

Copies in full color using all the four colors of toner: yellow, magenta, cyan, and black. Black & White Copies in black and white regardless of the colors in the original document. Dual Color Copies color documents using two colors.
You can select colors. For details, refer to "5 Tools" > "Copy Service Settings" > "Copy Defaults" > "Dual Color - Source Color" and "Dual - Non-target Area Color" in the Administrator Guide.

Single Color Copies color documents using one color.


You can select the color. For details, refer to "5 Tools" > "Copy Defaults" > "Single Color" in the Administrator Guide.

More... Displays the [Output Color] screen.

72

Copy

[Output Color] Screen


You can make settings for full color, dual color, and single color.

1 2

Select [More...]. Select the desired output color mode. Auto Detect Automatically determines the color of the original document and makes copies in full color if the original document is colored, or in single color (black) if the document is blackand-white. Color Copies in full color using all the four colors of toner: yellow, magenta, cyan, and black. Black & White Copies in black and white regardless of the colors in the original document. Dual Color Separates the colors of your document into the source colors and the other colors, and then copies the document using two colors. Selecting [Dual Color] allows you to set the following: Source Color The [Source Color] screen is displayed.
Refer to "[Source Color] Screen" (P.73).

Copy

Target Area Color The [Target Area Color] screen is displayed.


Refer to "[Target Area Color] Screen" (P.74).

Non-target Area Color The [Non-target Area Color] screen is displayed.


Refer to "[Non-target Area Color] Screen" (P.74).

Single Color The [Output Color - Color] screen is displayed.


Refer to "[Output Color - Color] Screen" (P.74).

[Source Color] Screen


This screen allows you to select one or more colors from your document to define them as source colors.

73

3 Copy

1 2 3 4

Select [Dual Color]. Select [Source Color]. Select [Other than Black] or [Color]. If you selected [Color] in Step 3, select the desired source colors. Other than Black The colors other than black will be the source colors. Color Allows you to select one or more source colors from six preset options.

[Target Area Color] Screen


This screen allows you to select the target color to be used in place of the selected source colors. Available options are seven preset and six custom options.
For information about how to set custom colors, refer to "5 Tools" > "Copy Service Settings" > "Custom Colors" in the Administration Guide.

Copy

3
1 2 3

Select [Dual Color]. Select [Target Area Color] copy service settings. Select a color.

[Non-target Area Color] Screen


This screen allows you to select the color to be used in place of the colors other than the selected source colors. You can select from seven preset and six custom options.
For information about how to set custom colors, refer to "5 Tools" > "Copy Service Settings" > "Custom Colors" in the Administration Guide.

1 2 3

Select [Dual Color]. Select [Non-target Area Color]. Select a color.

[Output Color - Color] Screen


This screen allows you to specify the color to be used for single-color copying. Available options are six preset and six custom options.
For information about how to set custom colors, refer to "5 Tools" > "Copy Service Settings" > "Custom Colors" in the Administrator Guide.

1
74

Select [Single Color].

Copy

2 3

Select [Color]. Select a color.

Original Type (Selecting the Document Type)


This feature is the same as [Original Type] of the [Image Quality] screen. Refer to "Original Type (Selecting the Document Type)" (P.76).

Copy

Copy Output (Specifying Finishing Options)


This feature is the same as [Copy Output] of the [Output Format] screen. Refer to "Copy Output (Specifying Finishing Options)" (P.115).

Multiple-Up (Copying Multiple Pages onto One Sheet)


This feature is the same as [Multiple-Up] of the [Output Format] screen. Refer to "Multiple-Up (Copying Multiple Pages onto One Sheet)" (P.100).

Lighten/Darken (Adjusting the Copy Density)


This feature allows you to select a copy-density level from seven levels. The copy becomes darker when you move [ ] to the left, and lighter when you move it to the right.
Note [Lighten/Darken] of the [Copy] screen and [Lighten/Darken] of [Lighten/ Darken/Contrast] in the [Image Quality] screen are the same.

Use [ ] and [ levels.

] to select from 7 density

75

3 Copy

Image Quality
On the [Image Quality] screen, you can configure the image quality features. The following shows the reference section for each feature.
Original Type (Selecting the Document Type)...........................................................................76 Image Options (Adjusting Copy Density / Sharpness / Saturation of Images)...........................77 Image Enhancement (Erasing the Background Color of Documents / Adjusting Contrast) ......78 Color Effects (Selecting an Image Quality)................................................................................79 Color Balance (Adjusting Color Balance) ..................................................................................79 Color Shift (Adjusting the Color Tone) ......................................................................................80

1 2
Copy

On the [All Services] screen, select [Copy]. Select the [Image Quality] tab, and then select a feature on the [Image Quality] screen.
If the color reproduction is unsatisfactory, perform calibration. For information on the calibration, refer to "3 Maintenance" > "Executing Calibration" in the Administrator Guide.

Original Type (Selecting the Document Type)


This feature allows you to select the type of documents, such as text and photos. By selecting a document type, you can make copies at optimum image quality.

1 2

Select [Original Type]. Select the original type.

Auto Automatically sets the document type based on the setting made in [System Settings] and the setting made in [Output Color] on the [Copy] screen. Photo & Text Select this option when the document contains both text and photos. The machine automatically distinguishes the text and photo areas of the document and sets the appropriate image quality for each area. To process photo areas, select the photo type from [Printed Original], [Photograph], and [Photocopy]. Printed Original Select this option when the document contains printed photos, such as a brochure. Photograph Select this option when the document contains pasted photos. This option prevents the copy from being reproduced bluish.

76

Image Quality

Photocopy Select this option when the document is a copy or print made with a color copier such as this machine. This option prevents the copy from being reproduced faintly. Text Select to make copies of text documents. This option is also suitable for graphs and illustrations. Normal Text Select this option for printed documents, or for documents written with ink. Light Text Select this option for text that requires enhancement, such as handwritten pencil text. See-Through Paper Select this option to reduce blurs of tracing-paper documents or to suppress background shadows of lightweight documents.
Note Whether [See-Through Paper] is displayed on the screen depends on the setting under [System Settings]. For information, refer to "5 Tools" > "Copy Service Settings" > "Copy Control" > "Original Type - See-Through Paper" in the Administrator Guide.

Copy

Photo Select to make copies of photos. Select the photo type from the same options as [Photo & Text]: Printed Original, Photograph, and Photocopy. Maps Select to make copies of documents that have text placed on color backgrounds, such as maps.

Image Options (Adjusting Copy Density / Sharpness / Saturation of Images)


This feature allows you to adjust the copy density, sharpness, and saturation levels.
Note [Lighten/Darken] of [Image Options] and [Lighten/Darken] of [Copy] are the same. If [Lighten/Darken], [Sharpness], or [Saturation] is set concurrently with [Color Effects], the setting made for [Color Effects] will be cleared.

1 2

Select [Image Options]. Adjust the copy density, sharpness, and saturation with [ ] and [ ].

Lighten/Darken Allows you to select from seven copy density levels between [Lighten] and [Darken]. Moving the arrow mark to the upper position makes the copy density lighter, and moving to the lower position makes darker.

77

3 Copy

Sharpness Allows you to select from five sharpness levels between [Soften] and [Sharpen]. Selecting an upper cell on the bar makes the contours of images sharper, and selecting a lower cell makes softer. Saturation Allows you to select from five saturation levels between [Vivid] and [Pastel]. Selecting an upper cell on the bar makes colors brighter, and selecting a lower cell makes less bright.

Image Enhancement (Erasing the Background Color of Documents / Adjusting Contrast)


This feature allows you to suppress the background color of documents, such as newspaper and color paper. You can also adjust the contrast.
Note When [Original Type] is set to [Photo], the [Image Enhancement] feature does not work. If [Background Suppression] or [Contrast] is set, the setting made for [Color Effects] will be cleared.

Copy

3
1 2

Select [Image Enhancement]. Set [Image Enhancement] and [Contrast]. Adjust the contrast with [ ] and [ ].

Background Suppression No Suppression Scans document backgrounds with no filtering. Auto Suppression When [Output Color] is set to [Black], the background of a document printed on colored paper, such as newspaper, will be suppressed. When [Output Color] is set to [Color], [Dual Color] or [Single Color], the background of a document printed on white-color paper will be suppressed.
Note When [Output Color] is set to [Color], you can change the level of background suppression. For details, refer to "5 Tools" > "Copy Service Settings" > "Copy Control" > "Background Suppression Level" in the Administrator Guide.

Contrast Auto Correction Automatically adjusts the brightness and hue of the original document to sharpen the image.
Note [Auto Correction] is not available when the Document Feeder is used.

Manual Contrast Allows you to select from the five levels between [More Contrast] and [Less Contrast].

78

Image Quality

Selecting an upper cell on the bar makes the difference between light and dark areas greater; light areas become lighter and dark areas darker. In contrast, selecting a lower cell on the bar makes the difference between light and dark areas smaller.

Color Effects (Selecting an Image Quality)


If you set this feature, the [Image Enhancement], [Image Options], [Color Shift], and [Color Balance] settings are automatically adjusted and copies are made at the specified quality.
Note If other image-quality settings are made after you set [Color Effects], the Color Effects setting will return to its default.

1 2

Select [Color Effects]. Select an image quality.


Copy

3
Off Copies with the [Image Enhancement], [Image Options], [Color Shift], and [Color Balance] settings at their defaults. Lively Reproduces fresher, livelier images with increased color saturation. Bright Reproduces brighter images with enhanced contrast. This option is suitable for documents that are intended to attract people's attention, such as posters. Warm Reproduces brighter, warmer, more reddish images. This option is suitable when skin tones are to be reproduced more pinkish or when subdued images are to be reproduced more warmly. Cool Reproduces clearer blue colors. This option is suitable for water and sky images, and is also suitable when smoky blue colors are to be reproduced more clearly. Shadow Suppression Suppresses the colors on the reverse side of the original document from being reproduced in the copy.

Color Balance (Adjusting Color Balance)


This feature allows you to adjust the Low, Medium, and High density levels of the four CMYK toner colors (cyan, magenta, yellow and black).
Note If [Color Balance] is set, the Color Effects setting will be cleared.

79

3 Copy

1 2 3

Select [Color Balance]. Select a color. Use [ ] and [ ] to adjust the color balance for each density. Highlights Allows you to adjust the color strength of lowdensity areas. Midtones Allows you to adjust the color strength of medium-density areas. Shadows Allows you to adjust the color strength of high-density areas.

Copy

Color Shift (Adjusting the Color Tone)


This feature allows you to adjust the tone of the colors to be reproduced in copies, by a maximum of two levels in two directions. On the screen, the [Before] slider represents the color tone of the original document, and the [After] slider represents the color tone of output copies. Selecting a button on the screen moves the [Before] slider to adjust the tone of the colors. When the [Before] slider is moved to the left, the Y (yellow) cell on the [Before] slider becomes closer to the R (red) cell on the [After] slider, and thus a yellow fruit appears more reddish and riper-looking. At the same time, the tone of all the other colors changes. The red color appears more magentish, and the green color appears more yellowish. Conversely, when the [Before] slider is moved to the right, the Y (yellow) cell on the [Before] slider becomes closer to the G (green) cell on the [After] slider, and thus a yellow fruit appears more greenish. At the same time, the tone of all the other colors changes. The magenta color appears more reddish, and the red color appears more yellowish.
Note Ensure that [Color] has been selected in [Output Color] on the [Copy] screen. The Color Shift feature is not available when [Output Color] is set to [Black]. If [Color Shift] is set, the Color Effects setting will be cleared.

1 2

Select [Color Shift]. Select a button to adjust the color tone.

80

Layout Adjustment

Layout Adjustment
On the [Layout Adjustment] screen, you can configure features for scanning documents. The following shows the reference section for each feature.
Book Copying (Copying Facing Pages onto Separate Sheets) .................................................. 81 2 Sided Book Copying (Making 2 Sided Copies of Facing Pages) ........................................... 82 Original Size (Specifying the Scan Size for the Document)...................................................... 84 Mixed Sized Originals (Scanning Different Size Documents Simultaneously) ........................ 85 Edge Erase (Erasing Edges and Margin Shadows of the Document) ........................................ 86 Image Shift (Adjusting the Image Position)............................................................................... 87 Image Rotation (Changing the Orientation of Images) .............................................................. 89 Invert Image (Making Reversed Copies of Images) .................................................................. 91 Original Orientation (Specifying the Orientation of Loaded Documents)................................. 91 2 Sided Copying (Making 2 sided Copies) ................................................................................ 92

Copy

1 2

On the [All Services] screen, select [Copy]. Select the [Layout Adjustment] tab, and then select a feature on the [Layout Adjustment] screen.

Book Copying (Copying Facing Pages onto Separate Sheets)


This feature allows you to copy facing pages of a document on separate sheets of paper in page order. It is useful if you need to make separate copies of facing pages of a bound document such as a booklet.
Note You cannot use the document feeder with this feature. Non-standard sized documents will not be separated into two accurately. If you want the sheets to be output in the page order, set [Output Orientation] to [Face Down] on the [Output Format] tab.

1 2

Select [Book Copying]. Select any item.

Off Does not copy as a bound document. Left Page then Right Copies the left page and then the right page of facing pages.

81

3 Copy

Right Page then Left Copies the right page and then the left page of facing pages. Top Page then Bottom Copies the top page and then the bottom page of facing pages. Both Pages Copies both pages in page order. Left Page Only Copies the left page only. You can select this item when [Left Page then Right] or [Right Page then Left] is selected. Right Page Only Copies the right page only. You can select this item when [Left Page then Right] or [Right Page then Left] is selected. Top Page Only Copies the top page only. You can select this item when [Top Page then Bottom] is selected. Bottom Page Only Copies the bottom page only. You can select this item when [Top Page then Bottom] is selected. Binding Edge Erase Erases the shadow from the center section of the document. You can set the binding erase width within the range from 0 to 50 mm in 1 mm increments.
Copy

2 Sided Book Copying (Making 2 Sided Copies of Facing Pages)


You can assign pages when making copies of facing pages in a bound document so that pages face each other in the same way as the document. You can also specify the start page and the end page from the left and right of facing pages.
Important Non-standard sized documents will not be separated into two accurately.

1 2

Select [2 Sided Book Copying]. Select any item.

Off Disables this feature. Left Page then Right Scans the left page and then the right page of facing pages, to make 2-sided copies.

82

Layout Adjustment

Right Page then Left Scans the right page and then the left page of facing pages, to make 2-sided copies. Top Page then Bottom Scans the top page and then the bottom page of facing pages, to make 2-sided copies. Starting & Ending Page Displays the [Starting & Ending Page] screen.
Refer to "[Starting & Ending Page] Screen" (P.83).

Binding Edge Erase Erases the shadow from the center section of the document. You can set the binding erase width within the range from 0 to 50 mm in 1 mm increments.

[Starting & Ending Page] Screen


Copy

You can set the copy start page and end page.

Set [Starting Page] and [Ending Page].

Starting Page Select the copy start page from the following items. [Left Page] / [Right Page] You can select these items when [Left Page then Right] or [Right Page then Left] is selected. [Top Page] / [Bottom Page] You can select these items when [Top Page then Bottom] is selected. Ending Page Select the copy end page from the following items. [Left Page] / [Right Page] You can select these items when [Left Page then Right] or [Right Page then Left] is selected. [Top Page] / [Bottom Page] You can select these items when [Top Page then Bottom] is selected.

83

3 Copy

Original Size (Specifying the Scan Size for the Document)


This feature allows you to set the scan size for a document. Use this feature when your document is a non-standard size, or when you want to copy your document at a size different from the original size. You can add margins, or delete unnecessary margins using this feature.

1 2

Select [Original Size]. Select the size of the document. If you select a non-standard size, specify values for the X and Y directions.

Copy

Auto Detect Detects the document size automatically. The document sizes that can be detected are as follows:

Document Feeder Autodetectable Document Sizes


B5, B5 , B4, A5, A5 , A4, A4 , A3, 8.5 x 11", 8.5 x 11" , 11 x 17", 16K , 8K
Note

Document Glass
B6, B5, B5 , B4, A6, A5, A5 , A4, A4 , A3, 8.5 x 11" , 11 x 17", 16K, 16K , 8K

If the document size cannot be detected automatically, a screen to input the document size appears.

The document sizes that can be automatically detected depend on [Paper Size Settings] made in the System Administration mode. For details, refer to "5 Tools" > "Common Service Settings" > "Other Settings" > "Paper Size Settings" in the Administrator Guide.

Standard Size Select a document size from 17 options.


You can change the sizes displayed on the screen. For information on the settings, refer to "5 Tools" > "Copy Service Settings" > "Original Size Defaults" in the Administrator Guide.

Variable Size Enter the desired scan size when scanning a non-standard size document or when making copies at a size different from the original document size. You can specify a value in the range of 15 to 432 mm for the width (X), and a value in the range of 15 to 297 mm for the height (Y), in 1 mm increments. The scales attached on the upper and left edges of the document glass will help you specify values.
Important When the document is loaded on the document feeder, the base point in the Y (height) direction is the center of the edge. If you specify 100 mm, the scan height will be from 50 mm above to 50 mm below the center of the document.

84

Layout Adjustment

Mixed Sized Originals (Scanning Different Size Documents Simultaneously)


When using the document feeder, you can simultaneously scan different size documents and make copies onto paper that matches the respective sizes of the documents. You can also specify the size of the paper to make copies on, so that copies are made on the same size of paper.
Important Ensure that the orientation of the first sheet of the document and the [Original Orientation] setting are the same. Always load A5 documents in portrait orientation. When loading B5 documents together with A3 documents loaded in landscape orientation or A4 documents loaded in portrait orientation, load B5 documents in portrait orientation. If the top left corners of the documents are not aligned properly, the documents may not be scanned correctly. The recommended document size combinations are A4 portrait and A3 landscape, or B5 portrait and B4 landscape. If another combination of document sizes is used, the documents can be fed at an angle and may not be copied properly. Note The [Original Orientation] setting is based on the orientation of the first page of a document. Load the second and subsequent pages of the document in consideration of this setting.

Copy

1 2

Select [Mixed Sized Originals]. Select [On].

Off Select this item when all documents are of the same size. On When documents of different sizes are copied, the machine automatically detects the size of each document. Original Orientation Allows you to specify the orientation of the document to have the machine identify the top of the document.
Note If the [Original Orientation] differs from the actual document orientation, then the machine may mistakenly detect the top of the document.

Upright Images Select this item when placing the top edge of the document against the top side of the document glass or document feeder. Sideways Images Select this item when placing the top edge of the document against the left side of the document glass or document feeder.

85

3 Copy

Edge Erase (Erasing Edges and Margin Shadows of the Document)


When you copy a document with the document cover open or when you copy a book, the edges and center margin of the document may be printed as black shadows. The Edge Erase feature allows you to erase such shadows.
Note For 2-sided originals, the same edge erase amounts are set for the front and back sides. If you set [Reduce/Enlarge], the edge erase amounts will be reduced or enlarged in proportion to the ratio you configured.

For information on the areas that can actually be printed, refer to "15 Appendix" > "Printable Area" in the Administrator Guide.

1 2
Copy

Select [Edge Erase]. Select any item.

3
Normal Sets the Edge Erase amounts to 2 mm for the top and bottom, and left and right edges. All Edges Erases the shadows of the four edges of a document, and also the shadow in the center of the document if it is a bound document. You can specify values for [4 Edges] and [Center] individually. Individual Edges Erases the shadows of the top, bottom, left, and right edges of a document, and also the shadow in the center of the document if it is a bound document. You can specify values for [Top], [Bottom], [Left], [Right], and [Center] individually. Parallel Edges Erases the shadows of the top and bottom edges, and left and right edges of a document, and also the shadow in the center of the document if it is a bound document. You can specify values for [Top & Bottom], [Left & Right], and [Center] individually. Erase Value Allows you to specify Edge Erase values. 4 Edges Erases the shadows of the four edges of the document in accordance with the orientation of the loaded document. You can set the edge erase width within the range from 0 to 50 mm in 1 mm increments. Top & Bottom (Top/Bottom) Erases the shadows of top and bottom edges of the document in accordance with the orientation of the loaded document. You can set the edge erase width within the range from 0 to 50 mm in 1 mm increments. Left & Right (Left/Right) Erases the shadows of left and right edges of the document in accordance with the orientation of the loaded document. You can set the edge erase width within the range from 0 to 50 mm in 1 mm increments.

86

Layout Adjustment

Center Erases the shadow in the center of facing pages of a bound document. You can set the binding erase width within the range from 0 to 50 mm in 1mm increments. Original Orientation Allows you to specify the orientation of the document to have the machine identify the top of the document.
Note If the [Original Orientation] differs from the actual document orientation, then the machine may mistakenly detect the top of the document.

Upright Images Select this item when placing the top edge of the document against the top side of the document glass or document feeder. Sideways Images Select this item when placing the top edge of the document against the left side of the document glass or document feeder. Side 2 Appears when [Edge Erase] is selected. Set whether the same value is set to the edge erase amount of Side 1 and Side 2. Same as Side 1 The same value is set to the edge erase amount of Side 1 and Side 2. Mirror Side 1 The edge erase amounts of Side 1 and Side 2 are set symmetrically.
Copy

Image Shift (Adjusting the Image Position)


This feature allows you to shift the position of document images so that the images are placed on the left, right, top, bottom, or center of paper. You can also adjust the amounts of the left, right, top, and bottom margins. If you make 2-sided copies, you can adjust the image positions for [Side 1] and [Side 2] individually.
Important Ensure that the orientation of the document and the [Original Orientation] setting are the same. Note The settings made for the Image Shift feature are set in accordance with paper. They are not affected by the Reduce/Enlarge settings.

1 2

Select [Image Shift]. Select any item.

No Shift Does not shift the position of document images. Auto Center Shifts document images so that they are placed in the center of paper.

87

3 Copy

Margin Shift Allows you to adjust margins. Set the amounts of the top & bottom, and left & right margins within the range from 0 to 50 mm in 1 mm increments. Side 1 Displays the [Image Shift - Side 1] screen.
Refer to "[Image Shift - Side 1] Screen" (P.88).

Side 2 Displays the [Image Shift - Side 2] screen.


Refer to "[Image Shift - Side 1] Screen" (P.88).

Mirror Side 1 Select this item when you want the positioning of Side 2 to match the positioning of Side 1. Original Orientation Allows you to specify the orientation of the document to have the machine identify the top of the document.
Note If the [Original Orientation] differs from the actual document orientation, then the machine may mistakenly detect the top of the document.

Copy

Upright Images Select this item when placing the top edge of the document against the top side of the document glass or document feeder. Sideways Images Select this item when placing the top edge of the document against the left side of the document glass or document feeder.

[Image Shift - Side 1] Screen


You can make settings for Side 1.

Select any item.

No Shift Does not shift the position of document images. Auto Center Shifts document images so that they are placed in the center of paper. To make fine adjustments, set the amounts of the top and bottom, and left and right margins within the range from 0 to 50 mm in 1 mm increments.

88

Layout Adjustment

Corner Shift Shifts document images so that they are placed at an edge or corner of paper. You can select from 8 shift directions. To make fine adjustments, set the amounts of the top and bottom, and left and right margins within the range from 0 to 50 mm in 1 mm increments. Margin Shift Allows you to adjust margins. Set the amounts of the top and bottom, and left and right margins within the range from 0 to 50 mm in 1 mm increments.

[Image shift - Side 2] Screen


You can make settings for Side 2.

Select any item.


Copy

No Shift Does not shift the position of document images. Auto Center Shifts document images so that they are placed in the center of paper. To make fine adjustments, set the amounts of the top and bottom, and left and right margins within the range from 0 to 50 mm in 1 mm increments. Corner Shift Shifts document images so that they are placed at an edge or corner of paper. You can select from 8 shift directions. To make fine adjustments, set the amounts of the top and bottom, and left and right margins within the range from 0 to 50 mm in 1 mm increments. Margin Shift Allows you to adjust margins. Set the amounts of the top and bottom, and left and right margins within the range from 0 to 50 mm in 1 mm increments.

Image Rotation (Changing the Orientation of Images)


If the orientation of the paper currently loaded in the tray differs from that of your document, the machine automatically rotates the document image to fit on the paper. You can also select a reference position for image rotation if documents are of mixed orientations. This feature is available only when copies are made using A4, 8.5 x 11", or smaller size paper.

89

3 Copy

1 2

Select [Image Rotation]. Select any item.

Off Copies documents as they are, even if they are orientated differently. Always On Automatically rotates document images so that the orientation of the images matches that of the paper. On during Auto Automatically rotates document images so that the orientation of the images matches that of the paper only when [Auto %] of [Reduce/Enlarge] or [Auto Paper] of [Paper Supply] is selected. Rotation Direction Displays the [Image Rotation - Rotation Direction] screen.
Refer to "[Image Rotation - Rotation Direction] Screen" (P.90).

Copy

[Image Rotation - Rotation Direction] Screen


You can set the reference position for rotation.

Select any item.

Staple Position When the finisher is installed, [Staple Position] is displayed. If documents are of mixed orientations, images will be rotated to match the stapling edge specified in the settings of the Staple feature. Portrait Original - Left Edge If documents are of mixed orientations, images will be rotated so that the top edge of landscape documents is aligned with the left edge of portrait documents. Portrait Original - Right Edge If documents are of mixed orientations, the image will be rotated so that the top edge of landscape documents is aligned with the right edge of portrait documents.

90

Layout Adjustment

Invert Image (Making Reversed Copies of Images)


This feature allows you to invert document images to make mirror and negative images.
Note When Output Color is set to [Black] or [Single Color], the black color on the document is inverted to white, and the white color to black. When Output Color is set to [Color], the colors are inverted to their complementary colors. When [Negative Image] and [Edge Erase] are set simultaneously, the edge erase area turns to white.

1 2

Select [Invert Image]. Select any item.

Copy

Mirror Image Creates a mirror image of the document. Negative Image Creates a negative image of the document.

Original Orientation (Specifying the Orientation of Loaded Documents)


This feature allows you to specify the orientation of a document to have the machine identify the top of the document.
Note If the [Original Orientation] differs from the actual document orientation, then the machine may mistakenly detect the top of the document.

1 2

Select [Original Orientation]. Select [Upright Images] or [Sideway Images] in accordance with the orientation of the document loaded.

Upright Images Select this item when placing the top edge of the document against the top side of the document glass or document feeder.

Sideways Images Select this item when placing the top edge of the document against the left side of the document glass or document feeder.

91

3 Copy

2 Sided Copying (Making 2 sided Copies)


Copies of 1-sided and 2-sided documents can be made on one side or both sides of a paper.
Important Ensure that the orientation of the document and the [Original Orientation] setting are the same. When the Finisher-B1 is installed, and if paper of different size from the specified size is loaded for 2-sided copying, output copies are delivered to the center tray. Remove the paper delivered to the center tray every now and then.

1 2

Select [2-Sided Copying]. Select any item.

Copy

3
1 1 Sided Makes a copy of a 1-sided document on one side of paper. 1 2 Sided

Makes a copy of a 1-sided document on both sides of paper. 2 2 Sided

Makes a copy of a 2-sided document on both sides of paper. 2 1 Sided

Makes a copy of a 2-sided document on one side of paper. Originals Head to Head Select this item when the front and back faces of the document are in the same orientation. Head to Toe Select this item when the front and back faces of the document are in opposite orientations. This item appears when [2 2 Sided] or [2 1 Sided] is selected. Copies Head to Head Select this item when you want the orientation of the front and back sides of the copy to be the same as that of the document. Head to Toe Select this item when you want the orientation of the first and second sides of the copy to be the opposite of that of the document. This appears when [1 2 Sided] or [2 2 Sided] is selected.

92

Layout Adjustment

Original Orientation Allows you to specify the orientation of the document to have the machine identify the top of the document.
Note If the [Original Orientation] differs from the actual document orientation, then the machine may mistakenly detect the top of the document.

Upright Images Select this item when placing the top edge of the document against the top side of the document glass or document feeder. Sideways Images Select this item when placing the top edge of the document against the left side of the document glass or document feeder.

Copy

93

3 Copy

Output Format
On the [Output Format] screen, you can configure features for outputting documents. The following shows the reference section for each feature.
Booklet Creation (Creating a Booklet) .......................................................................................94 Covers (Attaching Covers to Copies) .........................................................................................98 Transparency Options (Inserting Blank Sheets between Transparencies)..................................99 Multiple-Up (Copying Multiple Pages onto One Sheet) ..........................................................100 Poster (Making Enlarged Copies Spread over Multiple Sheets)...............................................101 Repeat Image (Making Multiple Copies on One Sheet) ...........................................................102 Annotations (Adding a Comment / a Date / Page Numbers to Copies)....................................103 Watermark (Printing Control Numbers on the Background of Copies) ...................................109 Secure Watermark (Managing Document Security).................................................................112 Folding (Outputting Bi-Folded Paper)......................................................................................113 Preset Repeat Image (Making Multiple Copies on a Single Sheet)..........................................114 2 Sided Copying (Making 2 Sided Copies) ..............................................................................114 Copy Output (Specifying Finishing Options) ...........................................................................115 ID Card Copying (Copying Both Sides of an ID Card)............................................................116

Copy

3
1 2

On the [All Services] screen, select [Copy]. Select the [Output Format] tab, and then select a feature on the [Output Format] screen.

Booklet Creation (Creating a Booklet)


This feature lays out pages so that booklets are formed when the output sheets are folded in half. You can also set the binding shift and attach a cover when making booklets. When the Finisher-C1 with Booklet Maker (optional) is installed, you can also fold the output sheets in half, or staple the folded output sheets. When the Booklet Maker Unit for Finisher-B1 (optional) is installed, you can also crease the output sheets in half, or staple the creased output sheets.
Important Ensure that the orientation of the document and the [Original Orientation] setting of the [Layout Adjustment] screen are the same. When the Finisher-B1 is installed, do not remove paper from the finisher tray until all the output sheets have been delivered.

94

Output Format

Note

As the machine copies four pages of the document onto one sheet of paper, if the number of pages in the booklet is not a multiple of four, the remaining pages will be output as blank pages. If [Auto Paper Select] is set for [Paper Supply], a tray specified in [Auto Paper Off] is automatically selected. Change the settings if necessary. For information on [Auto Paper Off], refer to "5 Tools" > "Copy Service Settings" > "Copy Control" in the Administrator Guide.

1 2

Select [Booklet Creation]. Select any item.

Copy

Off Disables this feature. Create Left/Top Bound Booklet Copies are made to enable left binding or top binding. Create Right Bound Booklet Copies are made to enable right binding. Copy Booklet You can output the copies of scanned documents as they are by specifying Bi-fold/ Stapling. Select this when you do not need a document to be copied in booklet page order.
Note This feature does not appear for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more information, contact our Customer Support Center.

Covers You can attach covers to a booklet. No Covers No cover is added. Blank Covers A blank sheet of paper is attached as the cover. 2 Sided Covers The first and second pages of the document are copied on both sides of the cover. 1 Sided Covers - Print Outside The first page of the document is copied on the front side of the cover. Last Page on Back Cover Selecting this check box copies the image of the last document page onto the last page of the copy sheets as a back cover. When you use [Divide Output] to divide a booklet into subsets, the image of the last document page will be copied onto the last page of the last subset.
Note Depending on the number of pages in the original, a blank page may be added before the last booklet page.

95

3 Copy

Binding Shift Displays the [Booklet Creation-Binding Shift] screen.


Refer to "[Booklet Creation-Binding Shift] Screen" (P.96).

Divide Output Displays the [Booklet Creation-Divide Output] screen.


Refer to "[Booklet Creation-Divide Output] Screen" (P.96).

Fold & Staple Displays the [Booklet Creation - Fold & Staple Options] screen.
Refer to "[Booklet Creation-Fold & Staple] Screen" (P.97).
Note This feature does not appear for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more information, contact our Customer Support Center.

Paper Supply
Copy

Displays the [Booklet Creation - Paper Supply] screen. Select the tray to be used for body pages from [Main Body Tray], and the tray for cover pages from [Cover Tray]. The orientation and size of paper loaded in the trays must be the same.
When [Bypass...] is selected, the [Tray 5] screen appears. For more information, refer to "[Tray 5] Screen" (P.70).

[Booklet Creation-Binding Shift] Screen


You can set the binding shift value within the range from 0 to 50 mm in 1 mm increments.

Use [ ] and [ ] or numeric keypad to specify a binding shift value.

[Booklet Creation-Divide Output] Screen


When you have a large number of originals, the originals are divided to create subsets to reduce the thickness of each booklet. The machine folds copies in half, and piles them up to form a booklet. You can specify the number of sheets within the range of 1 - 50 in 1-sheet increments.
Note When specifying [Folding], set the dividing number of sheets in the range from 1 to 15.

96

Output Format

1 2

Select [On]. Set the number of copies using [ or with the numeric keypad. ] and [ ]

[Booklet Creation-Fold & Staple] Screen


When the Finisher-C1 with Booklet Maker (optional) is installed, [Bi-Fold] or [Bi-Fold + Stapling] becomes available. When the Booklet Maker Unit for Finisher-B1 (optional) is installed, [Crease] and [Crease + Stapling] becomes available.
Copy

Select any item.


Note Items displayed vary based on a finisher installed. when the Finisher-C1 is installed, the machine will display the screen shown on the right.

No Fold & Staple No Finishing is carried out. Fold Only Displayed when the C1-Finisher with Booklet Maker (optional) is installed. Outputs copies folded in half. The number of copies that can be folded is 5. When the number is more than 5, the document is divided by every 5 sheets. Fold & Staple Displayed when the C1-Finisher with Booklet Maker (optional) is installed. The copies are folded in half and stapled at the center. The number of copies that can be treated is 2 to 15. Crease Displayed when the Booklet Maker Unit for Finisher-B1 (optional) is installed. The copies are creased in half. The number of copies that can be creased is up to 5. When the number is more than 5, the document is divided by every 5 sheets. Crease + Stapling Displayed when the Booklet Maker Unit for Finisher-B1 (optional) is installed. The copies are creased in half and stapled at the center. The number of copies that can be treated is 2 to 15.

97

3 Copy

Covers (Attaching Covers to Copies)


This feature allows you to attach covers to copies. Different types of paper (such as colored paper and heavyweight paper) can be used as the front and back covers of copies.
Important When you select this feature, if the number of pages scanned by the machine exceeds the maximum limit, the machine will not print the scan data. In that case, follow the message displayed on the screen to cancel the job. The maximum number of pages that the machine can scan is 999 pages per job. For multiple jobs, the maximum number of pages is 15,000 pages for color copies and 6,000 pages for black-and-white copies when the documents are A4 (Xerox standard size). These values are approximate and may vary depending on the paper type, size, and orientation of the original documents. Note When making 2-sided copies, copies are made on both sides of the top cover/back

cover in accordance with the page order of the document.

If [Auto Paper Select] is set for [Paper Supply], a tray specified in [Auto Paper Off] is automatically selected. Change the settings if necessary. For information on [Auto Paper Off], refer to "5 Tools" > "Copy Service Settings" > "Copy Control" in the Administrator Guide.

Copy

1 2

Select [Covers]. Select any item.

Front Cover Attaches a front cover to the copies. No Covers No cover is added. Blank Covers Blank sheets of paper are attached as front covers. 1 Sided Cover Side 1 Only The first page of the document is copied on the front side of the front cover. 1 Sided Cover Side 2 Only The first page of the document is copied on the back side of the front cover. 2 Sided Cover The first and second pages of the document are copied on the front and back sides of the front cover. Back Cover Attaches a back cover to the copies. No Covers No back cover is attached. Blank Covers Blank sheets of paper are attached as back covers. 1 Sided Cover Side 1 Only The first page of the document is copied on the front side of the back cover.

98

Output Format

1 Sided Cover Side 2 Only The first page of the document is copied on the back side of the back cover. 2 Sided Cover The first and second pages of the document are copied on the front and back sides of the back cover. Paper Supply Displays the [Covers - Paper Supply] screen. Allows you to set a tray. When you select trays for copying and make covers, the orientation and size of paper loaded in the trays must be the same. Front Cover Tray Set the tray used for front covers. Back Cover Tray
Copy

Set the tray used for back covers. Main Body Tray Set the tray used for the body pages of documents.
When [Bypass...] is selected, the [Tray 5] screen appears. For more information, refer to "[Tray 5] Screen" (P.70).
Note [Auto Size Detect] of [Tray 5] cannot be selected as [Covers Tray].

Front Cover Quantity Allows you to specify the number of blank sheets to be used as front covers. This setting is displayed when [Blank Covers] is selected for [Front Cover]. Back Cover Quantity Allows you to specify the number of blank sheets to be used as back covers. This setting displayed when [Blank Covers] is selected for [Back Cover].

Transparency Options (Inserting Blank Sheets between Transparencies)


This feature allows you to insert blank separators between output transparency sheets. At the same time, you can make copies for handouts.
Important Using transparency sheets for color (V556/V558 [with white border]) may cause a malfunction or paper jam. Note When loading A4 size transparencies on Tray 5 (bypass), we recommend loading them vertically. Transparency sheets must be loaded in a tray in the same orientation as the paper to be used for handouts and separators.

1 2

Select [Transparency Options]. Select any item.

No Transparency Separators Does not insert separators.

99

3 Copy

Blank Transparency Separators Inserts a separator each time a transparency is used for copying. Only one set of copies can be made. Blank Separators & Handouts Inserts a separator each time a transparency is used for copying. At the same time, the required number of copies is made for handouts. Transparency Set & Handouts Makes copies using transparencies. At the same time, the required number of copies is made for handouts. Paper Supply Displays the [Paper Supply] screen. Select the tray to use.
When [Bypass...] is selected, the [Tray 5] screen appears. Refer to "[Tray 5] Screen" (P.70).

Copy

Multiple-Up (Copying Multiple Pages onto One Sheet)


2, 4, or 8 pages of a document can be copied together onto a single sheet of paper. When you select [Multiple-Up], [Auto %] of [Reduce/Enlarge] is selected automatically. The machine automatically sets the copy ratio and makes copies of the images so that they fit on the selected paper.
Important Ensure that the orientation of the document and the [Original Orientation] setting of the [Layout Adjustment] screen are the same. Note When [Auto %] of [Reduce/Enlarge] is cancelled (a new copy ratio is selected), image loss may occur depending on the size of the document image. When Image Shift is set, shift is executed on the whole document. For this reason, image loss at the edge of the original may occur depending on the size of the document image. When Edge Erase is set, it is carried out for each document page. Select other than [Auto] for a tray to be selected for [Paper Supply] on the [Copy] screen. If [Auto] is set for [Paper Supply], a tray specified in [Auto Paper Off] is automatically selected. Change the setting as necessary. For information, refer to "5 Tools" > "Copy Service Settings" > "Copy Control" > "Auto Paper Off" in the Administrator Guide.

1 2

Select [Multiple-Up]. Select any item.

Off Disables this feature. 2 Pages Up Copies two document pages onto one side of a single sheet of paper. 4 Pages Up Copies four document pages onto one side of a single sheet of paper. 8 Pages Up Copies eight document pages onto one side of a single sheet of paper.

100

Output Format

Reading Order Allows you to select how to lay out images on a page. Original Orientation Allows you to specify the orientation of the document to have the machine identify the top of the document.
Note If the [Original Orientation] differs from the actual document orientation, then the machine may mistakenly detect the top of the document.

Upright Images Select this item when placing the top edge of the document against the top side of the document glass or document feeder. Sideways Images Select this item when placing the top edge of the document against the left side of the document glass or document feeder.
Copy

Poster (Making Enlarged Copies Spread over Multiple Sheets)


An enlarged copy of a document can be made spread over multiple sheets. This feature allows you to create a large poster by pasting together the copies spread over multiple sheets. Copied sheets are provided with a paste margin so that they can be pasted together. The paste margin is fixed to 10 mm.
Important Confirm that the orientation of the document and the [Original Orientation] setting of the [Layout Adjustment] screen are the same. Note This feature is not supported by the document feeder.

1 2

Select [Poster]. Select any item.

No Posters No enlarged copies are made. Output Size You can select paper sizes. Enlargement %
Refer to "When [Enlargement %] is Selected" (P.102).

Paper Supply Displays the [Paper Supply] screen. Select the paper tray to use.
When [Bypass...] is selected, the [Tray 5] screen appears. Refer to "[Tray 5] Screen" (P.70).

101

3 Copy

When [Enlargement %] is Selected


You can specify a different ratio for the height and width.

Use [ ] and [ width ratios.

] to specify the height and

Width X/Length Y Set the height and width ratios within the range from 100 to 400% in 1% increments. Lock X - Y% You can simultaneously change the numerical values of the height and width by the same amount.
Copy

Repeat Image (Making Multiple Copies on One Sheet)


This feature allows you to copy a document image on one sheet of paper repeatedly for a specified number of times. When the copy ratio is set to [Auto], the repeated copies of the image are reduced to fit on the selected paper. You can also specify how the repeated copies of the image are arranged.
Note When making copies at the same size as the document image, specify a number of repeats so that the copies fit on the paper. If [Auto Paper Select] is set for [Paper Supply], the tray specified in [Auto Paper Off] is automatically selected. Change the settings if necessary. For information on [Auto Paper Off], refer to "5 Tools" > "Copy Service Settings" > "Copy Control" in the Administrator Guide.

1 2

Select [Repeat Image]. Select any item.

Off Disables this feature. Auto Repeat Automatically determines the number of copies according to the document size, paper size, and copy ratio, and then repeatedly copies the document image onto the paper.
Note Copies cannot be made when the document image is larger than the specified paper size.

102

Output Format

Variable Repeat Specify how many copies to place along each of the long and short edges of paper. You can specify a value between 1 and 23 for the length in the Y direction and a value between 1 and 33 for the length in the X direction. Image Layout Evenly Spaced The specified number of images are evenly arranged on the paper. Side by Side The specified number of images are arranged with no space on the paper.

Annotations (Adding a Comment / a Date / Page Numbers to Copies)


This feature allows you to add a comment, a date, and page numbers onto copies. You can select comment, date, and page-number styles, and their print positions.
Important When you select this feature, if the number of pages scanned by the machine exceeds the maximum limit, the machine will not print the scanned data. In that case, follow the message displayed on the screen to cancel the job. The maximum number of pages that the machine can scan is 999 pages per job. For multiple jobs, the maximum number of pages is 1,500 for color copies and 6,000 for black-and-white copies when the documents are A4 (Xerox standard size). These values are approximate and may vary depending on the paper type, size, and orientation of the original documents. Note The Reduce/Enlarge feature does not affect the annotation image and text sizes. If you specify [Stamp], [Date], and [Page Number] together, make sure that their print positions do not overlap. When the [Multiple-Up] feature is used, an annotation is added to each copy page. When the [Repeat Image] or [Booklet Creation] feature is used, an annotation is added to each copy image.

Copy

1 2

Select [Annotations]. Select any item.

Comment Displays the [Comment] screen.


Refer to "[Comment] Screen" (P.104).

Date Stamp Displays the [Date Stamp] screen.


Refer to "[Date Stamp] Screen" (P.105).

Page Numbers Displays the [Page Numbers] screen.


Refer to "[Page Numbers] Screen" (P.105).

Bates Stamp Displays the [Bates Stamp] screen.


Refer to "[Bates Stamp] Screen" (P.107).

103

3 Copy

Original Orientation Allows you to specify the orientation of the document to have the machine identify the top of the document.
Note If the [Original Orientation] differs from the actual document orientation, then the machine may mistakenly detect the top of the document.

Upright Images Select this item when placing the top edge of the document against the top side of the document glass or document feeder. Sideways Images Select this item when placing the top edge of the document against the left side of the document glass or document feeder.

[Comment] Screen
This screen allows you to select a comment style and a comment position.
Copy

Select any item.

3
Off No comment is added. Comment A comment is added. Stored Comments You can select comment text from eight options, or from user-defined text strings.
For information on how to register text, refer to "5 Tools" > "Common Service Settings" > "Watermark" > "Custom Watermark 1 to 3" in the Administrator Guide.

Apply To Displays the [Apply Comment To] screen. You can select whether to add a stamp onto the first copy page only, or onto each copy page. Position Displays the [Comment - Position] screen. For side 1 of copy sheets, you can select a comment position from nine options. For side 2 of copy sheets, you can select [Same as Side 1] or [Mirror Side 1]. Format & Style Displays the [Comment - Format & Style] screen. You can select a comment size from three options, or can directly specify a size in the range of 6 to 64 points in 1 point increments. You can also select a stamp color from seven options.
Note When setting [Date Stamp] and [Page Numbers] at the same time, [Black] is specified for the color of comment.

104

Output Format

[Date Stamp] Screen


This screen allows you to add a date to copies. The date shows when you started copying the document.
You can change the date format. For details, refer to "5 Tools" > "Common Service Settings" > "Watermark" > "Date Format" in the Administrator Guide.

Select any item.

Off No date is added. Date Stamp A date is added. Apply To Displays the [Apply Date Stamp To] screen. You can select whether to add a date onto the first copy page only, or onto each copy page. Position Displays the [Date Stamp - Position] screen. For side 1 of copy sheets, you can select a date position from six options. For side 2 of copy sheets, you can select [Same as Side 1] or [Mirror Side 1]. Font Size Displays the [Date Stamp - Font Size] screen. You can select a date size from three options, or can directly specify a size in the range of 6 to 24 points in 1 point increments.
Copy

[Page Numbers] Screen


This screen allows you to select a page-number style.

Select any item.

Off No page number is added. Page Numbers Adds page numbers to copies. Style 1, 2, 3 Adds page numbers only. -1-, -2-, -3Adds page numbers, and hyphens before and after each page number. (Example: -1-)

105

3 Copy

Page1, Page2, Page3 Adds page numbers, and the text "Page" before each page number. (Example: Page1, Page2) 1/N, 2/N, 3/N Adds page numbers, and the total number of pages to the right of each page number. (Example: 1/50, 2/50) When [1/N, 2/N, 3/N] is selected, the value specified in the [Total Page(N)] screen is used. -1/N-, -2/N-, -3/NAdds page numbers followed by the total number of pages, and hyphens before and after the numbers. (Example: -1/50-, -2/50-) When [-1/N-, -2/N-, -3/N-] is selected, the value specified in the [Total Page(N)] screen is used. Page 1/N, Page 2/N, Page 3/N Adds page numbers followed by the total number of pages, and the text "Page" before each page number. When [Page 1/N, Page 2/N, Page 3/N] is selected, the value specified in the [Total Page(N)] screen is used. Total Pages (N) Displays the [Page Number - Total Pages (N)] screen. - Auto Automatically calculates the total number of pages. - Enter Number Allows you to manually specify the total number of pages in the range of 1 to 999. Apply To Displays the [Apply Page Numbers To] screen.
Refer to "[Apply Page Numbers To] Screen" (P.107).

Copy

Position Displays the [Page Numbers - Position] screen. You can select a page-number position from six options. You can also select a comment position on Side 2 from [Same as Side 1] and [Opposite to Side 1]. Font Size Displays the [Page Numbers - Font Size] screen. You can select a page-number size from three options, or can directly specify a size in the range of 6 to 24 points in 1 point increments.

106

Output Format

[Apply Page Numbers To] Screen


This screen allows you to specify a page range to add page numbers.

Select any item.

All Pages Adds page numbers to all copy pages.


Copy

Starting Page Number Allows you to specify the start page to add a page number, in the range of 1 to 999.
Note Use [ ] and [ ], or the numeric keypad and enter the start page number.

Ending Page Number Allows you to specify the end page to add a page number, in the range of 1 to 999. The start page is fixed to "1".
Note Use [ ] and [ ], or the numeric keypad and enter the end page number.

Starting & Ending Page Numbers Allows you to specify the start and end pages to add page numbers, in the range of 1 to 999.
Note Use [ ] and [ ], or the numeric keypad and enter the start and end page numbers.

Include Covers/Separators Available when [All Pages] is selected. Place a check mark to include covers and separators. Starting Number You can enter a value within the range from 1 to 999.
Note Use [ ] and [ ], or the numeric keypad and enter a starting page number.

[Bates Stamp] Screen


This screen allows you to select prefix text and to specify the number of digits to be used for page numbers.

Select any item.

107

3 Copy

Off Adds no prefix text or page number. Bates Stamp Adds prefix text and page numbers to copies. Stored Prefixes Allows you to use the screen keyboard to enter prefix text up to 16 characters. Number of Digits Displays the [Bates Stamp - Number of Digits] screen. You can specify the number of digits to be used for page numbers, between 1 and 9 digits in 1 digit increments. Apply To Displays the [Apply Bates Stamping To] screen.
Refer to "[Apply Bates Stamp To] Screen" (P.108).

Copy

Position Displays the [Bates Stamping - Position] screen. You can select a prefix and page-number position from six options. You can also select a stamp position on Side 2 from [Same as Side 1] or [Opposite to Side 1]. Font Size Displays the [Bates Stamping - Font Size] screen. You can select a prefix and page-number size from three options, or can directly specify a size in the range of 6 to 24 points in 1 point increments.

[Apply Bates Stamp To] Screen


This screen allows you to specify a page range to add prefix text and page numbers.

Select any item.

All Pages Adds prefix text and page numbers to all pages. Starting Page Number Allows you to specify the start page to add prefix text and a page number, in the range of 1 to 999.
Note Use [ ] and [ ], or the numeric keypad and enter the start page number.

Ending Page Number Allows you to specify the end page to add prefix text and a page number, in the range of 1 to 999. The start page is fixed to "1".

108

Output Format

Note

Use [

] and [

], or the numeric keypad and enter the end page number.

Starting & Ending Page Numbers Allows you to specify the start and end pages to add prefix text and page numbers, in the range of 1 to 999.
Note Use [ ] and [ ], or the numeric keypad and enter the start and end page numbers.

Include Covers/Separators Available when [All Pages] is selected. To also include covers and separators, place a check mark. Starting Number You can enter a value within the range from 1 to 999999999 when [Number of Digits] is not set, and can enter a value of up to the specified number of digits when [Number of Digits] is set.
Important If the page number exceeds the specified value (1 to 999999999 when [Number of

Copy

Digits] is not set) during copying, the copy job will be canceled.
Note Use [ ] and [ ], or the numeric keypad and enter the end page number.

3
Watermark (Printing Control Numbers on the Background of Copies)
You can faintly print a sequential control number in the background of each copy page. If you set 1 as the starting number, 1 is printed on each page of the first copy set and 2 is printed on each page of the second set. To prevent, for instance, the duplication of confidential documents that are to be distributed at a conference, you can use this feature to add sequential numbers to the copies, and associate the numbers with the conference members.
Important When you select this feature, if the number of pages scanned by the machine exceeds the maximum limit, the machine will not print the scan data. In that case, follow the message displayed on the screen to cancel the job. The maximum number of pages that the machine can scan is 999 pages per job. For multiple jobs, the maximum number of pages is 1,500 pages for color copies and 6,000 pages for black-and-white copies when the documents are A4 (Xerox standard size). These values are approximate and may vary depending on the paper type, size, and orientation of the original documents. Note This feature does not appear for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more information, contact our Customer Support Center.

1 2

Select [Watermark]. Select any item.

Control Number Off No control number is printed. On A control number is printed. Enter the starting number of the control number. You can set a control number within the range from 1 to 999. Use [ ] and [ ], or the numeric keypad and enter the value.

109

3 Copy

Stored Watermarks Displays the [Stored Watermarks] screen.


Refer to "[Stored Watermarks] Screen" (P.111).

User Account Number When using User Administration or Account Administration, a user account number is printed. However, if a user is not authenticated, nothing will be printed.
Note [User Account Number] is the No. (User Administration Number) registered by users in Account Administration. This screen is displayed when the Account Administration feature is enabled. If the Authentication and Account Administration feature is used, [User Account Number] is displayed even when no data is collected. In this case, even if [On] is selected for [User Account Number], the No. registered by users (User Administration Number) is not printed.

Date & Time You can print the date and time that the copy job started.
For information about the format for the date, refer to "5 Tools" > "Common Service Settings" > "Watermark" > "Date Format" in the Administrator Guide.

Copy

Serial Number The serial number of the machine is printed. Original Orientation Allows you to specify the orientation of the document to have the machine identify the top of the document.
Note If the [Original Orientation] differs from the actual document orientation, then the machine may mistakenly detect the top of the document.

Upright Images Select this item when placing the top edge of the document against the top side of the document glass or document feeder. Sideways Images Select this item when placing the top edge of the document against the left side of the document glass or document feeder. Watermark Effect Displays the [Watermark Effect] screen.
Refer to "[Watermark Effect] Screen" (P.111).
Note This feature does not appear for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more information, contact our Customer Support Center.

110

Output Format

[Stored Watermarks] Screen


Select the text to print on the copy.

1 2

Select [On]. Select any text.

Off No text is printed. On Text is printed. You can select the text used for watermark. You can specify text from 3 preset texts or the text set in the System Administration mode.
For information on how to register text, refer to "5 Tools" > "Common Service Settings" > "Watermark" > "Custom Watermark 1 to 3" in the Administrator Guide.

Copy

[Watermark Effect] Screen


You can set Text Effect on this screen. If you enable the Text Effect feature, the text strings specified in [Control Number], [Text], [User Account Number], [Date & Time], and [Serial Number] on the [Watermark] screen are embedded in the background of each copy. When the copy is copied again, the text embedded in the background is printed as embossed or outline text depending on the option you select on the [Watermark - Text Effect] screen.
Note This feature does not appear for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more information, contact our Customer Support Center.

Select any item.

Off Disables the feature, and prints text as it is. Embossed Enables the feature. When the copy is copied again, the text embedded in the background of the copy is printed as embossed text. Outline Enables the feature. When the copy is copied again, the text embedded in the background of the copy is printed as outline text.
You can also set the character size, density, and other watermark print settings in the System Administration mode. For information about other advanced settings, refer to "5 Tools" > "Common Service Settings" > "Watermark" in the Administrator Guide.

111

3 Copy

Secure Watermark (Managing Document Security)


Secure Watermark is a security management feature to embed a copy protection digital code into a document, to restrict the document to be duplicated. With the digital code, you can also analyze "when", "from which machine", and "by whom" the document was output.
Important This feature is only supported on Fuji Xerox manufactured machines that are compatible to Secure Watermark. Document copy protection that is set using the Secure Watermark feature is not warranted to always function. The feature may not function depending on the document or setting conditions. For more information, contact our Customer Support Center. Note that we assume no responsibility for a damage caused by using or being not able to use the Secure Watermark feature. By using the Secure Watermark feature, print quality may deteriorate as follows: - Colors may become darker. - Text in documents may become hard to read. - Dots such as decimal characters and periods may become hard to read. The Secure Watermark feature may not work properly for a document if its size is smaller than A5, if its background color is not white, or if the Watermark or Secure Watermark feature has already used for the document. In some cases, a document may not be printed even if the Secure Watermark feature has not been used for the document. This happens because the machine incorrectly detects a copy protection code from the document. In that case, ask the system administrator to temporarily disable the detection feature for copy protection codes. Note This feature does not appear for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more information, contact our Customer Support Center. To analyze digital codes, an optional application, ApeosWare Secure Watermark Analyzer, is required. For information on how to use ApeosWare Secure Watermark Analyzer, refer to its documentation.

Copy

1 2

Select [Secure Watermark]. Select any item.

Off Does not manage document security. On Manages document security. Select any feature button if necessary. Protection Code Off Does not prevent document duplication. A digital code is embedded into copies. Prevent Duplication Prevents document duplication. Any documents with a copy protection code cannot be copied.
Important This setting also affects scan operation.

Stored Secure Watermarks Displays the [Stored Secure Watermarks] screen.


Refer to "[Stored Secure Watermarks] Screen" (P.113).

112

Output Format

[Stored Secure Watermarks] Screen


You can embed hidden text into documents. With this hidden text feature, the specified text is embedded in the entire sheet. When making a copy of a document that has been copied with this hidden text feature, the embedded text on the output appears in white regardless of whether or not the Secure Watermark kit is installed.

Select any item.

Off Does not print hidden text. On Prints hidden text. You can select any text from the three preset text, or from text registered in the System Settings.
For information on how to register text, refer to "5 Tools" > "Common Service Settings" > "Watermark" > "Custom Watermark 1 to 3" in the Administrator Guide.

Copy

Original Orientation Allows you to specify the orientation of the document to have the machine identify the top of the document.
Note If the [Original Orientation] differs from the actual document orientation, then the machine may mistakenly detect the top of the document.

Upright Images Select this item when placing the top edge of the document against the top side of the document glass or document feeder. Sideways Images Select this item when placing the top edge of the document against the left side of the document glass or document feeder.

Folding (Outputting Bi-Folded Paper)


This feature allows you to fold copies in half, or crease in half.
Important When the Finisher-B1 is installed, do not remove paper from the finisher tray until all the output copies have been delivered. Note This feature does not appear for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more information, contact our Customer Support Center. The supported paper orientation is only . Select the tray whose orientation is set to .

113

3 Copy

1 2

Select [Folding]. Select any item.


Note Items displayed vary based on a finisher installed. When the Finisher-C1 is installed, the screen shown on the right is displayed.

No Folding Does not fold the copies. Single Fold Displayed when the Finisher-C1 with Booklet Maker (optional) is installed. Folds copies in half. Single Fold (Crease) Displayed when the Booklet Maker Unit for Finisher-B1 (optional) is installed. Creases copies in half.
Copy

Preset Repeat Image (Making Multiple Copies on a Single Sheet)


This feature allows you to repeatedly copy one original onto equally divided areas according to the specified number of copies.
Note When anything other than [Auto %] is selected for [Reduce/Enlarge], image loss may occur depending on the image size.

1 2

Select [Preset Repeat Image]. Select any item.

Off Disables this feature. 2 Pages Up Makes two copies of the document image on a single sheet of paper. 4 Pages Up Makes four copies of the document image on a single sheet of paper. 8 Pages Up Makes eight copies of the document image on a single sheet of paper.

2 Sided Copying (Making 2 Sided Copies)


This feature is the same as [2 Sided Copying] of the [Layout Adjustment] screen. Refer to "2 Sided Copying (Making 2 sided Copies)" (P.92).

114

Output Format

Copy Output (Specifying Finishing Options)


This feature allows you to select finishing options.
Note This feature does not appear for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more information, contact our Customer Support Center.

If a finisher is installed, each set of copies can be stapled, and then output. When the Hole Punch Kit for Finisher-B1, Finisher-C1, or Finisher-C1 with Booklet Maker is installed, copies can be punched.

1 2

Select [Copy Output]. Select any item.


Note Items displayed vary based on a finisher installed. When the Finisher-C1 is installed, the screen shown on the right is displayed.

Copy

Auto Copies are collated when any of the following features is used: auto document feeder, 2 Sided Book Copy, Covers, [Blank Separators & Handouts] or [Transparency Set & Handouts] of Transparency Separators, Booklet Creation, Stapling, Build Job, Sample Set, and Combine Original Sets. Collated/Staple/Hole Punch The machine outputs sheets sorted into sets that are arranged in page order. Uncollated The machine outputs the specified number of copies and sorts sheets by page. Uncollated with Separators The machine outputs copies with inserting blank sheets as a separator and sorts sheets by page.
When [Bypass...] is selected, the [Tray 5 (Bypass)] is displayed. For details, refer to "[Tray 5] Screen" (P.70)".

Staple Sets the position for stapling. The number of sheets that can be stapled is 2 - 50 (when 80 g/m2 paper is used). Available paper types are: plain paper, recycled paper, side 2 paper, heavyweight (106 - 176 g/m2), heavyweight reload, extra heavyweight (177 220 g/m2), gloss (106 - 176 g/m2), gloss reload, punched paper, and custom paper 1 to 5.
Important Confirm that the orientation of the document and the [Original Orientation] setting of the [Layout Adjustment] screen are the same. In the following cases, the actual stapling position is different from the stapling position appearing on the screen: When [Original Orientation] is set to [Upright Images], and [Stapling] is set to one position at the right side. When [Original Orientation] is set to [Sideways Images], and [Stapling] is set to one position at the left side.

115

3 Copy

Hole Punch Sets the position for punching. The positions for punching vary based on a finisher installed.
Important Confirm that the orientation of the document and the [Original Orientation] setting of the [Layout Adjustment] screen are the same. When the punching feature of a finisher is defective, paper is delivered to the center tray instead of the finisher tray. Remove the paper delivered to the center tray every now and then.

Original Orientation Allows you to specify the orientation of the document to have the machine identify the top of the document.
Note If the [Original Orientation] differs from the actual document orientation, then the machine may mistakenly detect the top of the document.

Upright Images
Copy

Select this item when placing the top edge of the document against the top side of the document glass or document feeder. Sideways Images Select this item when placing the top edge of the document against the left side of the document glass or document feeder. When you place a document in the head to left orientation, be sure to select [Sideways Images]. Output Destination/Offset Allows you to select an output destination.
Note This function may not appear depending on the model of the machine, and optional equipment is required for use. For more information, contact your local Fuji Xerox representative.

ID Card Copying (Copying Both Sides of an ID Card)


This feature allows you to copy both sides of a small undetectable original, such as an ID card, onto one side of paper.

Place a document against the top left edge of the document glass, and close the cover.
Important Use the document glass when copying. The document feeder is not available for this feature. Specify the originals orientation correctly. Place the card slightly away from the topleft corner of the document glass so that the whole image can be captured.

2 3

For the document orientations, refer to "Original Orientation (Specifying the Orientation of Loaded Documents)" (P.91)".

Select [ID Card Copying]. Select [On]. Off Disables ID card copying.

116

Output Format

On Enables ID card copying.

Copy

117

3 Copy

Job Assembly
On the [Job Assembly] screen, you can configure features such as Build Job and Sample Set. The following shows the reference section for each feature.
Build Job (Processing Documents Scanned with Different Settings as One Job) ....................118 Sample Job (Checking the Finished Output of the Copy) ........................................................122 Combine Original Sets (Adding Originals) ..............................................................................123 Delete Outside/Delete Inside (Deleting Outside or Inside of the Selected Area).....................124 Stored Programming (Calling a Stored Program for Build Job)...............................................126

1 2
Copy

On the [All Services] screen, select [Copy]. Select the [Job Assembly] tab, and then select a feature on the [Job Assembly] screen.

Build Job (Processing Documents Scanned with Different Settings as One Job)
This feature allows you to apply different copy settings to each document page or each document stack, and then outputs the copies as one job.

1 2 3

Select [Build Job]. Select [On]. Select the desired print settings.
Note Select [ ] to return to the previous screen or [ ] to move to the next screen.

Build Job Off Build Job is not applied. Build Job On Build Job is applied. The feature buttons appear. Set any item if necessary.
Important The features set here cannot be canceled or changed while the machine performs a copy job.

For features available in Build Job, refer to "Features that can be set in Build Job" (P.118).

Features that can be set in Build Job


Copy Output
For information on the feature, refer to "Copy Output (Specifying Finishing Options)" (P.115).

118

Job Assembly

Booklet Creation
For information on the feature, refer to "Booklet Creation (Creating a Booklet)" (P.94).

Covers
Important The machine does not copy on a cover when using the Build Job feature.

For information on the feature, refer to "Covers (Attaching Covers to Copies)" (P.98).

Annotations
For information on the feature, refer to "Annotations (Adding a Comment / a Date / Page Numbers to Copies)" (P.103).

Segment Separators
For information on the feature, refer to "[Segment Separators] Screen" (P.120).

Watermark
For information about the feature, refer to "Watermark (Printing Control Numbers on the Background of Copies)" (P.109).

Copy

Secure Watermark
For information about the feature, refer to "Preset Repeat Image (Making Multiple Copies on a Single Sheet)" (P.114).

[Copy Job] screen


The following describes the screen that appears while the Build Job is being executed.

Change Settings... Displays the [Copy] screen allowing you to change the settings. After changing the settings as necessary, press the <Start> button on the control panel to start scanning of the document. If you want to return to the previous screen, press the < # > button. When using a stored program for Build Job While the machine makes copies using the Build Job feature, you can use a stored program. 1) Select [Change Settings...]. 2) Select the [Job Assembly] tab. 3) Select [Stored Programming]. 4) Select the number of the stored program that contains the features you wish to use.
Note You can only select numbers that have been registered.

For information on how to register a stored program, refer to "Registering Stored Programs for Build Job" (P.267).

Chapter Start... Displays the [Build Job - Chapter Start] screen.


Refer to "[Build Job - Chapter Start] Screen" (P.121).

119

3 Copy

Insert Separators... Displays the [Segment Separators] screen.


Refer to "[Segment Separators] Screen" (P.120).

Change Quantity... Displays the [Build Job - Change Quantity] screen. Enter a new quantity using the numeric keypad. Cancel The document data stored by the Build Job feature is cleared and the job is cancelled.
Note The same operation is performed if you press the <C (Clear)> or <Clear All> button on the control panel. While scanning the loaded document, [Stop] is displayed. Select [Stop] to pause scanning. Select [Start] in the touch screen, or press the <Start> button on the control panel to resume scanning.

Copy

Last Original Select this to end scanning of documents. The build job starts. Next Original Select this when you have another document. This item is selected when using the Build Job feature. Start When loading the next document and select [Start], the next documents are scanned.
Note The same operation is performed if you press the <Start> button on the control panel.

Sample Job When making multiple sets of copies, you can print a sample set to check the finished output and then print the remaining copy sets. You can select to continue or cancel the job after the confirmation.

[Segment Separators] Screen


You can insert a sheet of paper as a separator in between each stack of documents. You can specify the number of separators to insert within the range of 1 to 99 as necessary.
Note You can specify different settings for each stack of documents. If you do not specify particular settings for each stack of documents, the previously specified settings are applied.

1 2

Select any item. Select [ ]/[ ] or use the numeric keypad to enter the number of separators to insert.

No Separators The machine does not insert any separators. Blank Separators The machine inserts blank separators. Select this feature, load documents, and press the <Start> button. The blank separators are inserted.

120

Job Assembly

1 Sided Separators Side 1 Only A first page of the loaded documents is copied on the front side of a separator, and the rest of pages are copied on the paper other than a separator. When using [Multiple-Up], the number of pages (2 pages, 4 pages, or 8 pages) that you selected to copy onto one side of a single sheet, starting from the first page of the loaded documents, are copied onto the front page of a separator. When loading a single sheet document, the document is copied onto a separator. 1 Sided Separators Side 2 Only A first page of the loaded documents is copied on the back side of a separator, and the rest of pages are copied on the paper other than a separator. When using [Multiple-Up], the number of pages (2 pages, 4 pages, 8 pages) that you selected to copy onto one side of a single sheet, starting from the first page of the loaded documents, are copied onto the back side of a separator. When loading a single sheet document, the document is copied onto a separator.
Copy

2 Sided Separators First two pages of the loaded documents are copied onto each side of a separator, and the rest of pages starting from the third page are copied onto the paper other than a separator. When using [Multiple-Up], the number of pages (2 pages, 4 pages, 8 pages) that you selected to copy onto one side of a single sheet, starting from the first page of the loaded documents, are copied onto each side of a separator. When loading two-sheet documents, both sheets are copied onto each side of a separator.
Note When you have two separate documents, a single sheet document and multiple sheet documents, if you want to copy this single sheet document and the first page of the multiple sheet documents onto each side of a separator, when loading the multiple sheet documents, select [No Separator] under [Build Job - Separators]. If you do not select [No Separator], the machine processes these two documents separately under different separator settings, the single-sheet document is copied onto a separator, and the first page (or first two page) of the multiple sheet documents is copied onto another separator.

Segment Separator Tray You can select the tray, which is loaded with paper to be used as a separator.
When [Bypass...] is selected, the [Tray 5] screen appears. For more information, refer to "[Tray 5] Screen" (P.70).

Separator Quantity When you select [Blank Separators], the number of separators can be set from 1 to 99.

[Build Job - Chapter Start] Screen


You can set the chapter start.

Select any item. Off The next stack of documents is copied after the previous stack. On The next stack of documents is copied from Side 1 of a new sheet of paper.

121

3 Copy

Multiple-Up - New Page When [Multiple-Up] is marked, even if all documents are divided for every chapter before all of them are assembled in [Multiple-Up] feature, the next stack of document is copied using new sheets of paper.

Sample Job (Checking the Finished Output of the Copy)


When making multiple sets of copies, you can print a sample set to check the finished output and then print the remaining copy sets. You can select to continue or cancel the job after the confirmation. The number of sets to be copied can also be changed. The sample copy is included in the total number of sets.
Note After a sample set is output, the remaining sets will automatically be output if the machine is left uninstructed for the period specified under [Auto Job Release]. For details on [Auto Job Release], refer to "5 Tools" > "Common Service Settings" > "Machine Clock/Timers" > "Auto Job Release" in the Administrator Guide.

1 2

Copy

Select [Sample Job]. Select [On].

Sample Job Off No sample set is made. Sample Job On A sample set is made.

[Copy Job] screen


The machine pauses and displays the [Copy Job] screen after the sample set is copied.

Change Settings... The [Change Settings...] screen is displayed. Uncheck the settings you want to cancel. Change Quantity... The [Change Quantity] screen appears and you can change the number of copies entered before. Enter a new quantity using the numeric keypad. The new value must include the number of the sample set that has already been printed. When reducing the quantity, you cannot enter a number less than the number of copies that have already been printed.
Note If you specify "1" for [Change Quantity] and then press the <Start> button, the machine will not process the job.

122

Job Assembly

Cancel The remaining copies are cancelled. Start The remaining copies are made.
Note The same operation is performed if you press the <Start> button on the control panel.

Combine Original Sets (Adding Originals)


Use this feature when you copy a document that has too many pages to be loaded into the document feeder at one time, or when you scan each document page using the document glass and have the machine process the pages as one job. [Next Original] that is usually displayed while scanning documents with the document feeder is always selected in this mode. In addition, when using the document glass to scan documents, [Next Original] is also selected during scanning. If [Copy Output] is set to [Auto], the output is automatically sorted. When all documents have been scanned, select [Last Original].
Note After the first original set is copied, the screen will automatically return to the previous display if the machine is left unused for the period specified under [Auto Clear]. For details on [Auto Job Release], refer to "5 Tools" > "Common Service Settings" > "Machine Clock/ Timers" > "Auto Job Release" in the Administrator Guide.

Copy

1 2

Select [Combine Original Sets]. Select [On].

Off Disables this feature. On Enables this feature. Original Orientation Allows you to specify the orientation of the document to have the machine identify the top of the document.
Note If the [Original Orientation] differs from the actual document orientation, then the machine may mistakenly detect the top of the document.

Upright Images Select this item when placing the top edge of the document against the top side of the document glass or document feeder. Sideways Images Select this item when placing the top edge of the document against the left side of the document glass or document feeder.

123

3 Copy

[Copy Job] screen


The [Copy Job] screen is displayed when copying begins.

Cancel The document data stored by [Combine Original Sets] is cleared and the copying is cancelled.
Note The same operation is performed if you press the <C> button or <Clear All> button on the control panel.

Copy

Last Original Select this to end scanning documents. Next Original Select this when you have more documents to copy. This button is activated when the [Combine Original Sets] feature is used. Start Load the next document, and select [Start] to start scanning.
Note The same operation is performed if you press the <Start> button on the control panel.

Delete Outside/Delete Inside (Deleting Outside or Inside of the Selected Area)


This feature allows you specify the area to be deleted from a document image. 3 areas can be specified.

1 2

Select [Delete Outside/Delete Inside]. Select any item.

Off No area is deleted. Delete Outside Deletes the outside of the selected area. Delete Inside Deletes the inside of the selected area.

124

Job Assembly

Area Settings Displays the [Delete Outside/Delete Inside - Area 1 (Area 2 or Area 3)] screen. You can set up to 3 areas.
Refer to "[Delete Outside/Delete Inside - Area 1 (Area 2 or Area 3)] Screen" (P.125).

Originals When the original document is a 2-sided document, specify from which side the specified area is to be deleted. Both Sides Applies the settings to both sides of the document. Side 1 Only Applies the settings to side 1 of the document. Side 2 Only Applies the settings to side 2 of the document. Original Orientation Allows you to specify the orientation of the document to have the machine identify the top of the document.
Note If the [Original Orientation] differs from the actual document orientation, then the machine may mistakenly detect the top of the document.

Copy

Upright Images Select this item when placing the top edge of the document against the top side of the document glass or document feeder. Sideways Images Select this item when placing the top edge of the document against the left side of the document glass or document feeder.

[Delete Outside/Delete Inside - Area 1 (Area 2 or Area 3)] Screen


Set the area to be deleted. The area is defined by the rectangle formed between the points X1,Y1 and X2,Y2. The origin point is the top-right corner of a document. You can specify a value within the range of 0 to 432 mm for the width (X) and the length (Y) in 1 mm increments.
Note Specify the 2 coordinates from the top right corner of the document. When specifying multiple areas, the specified areas can overlap each other. When [Reduce/Enlarge] is enabled, the specified area will be reduced/enlarged accordingly.

1 2 3 4 5

Select [Area 1], [Area 2], or [Area 3]. Enter the value for X1 into [X1] using the numeric keypad, and select [Save]. Enter the value for Y1 into [Y1] using the numeric keypad, and select [Save]. Enter the value for X2 into [X2] using the numeric keypad, and select [Save]. Enter the value for Y2 into [Y2] using the numeric keypad, and select [Save].
Note If all of [X1], [Y1], [X2], and [Y2] are set to [0], the area will be invalid. If no other area is specified, the Delete Outside/Delete Inside feature cannot be used. If you select <C> button, the value is cleared.

125

3 Copy

Clear Area 1 (Area 2 or Area 3) Clears all the values set for Area 1 (Area 2 or Area 3).

Stored Programming (Calling a Stored Program for Build Job)


This feature allows you to call a stored program for build job.
For information on this feature, refer to "Calling a Stored Program for Build Job" (P.271)".

Copy

126

4 Fax
This chapter describes the basic fax procedures and the fax features provided by the machine. Fax Procedure ..........................................................................................128 Operations during Faxing .........................................................................134 About Internet Fax ....................................................................................136 About Server Fax......................................................................................143 Fax/Internet Fax........................................................................................145 Layout Adjustment ....................................................................................155 Fax/Internet Fax Options ..........................................................................159 More Options ............................................................................................175 Broadcast..................................................................................................180 Receiving Faxes .......................................................................................189 Facsimile Information Services.................................................................191
Note The fax features are not available for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more information, contact our Customer Support Center. LINE 2 (line 2) and LINE 3 (line 4) are optional.

4 Fax

Fax Procedure
This section describes the basic fax operations. The following shows the fax flow and reference sections.
Step 1 Loading Documents .......................................................................................................128 Step 2 Selecting Features ..........................................................................................................130 Step 3 Specifying Destinations .................................................................................................131 Step 4 Starting the Fax Job .......................................................................................................132 Step 5 Confirming the Fax Job in Job Status ............................................................................133

Step 1 Loading Documents


There are two methods for loading documents: Document Feeder Single sheet Multiple sheets Document Glass Single sheet Bound documents, such as books
Fax

Document Feeder
The document feeder supports single and multiple sheet documents with sizes from 139.7 x 210 mm (A5, 5.5 x 8.5 inches) to 297 x 600 mm (long) (A3, 11 x 17 inches). The document feeder automatically detects documents of standard-size widths.
Note The standard document sizes that can be detected automatically depend on the [Paper Size Settings] in the System Administration mode. For information on the paper size settings, refer to "5 Tools" > "Common Service Settings" > "Other Settings" > "Paper Size Settings" in the Administrator Guide

The sizes on the left are detected as the sizes shown on the right. 8-inch width document 10-inch width document B5 width document B4 width document

The document feeder accepts the following number of sheets. Document Type (Weight)
Lightweight paper (38 - 49 g/m2) Plain paper (50 - 80 g/m2) Heavyweight paper (81 - 128 g/m2)

Number of Sheets
75 sheets 75 sheets 50 sheets

Important Place folded or creased documents on the document glass to avoid paper jams. 2-sided scanning of lightweight paper (38 - 48 g/m2) is not supported.

For information on faxing mixed sized documents, refer to "Mixed Sized Originals (Scanning Different Size Documents Simultaneously)" (P.156).

128

Fax Procedure

1 2

Remove any paper clips and staples before loading the document. Place the document (the front side of 2-sided document) face up in the center of the document feeder.
Note The indicator lights when the document is loaded correctly. If the indicator does not light up, the machine may be trying to detect a document on the document glass. Press the <C> button, and then reload the document.

Indicator

Adjust the movable document guides to just touch the edges of the document loaded.

Fax

Document Glass
The document glass supports a single sheet, a book, or other similar documents up to 297 x 432 mm (A3, 11 x 17").
Important After using the document glass, close the document cover.

The document glass automatically detects standard size documents.


Note The standard document sizes that can be detected automatically depend on the [Paper Size Settings] in the System Administration mode. For information on the paper size settings, refer to "5 Tools" > "Common Service Settings" > "Other Settings" > "Paper Size Settings" in the Administrator Guide

CAUTION Do not apply excessive force to hold thick document on the platen glass. It may break the glass and cause injuries.

Open the document cover.


Important Ensure that a screen is displayed on the control panel, and then load a document. If a document is loaded before a screen is displayed, the machine may not properly detect the document size.

2 3

Place the document face down, and align it against the top left corner of the document glass. Close the document cover.
Note When a standard size document is placed on the document glass, the size of the document is displayed in the message area.

129

4 Fax

Step 2 Selecting Features


You can select the Fax or Internet Fax feature, or the Server Fax feature on the [All Services] screen.
Important The fax and Internet Fax features are not available while the Server Fax feature is enabled. Note Features displayed may vary depending on the model of your machine. When the Authentication or Account Administration feature is used, a user ID and passcode may be required. Ask your system administrator for the user ID and passcode.

Press the <All Services> button.


1 4 7 2 5 8 0 C 3 6 9 #

<All Services> button

Fax

Select [Fax/Internet Fax].

If the previous settings still remain, press the <Clear All> button.
1 4 7 2 5 8 0 C 3 6 9 #

<Clear All> button

Select each tab, and configure features as necessary.


When you press the <Energy Saver> button while configuring the features, you can select whether to use the feature that skips 2-sided blank pages. For details, refer to "2 Sided (Skip Blank Pages)" (P.152)".

The following shows the reference section for each tab.


"Lighten/Darken (Adjusting Fax Density)" (P.151) "Layout Adjustment" (P.155) "Fax/Internet Fax Options" (P.159) "More Options" (P.175)

130

Fax Procedure

Step 3 Specifying Destinations


Three methods are available to specify recipients: by phone number, by address number, and by group dial number. The following shows input methods supported by each method. Numeric Keypad Phone Number Address Number (Speed Dialing) Group Dial Number O: Available X: Not available
Important When using the Server Fax feature, you cannot specify address numbers using the numeric keypad or use one-touch buttons. Note When the Address Book Extension Kit (optional) is installed, you can specify up to 999 address numbers. O 3 digits (001 to 500) 2 digits + (nn0 to nn9) 3 digits (001 to 070)

One Touch buttons


X

Address Book
X From the list tab and index O

(All address numbers)


# + 2 digits X

Fax

You can specify multiple recipients (Broadcast Send) using the above methods. You can also use a combination of the methods. If the same recipient was specified for several pending documents, you can send the documents with a single phone call. This feature is referred to as Batch Send. Note that you cannot use Batch Send with Broadcast Send, Relay Broadcast, Remote Mailbox, and Delay Start when prior to the specified time. When using a redial, resend, or delayed start send transmission job, or authentication feature, to send to the same address from different users, then Batch Send is not possible.
Important Confirm the recipient before sending a fax.

For information on Broadcast Send, "Broadcast Send (Transmitting to Multiple Recipients)" (P.180).

This section describes how to enter a phone number with the numeric keypad.

Enter a fax number using the numeric keypad.


1 4 7 2 5 8 0 C 3 6 9 #

Numeric keypad

To specify multiple recipients, select [+ Add] on the touch screen.


Note If you enter an incorrect value, press the <C> button and enter the correct value. Depending on the settings, a screen to reenter the recipient may be displayed after you specify the recipient and then select [+ Add] on the touch screen. In such case, re-enter the recipient.

131

4 Fax

For information on specifying a fax number using the address book, refer to "Specifying a Destination Using the Address Book" (P.146). For information on specifying a fax number using the speed dialing, refer to "Speed Dialing (Specifying a Destination Using an Address Number)" (P.148). For information on specifying a fax number using one touch buttons, refer to "Specifying a Destination using a One Touch Button" (P.148). For information on the Internet Fax, refer to "About Internet Fax" (P.136).

Step 4 Starting the Fax Job


The following explains the procedure to start a fax job.

Press the <Start> button.


Important If the document has been set in the document feeder, do not hold down the document while it is being conveyed. Fax cannot be sent if a copy protection code is detected.
1 4 7 2 5 8 0 C 3 6 9 #

Fax

Note

Depending on the settings, the screen to re-enter the recipient may be displayed after pressing the <Start> button. In this case, re-enter the recipient. If a problem occurs, an error message appears in the touch screen. Solve the problem in accordance with the message. You can set the next job during faxing.

<Start> button

If you have more documents If you have more documents to fax, select [Next Original] on the touch screen while the current document is being scanned. This allows you to send the documents as one set of data. While documents are being scanned, select [Next Original].

Note

When using the document feeder, load the next document after the machine has finished scanning the first document. When the above screen is displayed and no operation is performed for a certain period of time, the machine automatically assumes that there are no more documents. You can change the scan settings of the next document by selecting [Resolution], [Scan Size] and [Lighten/Darken] displayed after selecting [Next Original].

Load the next document.

132

Fax Procedure

4 5

Press the <Start> button. If you have more documents, repeat Steps 3 and 4. When all documents have been scanned, select [Last Original].

Step 5 Confirming the Fax Job in Job Status


The following explains the procedure to confirm the status of the faxed job.

Press the <Job Status> button.


1 4 7 2 5 8 0 C 3 6 9 #

Fax

<Job Status> button

Confirm the job status. From the pull-down menu, you can select and display the types of jobs ([All Jobs], [Printer & Print from Mailbox Jobs], [Scan, Fax, & Internet Fax Jobs], [Job Flow & Auto File Transfer Jobs]).

Note

Select [ ] to return to the previous screen or [ ] to move to the next screen.

If undelivered documents exist You can confirm undelivered documents in the [Job Status] screen or [Job Status/ Activity Report] screen.
For information on how to send or delete undelivered documents, refer to "Undelivered Faxes" (P.303).

133

4 Fax

Operations during Faxing


The following describes the available operations during faxing. The following shows the reference section for each feature.
Stopping the Fax Job.................................................................................................................134 Changing the Scan Settings.......................................................................................................135

Stopping the Fax Job


To cancel scanning a fax document, follow the procedure below.

Press either [Stop] on the touch screen or the <Stop> button on the control panel.
1 4 7 2 5 8 0 C 3 6 9 #

Fax

<Stop> button

Select [Cancel].

134

Operations during Faxing

If the screen shown in Step 2 does not appear even after you press the <Stop> button on the control panel:

Press the <Job Status> button.


1 4 7 2 5 8 0 C 3 6 9 #

<Job Status> button

Select the job to cancel, and then select [Cancel].

Fax

4
Changing the Scan Settings
You can change the scan settings while scanning the document.

Select [Next Original].

Set [Resolution], [Scan Size], and [Lighten/ Darken].


For each setting, refer to "Resolution (Specifying the Scanning Resolution)" (P.153), "Original Size (Specifying the Scan Size for the Original)" (P.155), or "Lighten/Darken (Adjusting Fax Density)" (P.151).

Press the <Start> button.

135

4 Fax

About Internet Fax


Unlike general fax communications using public phone lines, Internet Fax uses corporate intranets and the Internet to send or receive scan documents as e-mail attachments. Because Internet Fax uses existing corporate intranets and the Internet, the transmission is less expensive than general fax transmission. By using a fax gateway, the machine can also communicate with fax machines that do not support the Internet Fax feature.
Note This feature is not available for some models. To use the feature, an optional package is necessary. For more information, contact our Customer Support Center.

For information on how to connect the machine to a network and configure the network environment, refer to "5 Tools" > "Connectivity and Network Setup" > in the Administrator Guide, and the manual contained in the CD-ROM on the Driver CD Kit.

Internet Fax Overview


Fax

The following describes the Internet Fax features of the machine.

Sending Internet Fax


The Internet Fax feature allows you to send documents scanned by the machine as TIFF-format attachments to Internet Fax-compatible machines.
Important The TIFF file profiles that can be processed differ depending on the Internet Fax-compatible machine of the recipient. Confirm the profile that can be processed by the recipient's Internet Fax-compatible machine before specifying a profile. For more information, refer to "Sending Internet Fax" (P.138)". For profiles, refer to "Internet Fax Profile (Specifying Internet Fax Profiles)" (P.172). If a document is sent to a computer using the Internet Fax feature, it cannot be opened in some cases. When you send a document to a computer, therefore, using the Scan-to-E-mail feature is recommended.

Using Direct Internet Fax feature An Internet Fax can be sent directly to the Internet Fax-compatible machines without going through the SMTP server.
You can switch between Internet Fax and Direct Internet Fax in the System Administration mode. For more information, refer to "5 Tools" > "Fax Service Settings" > "Internet Fax Control" > "Internet Fax Path" in the Administrator Guide.

Registering e-mail addresses in address numbers Once you register a recipient's e-mail address in an address number, you do not need to enter the e-mail address each time you send Internet Fax to the recipient.
Note To address numbers, you can also register the Internet Fax profile and other settings required for transmission.

For information on how to register e-mail addresses, refer to "5 Tools" > "Setup" > "Add Address Book Entry" in the Administrator Guide.

Using the Broadcast Send feature An Internet Fax can be sent to multiple destinations by specifying multiple e-mail addresses. Also, you can mix normal fax recipients and Internet Fax recipients to send a broadcast transmission for fax and Internet Fax.
For information on how to specify recipients, refer to "Step 3 Specifying Destinations" (P.131) and "Specifying a Destination Using the Address Book" (P.146).

136

About Internet Fax

Forwarding documents stored in mailboxes By enabling the forwarding feature and registering a forwarding e-mail address for a mailbox beforehand, the fax documents stored in the mailbox are automatically forwarded to the specified computer. The user, therefore, does not need to walk up to the machine to pick up the fax documents.
For more information, refer to "Forwarding Documents Stored in a Mailbox" (P.142).

Sending an Internet Fax to normal fax machines via a relay station By specifying mail addresses in a specific format, you can send faxes from the machine on the network via an Internet Fax-compatible machine (fax gateway) to fax machines that do not support the Internet Fax feature.
Important This feature is available only when the e-mail reception method on the fax gateway is set to SMTP.

For more information, refer to "Sending an Internet Fax to normal fax machines via a relay station" (P.141).

Precautions when sending Internet Fax The message "Doc. Sent" displayed on the [Job Status] screen of the machine, the Job History Report, and the Transmission Report indicates that the transmission to the SMTP server configured on the machine has been successful. The Internet Fax transmission to the recipient may not complete if there is a problem on the Internet. In such case, the machine will not be notified of such transmission error. After sending an important e-mail, we suggest you to confirm it is received, such as by calling the recipient.
Note You can receive a transmission result e-mail if you set Read Receipts (MDN)/Delivery Receipts (DSN) when transmitting. For more information, refer to "Acknowledgement Report (Confirming Transmission Results)" (P.159).

Fax

Receiving Internet Fax (Printing Internet Fax)


The machine automatically prints Internet Fax documents that are sent by e-mail from an Internet Fax-compatible machine.
Note The following TIFF file format and profiles are available for e-mail reception. File format: TIFF-FX (RFC2301) Profile: TIFF-S, TIFF-F, TIFF-J, and TIFF-C. If an unsupported profile is received, the machine may not be able to print the file. For more information, refer to "Receiving Internet Fax" (P.139).

Restrictions on the E-mail Server


Depending on the system environment, such as restrictions on the e-mail server, largesize e-mails cannot be sent or received. Before you set the data-split feature, therefore, check the system environments of the sending and receiving ends. If data is split into multiple data but each data size is still too large, change the image quality or resolution of each data to make its size even smaller.

137

4 Fax

Features Unavailable for Sending Internet Fax


The following features are available for regular fax transmission, but are not available for Internet Fax transmission. Screen
Fax/Internet Fax Options

Features
Starting Rate Priority Send Delay Start Transmission Header Text Cover Page Recipient Print Sets F Code Remote Mailbox

More Options

Remote Polling

If you are using the fax gateway feature, you can set the communication mode and F code. For more information on the fax gateway feature, refer to "Sending an Internet Fax to normal fax machines via a relay station" (P.141).

Fax

Sending Internet Fax


The following explains the procedure to send Internet Fax.
Important The CC, BCC, and Reply To features are not available for Internet Fax. Note The machine converts documents to the TIFF format and then sends them as e-mail attachments.

Select [Internet Fax].

2 3

Select [New Recipients]. Specify a recipient by entering up to 128 characters with the keyboard displayed in the touch screen.
Important If you specify a fax number, the data will not be sent. Note You can use address numbers, one touch buttons, group dial numbers, or Address Book to specify e-mail addresses. For more information, refer to "Speed Dialing (Specifying a Destination Using an Address Number)" (P.148), "Specifying a Destination using a One Touch Button" (P.148), and "Specifying a Destination Using the Address Book" (P.146).

4
138

Enter a subject and a message if necessary.

About Internet Fax

For entering the subject, refer to "Internet Fax Subject (Specifying the Internet Fax Subject)" (P.166). For entering the contents, refer to "Internet Fax Message (Editing the Internet Fax Mail Contents)" (P.166).
Note If the hard disk of the machine becomes full during scanning of a document, a screen appears to prompt you to select whether to send the job up to the stored pages or to cancel the job. Choose one of the processes. If the hard disk of the machine becomes full during Internet Fax transmission, the transmission is cancelled and the document data is deleted. If TIFF-J is specified for the profile, the recipient's computer may not be able to display the attached TIFF file properly. In this case, specify the TIFF-S or TIFF-F profile. If the destination machine is not the same model as this machine, it may not print data received from this machine. Check if the destination machine supports the Internet Fax feature before you send data to it.

Receiving Internet Fax


Reception method When the machine receives e-mail from an Internet Fax-compatible machine, the received document is printed automatically. No specific operations are needed to receive e-mail. The machine also accepts e-mails addressed to mailboxes on the machine, such as "BOX123@myhost.example.com".
For information on the mailbox, refer to "5 Tools" > "Setup" > "Create Mailbox" > in the Administrator Guide. For the job flow sheets, refer to "5 Tools" > "Setup" > "Create Job Flow Sheet" in the Administrator Guide.
Note If domains for receiving e-mail are restricted by CentreWare Internet Services, you will only receive Internet Fax from the permitted domains. For information about the domain filter, refer to "5 Tools" > "Connectivity and Network Setup" > "Outgoing/Incoming E-mail Settings" > "Domain Filter" in the Administrator Guide. You can confirm the domain setting status in the [Domain Filter List]. For more information, refer to "4 Machine Status" > "Machine Infromation" > "Print Reports" in the Administrator Guide.

Fax

Printing size Internet Fax documents received on the machine are printed at the same size as the original documents of the senders.
Note When [TIFF-S] is selected for the profile, the printing size will be A4.

When the loaded paper is not the same size as the sent document or when the paper tray used for printing received documents is restricted, the receiving process will be the same as that for regular faxes. Receiving e-mail Each e-mail header and attachment (TIFF file) of received e-mail will be printed. Split documents sent by e-mail If a document scanned by the machine is split into segments according to the [Max. No. of Pages for Split Send] setting made with CentreWare Internet Services, each segment will be treated as individual e-mail and attached with the details of split data. Attachments (TIFF format) If an unsupported attachment file is received, the file is deleted. You can confirm the error in the Job History Report. When the mailbox number is not registered

139

4 Fax

If the specified mailbox is not registered, the received data is deleted. You can confirm the cause of the problem in the Job History Report. Mailbox operations If the machine runs out of hard disk space while printing e-mail or storing e-mail to the mailbox, the page being processed will be deleted at the point in time when the machine runs out of hard disk space. Restricting incoming e-mail The machine can be configured to accept or reject e-mails received from specified domains. This feature is known as the "Domain Filter". You can register up to 50 domains as permitted or rejected domains. When receiving an e-mail, the machine check the Domain Filter settings. If the domain is registered as the domain to be rejected, the machine will not receive the e-mail. You can confirm the result in the [Job History Report]. The job history of any rejected mail is not stored.
For information about the domain filter, refer to "5 Tools" > "Connectivity and Network Setup" > "Outgoing/Incoming E-mail Settings" > "Domain Filter" in the Administrator Guide".

Fax

Useful Features
Using an E-mail Address to Send Internet Fax to a Mailbox
By specifying the e-mail address of a mailbox on this machine, you can send Internet Fax from an Internet Fax-compatible machine to the mailbox. When Internet Fax data is received, the machine stores it in the target mailbox and prints a Mailbox Report.
This feature is available only if the recipients machine can receive e-mail via SMTP. To use this feature, the recipients machine must have a mailbox that does not have a passcode. For more information, refer to "5 Tools" > "Setup" > "Domain Filter" in the Administrator Guide.

1 2

Select [Internet Fax]. Select any item.

Enter the e-mail address of the target mailbox in the following format.

BOX123 @myhost.example.com
BOX (fixed characters to indicate mailbox) + mailbox number
Example

@ + host name of the receiving machine

Domain name of the receiving machine

Mailbox number............................................ 123 (Enter the digits of the mailbox number to match those of the recipient) Host name of the receiving machine............ myhost Domain name of the receiving machine....... example.com

140

About Internet Fax

Important If the hard disk of the machine becomes full during Internet Fax transmission, the transmission is cancelled and the document data is deleted. Note If the hard disk of the machine becomes full during scanning of a document, a screen appears to prompt you to select whether to send the job up to the stored pages or to cancel the job. Choose one of the processes.

Sending an Internet Fax to normal fax machines via a relay station


By specifying e-mail addresses in a specific format, you can send a document to regular fax machines (that do not support the Internet Fax feature) via a network. With this feature, the machine first sends a document to an Internet Fax-compatible machine (fax gateway) by e-mail via the Internet. The e-mail document is then converted to a fax document on the Internet Fax-compatible machine, and is forwarded to its destinations. The fax transmission costs can be reduced by locating the fax gateway and fax machines within an area where the same local rate applies.
Important This feature is available only when the e-mail reception method on the fax gateway is set to SMTP. Note The e-mail received by the fax gateway is deleted even if the fax was not correctly sent. The setting configured in [Communication Mode] of the [Fax/Internet Fax Options] screen is used as the communication mode from the fax gateway to the destination fax machine. Fax forwarding can be restricted by setting [Fax Transfer from Address Book] and [Fax Transfer Maximum Data Size] in the System Settings.

Fax

1 2 3

Select [Internet Fax]. Select any item. Enter the e-mail address of the target mailbox in the following format.

FAX= 0312345678 /T33S=123 @myhost. example.com


FAX= (fixed characters) Fax number of the recipient /T33S= (fixed characters) and F code (if necessary) @ + host name of the machine that converts and sends the received e-mail as a fax. Domain name

Example

Fax number .................................................. 0312345678 F code (if necessary).................................... /T33S=123 Host name of the receiving machine ............ myhost Domain name of the receiving machine ....... example.com

Important If the hard disk of the machine becomes full during Internet Fax transmission, the transmission is cancelled and the document data is deleted. Note If the hard disk of the machine becomes full during scanning of a document, a screen appears to prompt you to select whether to send the job up to the stored pages or to cancel the job. Choose one of the processes.

141

4 Fax

Forwarding Documents Stored in a Mailbox


The following describes the feature to automatically forward fax documents stored in a mailbox, as e-mail attachment. Fax documents sent to mailboxes using the fax signal method (proprietary communication procedures), F Code method or DTMF method, and fax documents stored in mailboxes by the Box Selector feature can be forwarded as e-mail attachments.
Important This feature can only be used when the mail receiving protocol is SMTP.

For information on the mailbox forwarding settings, sending to mailboxes, using the Box Selector to receive documents in a mailbox, and printing or deleting documents received in a mailbox, refer to "Checking/Operating Documents in a Mailbox" (P.245)" . For how to set the Mailbox Selector feature, refer to "5 Tools" > "Fax Service Settings" > "Fax Received Options" in the Administrator Guide.

Forwarding Internet Fax The machine can automatically forward fax documents received in a mailbox or fax documents stored in a mailbox by using the Box Selector feature to the forwarding address specified for the mailbox as e-mail. With this forwarding feature, you can receive Internet Fax documents on your computer without having to walk up to the machine to pick them up. You can also save paper by displaying the documents on your computer screen. How to forward Internet Fax The following operations are required for using the forwarding feature of Internet Fax. On the machine sending a fax Sending faxes to the mailbox using the fax signal method (proprietary communication procedure), F Code method or DTMF method.
For information on the transmission method, refer to "More Options" (P.175).

Fax

On the machine receiving the fax in a mailbox and forwarding an Internet Fax Creating a job flow sheet to specify a forwarding address and then making a link between the job flow sheet and the mailbox.
For information on registering a job flow, refer to "Job Flow Sheets" (P.257).
Important Do not set the address of the machine as the forwarding address. Note You can register up to 100 locations. [Mailbox Number] and [Passcode] are required by the sender. Inform the sender of the settings. If the fax you received is a JBIG-compressed image, and if the Internet Fax profile of the forwarding destination is set to TIFF-F, the image is converted into MH format when forwarding. Also, if the Internet Fax profile is TIFF-S, the fax image is forwarded as is without changing the size and resolution settings. If the hard disk in the machine becomes full while receiving an Internet Fax, the reception is cancelled and the partly received file is deleted. If there is a problem with the data during Internet Fax forwarding, the forwarding is cancelled and the received document is saved to the mailbox. If forwarding using SMTP fails, the received document is stored in the mailbox. You can confirm the forwarding result in the [Job History Report].

142

About Server Fax

About Server Fax


If your machine supports the scan feature, installing the Server Fax Kit (optional) allows you to use the Fax feature of a Server Fax server. When your machine does not support the Fax feature and supports the Server Fax feature only, the Server Fax feature will be enabled automatically. When your machine supports both the Fax and Server Fax features, manually switch to the Server Fax feature in System Settings of the System Administration mode. With this Server Fax feature, you can transfer image data received by the machine to the Server Fax server and can transfer image data received by the Server Fax server to the machine via a network based on the settings you made. The Server Fax feature supports the SMB, FTP, and SMTP protocols.
For information on how to connect the machine to a network and set the network environment, refer to the Administrator Guide and the manual on the Driver CD Kit CD-ROM.
Important While the Server Fax feature is enabled, the Fax feature is detected as "not installed" even if a Fax Kit is installed on the machine. During that time, therefore, fax transmission and reception are disabled and printed reports show that the machine does not support the Fax feature. Note The Server Fax service cannot be used together with the Fax service or the Internet Fax service. This feature is not available for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more information, contact our Customer Support Center.

Fax

Sending Server Fax

1 2

Select [Fax] on the [All Services] screen. Use the keyboard to directly enter a destination, or use Address Book to specify a destination.
For information on how to use the keyboard, refer to "Specifying a Destination using the Keyboard Screen" (P.149). For information on how to use Address Book, refer to "Specifying a Destination Using the Address Book" (P.146).
Important When the Server Fax feature is used for fax transmission, the attributes other than [Fax Number], [Recipient Name], and [Index] are ignored in Address Book.

143

4 Fax

Features Unavailable for Sending Server Fax


The following features are available for regular faxes, but are not available for server faxes. Screen
Fax Transmission Options

Features
Resolution* Priority Send Cover Page Recipient Print Sets Remote Mailbox F Code

More Options

Remote Polling Store for Polling On-hook

* When the SMB or FTP protocol is used, the available options are [Standard] and [Fine], and the resolution of data that is sent to a final destination depends on the resolution setting on the fax server. When the SMTP protocol is used, the available option is [Fine] only.

Fax

The following settings of the Server Fax feature use the values specified under Tools > System Settings > Scan Mode Settings > Scan Defaults. Background Suppression Lighten/Darken Sharpness

Features Available for Sending Server Fax (When SMTP is Used)


When the SMTP protocol is used, the Server Fax feature is compliant with the E-mail settings configured under System Settings. The following E-mail settings, however, are not available for the Server Fax feature: [Read Receipts] and [Reply To].

144

Fax/Internet Fax

Fax/Internet Fax
You can specify recipients in [Fax/Internet Fax]. The following shows the reference section for each feature.
Internet Fax/Fax (Selecting Internet Fax/Fax) ......................................................................... 145 + Add (Sending Faxes to Multiple Recipients)........................................................................ 145 Specifying a Destination Using the Address Book .................................................................. 146 Speed Dialing (Specifying a Destination Using an Address Number) .................................... 148 Specifying a Destination using a One Touch Button ............................................................... 148 Specifying a Destination using the Keyboard Screen .............................................................. 149 Entering Specific Symbols ....................................................................................................... 150 Removing/Confirming a Recipient .......................................................................................... 151

1 2

Select [Fax/Internet Fax] on the [All Services] screen. Select a feature on the [Fax/Internet Fax] screen.
Fax

Internet Fax/Fax (Selecting Internet Fax/Fax)


You can switch between Internet Fax and Fax as necessary.
Note This feature does not appear for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more information, contact our Customer Support Center.

Select [Fax] or [Internet Fax] from the pulldown menu.

+ Add (Sending Faxes to Multiple Recipients)


The Broadcast Send feature allows you to transmit the same document to multiple recipients with a single operation. There is no need to repeat the same operation for each recipient. When an Additional G3 Port Kit (optional) is installed, you can use the extra lines to make multiple transmissions simultaneously with Broadcast Send. If you specify Broadcast Send, the machine prints a relay broadcast report/multi-poll report after the Broadcast Send operation finishes.

145

4 Fax

Note

For Fax and Internet Fax, the maximum number of recipients that you can specify at one time is as follows: Using the numeric keypad only: 200 locations; using address numbers only: 500 locations; and using both the numeric keypad and address numbers: 699 locations. For Server Fax, the maximum number of recipients that you can specify at one time is 50. When the Address Book Extension Kit (optional) is installed, the maximum number of recipients that you can specify at one time is as follows: Using address numbers only: 999 locations; and using both the numeric keypad and address numbers: 1198 locations. For Server Fax, the maximum number of recipients that you can specify at one time is 50. The one touch buttons correspond to address numbers 001 - 070. When using Broadcast Send, [Cover Page] and [Remote Mailbox] are invalid even if they are selected on the control panel. If you want to use [Cover Page] and [Remote Mailbox], set them when registering each recipient in address numbers. You cannot specify [Confirmation Options].

Show Fax No. / E-mail Address When you check the [Show Fax No. / E-mail Address] check box, the recipients name will not be displayed in the recipient field. Enable Broadcast To prevent missending a fax to multiple recipients, you can set whether to use Broadcast Send prior to specifying multiple recipients. Check the [Enable Broadcast] check box to specify multiple recipients.
[Enable Broadcast] is displayed when [Enabled] is set for [Broadcast Checkbox on 1st Tab]. For more information on the setting, refer to "5 Tools" > "Fax Service Settings" > "Fax Control" > "Broadcast Checkbox on 1st Tab" in the Administrator Guide.

Fax

4
1 2

Select the first recipient. Select [+ Add].


Note Depending on the settings, the screen to re-enter the recipient may be displayed after specifying the recipient and then selecting [+ Add] on the touch screen. In that case, re-enter the recipient.

3 4 5 6

Select the next recipient. Repeat Step 2 and Step 3. Press the <Start> button. Select [Yes] on the confirmation screen to start transmission.

Specifying a Destination Using the Address Book


This section describes how to use the address book to specify recipients. The address book shows the fax numbers registered to the address numbers.
For information on how to register address numbers, refer to "5 Tools" > "Setup" > "Add Address Book Entry" in the Administrator Guide.
Important When the Server Fax feature is used for fax transmission, the attributes other than [Fax Number], [Recipient Name], and [Index] are ignored in Address Book.

146

Fax/Internet Fax

1 2

Select [Address Book]. From the pull-down menu of [Address Books] on the [Fax Address Book] screen, select [List all public entries], [Retrieve fax entries using index], [List all group entries], or [Search Network] to search fax numbers.
If you want to specify multiple recipients, specify the recipients one after another.

Select items you want to specify for a recipient, and select [Save].
Note If you uncheck the check box of a recipient, the recipient will be deleted from the displayed list. You can also delete recipients by selecting the <C> button.

Repeat Steps 2 and 3 as necessary.

Using the Address Book


You can search for the fax numbers of recipients using List All Public Entries, Retrieve Fax Entries Using, List All Group Entries, and Search Network.
You can set the starting numbers of address numbers in the System Administration mode. For how to change the settings, refer to "5 Tools" > "Fax Service Settings" > "Screen Defaults" > "Address Book Speed Dial Default" in the Administrator Guide.

Fax

List All Public Entries Displays the list of registered recipients. Select [ ] to return to the previous screen or [ ] to move to the next screen. Select items you want to set for a recipient, and select [+ Add]. Retrieve Fax Entries Using Index Allows you to search for the fax numbers of recipients using texts and numbers specified when registering address numbers. List All Group Entries Allows you to search for the pre-registered group dial numbers. Select [ ] to return to the previous screen or [ ] to move to the next screen. Select items that you want to specify for a recipient, and select [Setup].
For more information on how to register groups dial numbers, refer to "5 Tools" > "Setup" > "Create Fax Group Recipients" in the Administrator Guide.

Search Network Allows you to search for fax numbers not in the local address book but the one registered in a server on a network. Set any items for [Name], [Fax Number], [Custom Item], and select [Search Now]. Select items you want to specify for a recipient, and select [+ Add]. Details Select an item of which details you want to check, and select [Details]. Chain Dial Allows you to combine the fax numbers registered in one touch button, speed dial, and address book respectively and the numbers entered using the Numeric Keypad to specify as one recipient. You do not use the [Next Recipient] button.

147

4 Fax

Show Fax No. / E-mail When you check this box, the names of recipients will not be displayed in the recipient fields

Speed Dialing (Specifying a Destination Using an Address Number)


You can use address numbers to specify recipients. Register the address numbers for speed dialing beforehand. You can use a wildcard ("" character on the numeric keypad or [] on the keyboard screen) to specify multiple recipients. Enter the first two digits to specify address numbers For example, enter "10" to specify 10 numbers from 100 to 109. Specify all the address numbers Enter "" to specify all the address numbers.
When you specify address numbers, confirm that the corresponding fax numbers registered in the machine are correct. For information on how to register address numbers, refer to "5 Tools" > "Setup" > "Add Address Book Entry" in the Administrator Guide.
Note You cannot specify two wildcard characters such as 1, 1, or 1. The maximum number of recipients that you can specify at one time is as follows: Dialing with address numbers: 500 locations. Using the numeric keypad in combination with address numbers: 699 locations. When Address Book Extension Kit is installed, the maximum number of recipients that you can specify at one time is as follows: Dialing with address number: 999 locations. Using the numeric keypad in combination with address numbers: 1198 locations.

Fax

Press the [Speed Dial] button and enter a 3digit address number, Repeat this procedure for each additional recipient.

1 4 7

2 5 8 0 C

3 6 9 #

<Speed Dial> button

Specifying a Destination using a One Touch Button


You can use the one touch buttons to specify recipients. One touch buttons correspond to the address numbers from 001 to 070. For example, when the number you want to dial is registered to the address number 001, press one touch button 001.
For information on how to register address numbers, refer to "5 Tools" > "Setup" > "Add Address Book Entry" in the Administrator Guide.
Note .The Full Size Color UI (optional) is not supported.

148

Fax/Internet Fax

Press a one touch button. Confirm that the recipient (fax number) specified with the one touch button is displayed on the touch screen.
Important When pressing a one touch button, turn over the one touch panel completely, and take off your hand from the panel. If you press a button as you turn over the panel, address numbers may not be specified correctly. Do not place any objects near the one touch buttons, nor spill any liquid over them. Note

001

002

003

016

017

018

004

005

006

019

020

021

007

008

009

022

023

024

010

011

012

025

026

027

013

014

015

028

029

030

One touch button

To specify multiple recipients, press the one touch buttons continuously. Turn the one touch button panel over to press the one touch buttons 031 and above.

Specifying a Destination using the Keyboard Screen


You can specify recipients using the keyboard screen.When the Additional G3 Port Kit (optional) is installed, you can set the line (port) and send faxes. Local terminal information can be registered to each line. You can use each line for a different purpose.
Important When transmission to a certain recipient is being prohibited in the System Administration mode, the [Keyboard] buttons cannot be used.

Fax

For details on local terminal Information, refer to "5 Tools" > "Fax Service Settings" > "Local Terminal Information" in the Administrator Guide.

1 2

Select [New Recipients]. Specify a recipient with no more than 128 characters using the keyboard that appears on the touch screen.
Note When the Server Fax feature is used, a destination must be less than 50 characters long. The available characters are as follows: 0 to 9 # \ S : = + (Space) Numeric characters Pause A starting character for a group number A delimiter for private data. Using this character before and after private data hides the destination string. A character for password verification DTMF signal A character to wait for dial tones Available, but ignored Available, but ignored

For more Information, refer to the documentation provided with Server Fax Kit.

Press the <Start> button.


Note The port numbers are "1", line 2 (LINE 2 jack) "2" and line 4 (LINE 3 jack) "4". You can specify line 2 and line 4 when an option is installed.

149

4 Fax

Specifying a Destination using the Redial Feature


You can specify recipients using the Redial feature.

1 2 3

Select [Redial List...]. Select items you want to specify for a recipient, and select [Close]. Press the <Start> button.

Entering Specific Symbols


When specifying a recipient, you can use the following features to enter specific symbols from the touch screen.
Fax

Feature
Enter pause

Button
- or <Pause> (-)

Function
One pause is 3 seconds. You can enter pauses of 6 seconds, 9 seconds, etc. by additional button presses. When a password has been set, transmission will only start if the password matches the ID number on the remote terminal.

Input method
Press the <Pause> button. (Example) 0-123 ... 0--123 ... 1. Select [New Recipients] in the [Fax/Internet Fax] screen to display the keyboard. 2. Select [S]. (Example) 0312345678S12345678 1. Select [New Recipients] in the [Fax/Internet Fax] screen to display the keyboard. 2. Select [More Characters]. 3. Select [!]. (Example) 0311123456!123# 1. Select [Tone (:)] on the [On-hook] or [Offhook] screen.

Transmit using a password

Transmit DTMF signal

Use to transmit the DTMF signal.

Transmit PB (from dial pulse to tone)


Note

Switches the dial type from pulse to tone when the Fax service is used.

When using the DTMF method, use specific symbols. For information on the DTMF method, "Remote Mailbox (Using Remote Mailbox)" (P.168), and "Broadcast" (P.180).

150

Fax/Internet Fax

Removing/Confirming a Recipient
You can remove or confirm recipients using the pop-up menu.

1 2

Select the recipient to be removed or confirmed from [Address/Recipient]. Select any item from the pop-up menu.

Remove Removes the recipient. Edit... The [Details] screen is displayed. You can confirm recipients or address numbers. Close Menu Hides the pop-up menu.
Fax

[Details] Screen
Allows you to confirm recipients.

Starting Rate Allows you to select a communication mode according to the features of a recipient.

Lighten/Darken (Adjusting Fax Density)


You can adjust fax density from seven levels.

Use [

] and [

] to select a density level.

151

4 Fax

2 Sided Scanning (Transmitting 2-sided Originals)


This feature enables you to scan and then transmit both sides of a document automatically.
Note This feature does not appear for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more information, contact our Customer Support Center. The image on the back side of a document is rotated so that it is placed in the same orientation as the image on the front side.

Select a scan option.

1 Sided Select this option to scan one side of the document. 2 Sided (Head to Head) Select this option to scan both sides of the document (Head to Head). 2 Sided (Head to Toe) Select this option to scan both sides of the document (Head to Toe). More... The [2 Sided Originals] screen is displayed.
"[2 Sided Scanning] Screen" (P.152).

Fax

[2 Sided Scanning] Screen

Select whether the document is one-sided or two-sided. If [2 Sided] is selected, also select the orientation of the document.

1 Sided Select this option to scan one side of the document. 2 Sided Select this option to scan both sides of the document. 2 Sided (First Page 1 Sided) Select this option to scan the front side of the first page and both sides of the remaining pages. Use this item when the back side of the first page is blank. 2 Sided (Skip Blank Pages) Select this option to scan only the document pages that are not blank. You can send documents without concerning for which side is the front.
Note When [2 Sided - Skip Blank] is selected, the settings change as follows: [Original Type] : [Text] [Lighten / Darken] : [Normal] [Reduce/Enlarge] : [100%]

152

Fax/Internet Fax

You can switch [Skip Blank Pages] by pressing the <Energy Saver> button while fax features are being set.

[2 Sided - Skip Blank] appears when [Skip Blank] is set to [Enabled]. For information on the settings, refer to "5 Tools" > "Fax Service Settings" > "Fax Control" > "Skip Blank Pages" in the Administrator Guide.

Originals Select [Head to Head] when both sides of the documents are in the same orientation. Select [Head to Toe] when the front and back sides of the documents are in opposite orientations.

Original Type (Selecting the Document Type)


This feature allows you to select the type of the original document, such as text and photo documents.

Select the original type.


Fax

4
Text Select this item when transmitting a document that contains only text. Photo & Text Select this item when transmitting a document that contains both text and photos. The machine automatically distinguishes the text and photo areas and sets the appropriate image quality for each area of the document. Photo Select this item when transmitting documents that contain only photos.
Note If reduced in size, the scan documents may have stripes in their photo areas.

Resolution (Specifying the Scanning Resolution)


You can set the resolution for the documents to be scanned.
Note The machine scans a document at the specified resolution, but if the machine of the recipient does not support the resolution, the machine automatically changes the resolution to one supported by the recipient's machine and there is a corresponding loss in quality. The higher the resolution, the lower the transmission speed. Usually, we recommend using [Superfine (400dpi)] or lower. Only [Fine] is available for the Server Fax feature.

The resolution can be set individually for each address number. For information on how to register address numbers, refer to "5 Tools" > "Setup" > "Add Address Book Entry" in the Administrator Guide.

153

4 Fax

Select the resolution.

Standard (200 x 100dpi) Select this item when transmitting standard documents. (Approx. 200 x 100 pels/25.4 mm) Fine (200dpi) Select this item when transmitting documents with small text or detailed images. (Approx. 200 x 200 pels/25.4 mm) Superfine (400dpi) Select this item when transmitting documents with fine images. (400 x 400 pels/25.4 mm) Superfine (600dpi) Select this item when transmitting documents with extremely fine images. (600 x 600 pels/25.4 mm)
Fax

154

Layout Adjustment

Layout Adjustment
On the [Layout Adjustment] screen, you can configure features for scanning documents. The following shows the reference section for each feature.
2 Sided Scanning (Transmitting 2-sided Originals)................................................................. 155 Original Size (Specifying the Scan Size for the Original) ....................................................... 155 Mixed Sized Originals (Scanning Different Size Documents Simultaneously) ...................... 156 Book Faxing (Scanning Facing Pages onto Separate Sheets) .................................................. 157 Reduce/Enlarge (Specifying a Scan Ratio) .............................................................................. 158

1 2

Select [Fax/Internet Fax] on the [All Services] screen. Select the [Layout Adjustment] tab, and then select a feature on the [Layout Adjustment] screen.
Fax

4
2 Sided Scanning (Transmitting 2-sided Originals)
This feature is the same as [2 Sided Scanning] on the [Fax/Internet Fax] tab. For information on [Fax/ Internet Fax], refer to "2 Sided Scanning (Transmitting 2-sided Originals)" (P.152).

Original Size (Specifying the Scan Size for the Original)


This feature allows you to set the scan size for fax transmission. The machine scans the document at the size you specify, regardless of the original size. You can add margins, or delete unwanted margins using this feature.
The default values for buttons other than the [Auto Size Detect] button can be changed in the System Administration mode. For information on how to change the default values, refer to "5 Tools" > "Fax Service Settings" > "Original Size Defaults" in the Administrator Guide.

1 2

Select [Original Size] on the [Layout Adjustment] screen. Select the desired scan size.

Auto Detect Detects the document size automatically. Document Feeder Auto-detectable Document size
B5 , B4, A5 , A4, A4 , A3, 8.5 x 11"

Document Glass
B6, B5, B5 , B4, A6, A5, A5 , A4, A4 , A3, 8.5 x 11"

155

4 Fax

Note

When a document size cannot be detected automatically, a message appears prompting you to enter the document size.

Sizes that can be detected automatically vary depending on the settings made on "Paper Size Settings" in the System Administration mode. For information on the document sizes that can be automatically detected, refer to "5 Tools" > "Common Service Settings" > "Other Settings" > "Paper Size Settings" in the Administrator Guide.

Standard Size Select the original size from preset sizes.


You can change the default options. For more information, refer to "5 Tools" > "Fax Service Settings" > "Original Size Defaults" in the Administrator Guide.

Mixed Sized Originals (Scanning Different Size Documents Simultaneously)


When using the document feeder, you can simultaneously send different size documents with the sizes matching the respective sizes of the documents. You can also specify the size of the paper so that faxes are sent at the same paper size.
Fax
Important Always load the A5-size documents in portrait orientation. When loading B5 documents together with A3 documents loaded in landscape orientation or A4 documents loaded in portrait orientation, load B5 the documents in portrait orientation. Originals may not be scanned correctly if the top-left corners are not aligned properly. The recommended document size combinations are A4 portrait and A3 landscape, or B5 portrait and B4 landscape. If the combination of the document sizes is not our recommendation, the documents can be fed at an angle and may not be scanned properly. Note This feature does not appear for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more information, contact our Customer Support Center. Be sure to set [Original Size] on the [Layout Adjustment] screen to [Auto Size Detect], when using mixed sized documents.

1 2

Select [Original Size] on the [Layout Adjustment] screen. Confirm that [Auto Detect] is selected and select [Save]. If [Auto Detect] is not set, select [Auto Detect], and then select [Save].

3 4

Select [Mixed Sized Originals]. Select [On].

Off Select this item when all documents are of the same size. On When scanning documents of different sizes, the machine automatically detects the size of each document.

156

Layout Adjustment

Book Faxing (Scanning Facing Pages onto Separate Sheets)


You can scan the left and right pages of a bound document separately to fax them. This feature is useful if you need to make separate scans for facing pages of bound originals such as a booklet.
Note The document feeder does not support this feature. A non-standard sized document may not be properly divided into two separate pages.

1 2

Select [Book Faxing]. Select any item. Off Does not scan as a bound document. Left Page then Right Scans the left page and then the right page of facing pages. Right Page then Left Scans the right page and then the left page of facing pages. Top Page then Bottom Scans the top page and then the bottom page of facing pages. Both Pages Scans in page order. Left Page Only Scans the left page only. You can select this item when [Left Page then Right] or [Right Page then Left] is selected. Right Page Only Scans the right page only. You can select this item when [Left Page then Right] or [Right Page then Left] is selected. Top Page Only Scans the top page only. You can select this item when [Top Page then Bottom] is selected. Bottom Page Only Scans the bottom page only. You can select this item when [Top Page then Bottom] is selected.
Fax

157

4 Fax

Reduce/Enlarge (Specifying a Scan Ratio)


This feature enlarges or reduces scanned images with a specified ratio.
Important Some destination machines may not be able to receive faxes at the specified ratio.

1 2

Select [Reduce/Enlarge]. Select a preset ratio, or specify a value.


Note If a magnification is specified in [Reduce/ Enlarge], automatic rotation transmission does not work.

Copy ratio entry box Touch the box displaying a value, and then use the numeric keypad or the @ ] and [ ] [ buttons to specify a ratio within the range of 50 - 400% in 1% increments. 100%
Fax

Scans at the same size as the original. Auto % If the scan width of the document is greater than the maximum image size, the scanned image is rotated or reduced to fit the maximum size. When speed dialing is used, the maximum image size will be the size registered in Address Number. When speed dialing is not used, the maximum size will be A3.
You can specify whether to rotate documents in the System Settings. For more information, refer to "5 Tools" > "Fax Service Settings" > "Fax Control" > "Rotate 90 degrees" in the Administrator Guide.

Copy ratio Select from preset copy ratios.


You can change the default values of reduce/enlarge scan ratios other than "100%" and "Auto %". For information, refer to "5 Tools" > "Fax Service Settings" > "Reduce/Enlarge Presets" in the Administrator Guide.

158

Fax/Internet Fax Options

Fax/Internet Fax Options


You can specify fax transmission conditions in the [Fax/Internet Fax Options] screen. The following shows the reference section for each feature.
Acknowledgement Report (Confirming Transmission Results) .............................................. 159 Starting Rate (Selecting a Communication Mode) .................................................................. 161 Priority Send / Delay Start (Specifying Send Priority/Send Time).......................................... 162 Transmission Header Text (Adding Sender Name and Phone Number to Faxes)................... 163 Cover Page (Transmitting Documents With a Cover Page) .................................................... 164 Internet Fax Subject (Specifying the Internet Fax Subject) ..................................................... 166 Internet Fax Message (Editing the Internet Fax Mail Contents) .............................................. 166 Recipient Print Sets (Printing Multiple Sets at the Destination Machine)............................... 167 Multiple-Up (Combining Multiple Pages into One Sheet) ...................................................... 168 Remote Mailbox (Using Remote Mailbox).............................................................................. 168 F Code (Using F Code Transmission)...................................................................................... 170 Internet Fax Profile (Specifying Internet Fax Profiles)............................................................ 172

Fax

Encryption (Sending Internet Fax Encrypted by S/MIME) ..................................................... 173 Digital Signature (Sending iFax with a Digital Signature by S/MIME) .................................. 174

1 2

Select [Fax/Internet Fax] on the [All Services] screen. Select the [Fax/Internet Fax Options] tab, and then select a feature on the [Fax/ Internet Fax Options] screen.
Note Only [Delay Start] is available for the Server Fax feature.

Acknowledgement Report (Confirming Transmission Results)


You can check fax and Internet Fax transmission results. To receive fax transmission results, set [Confirmation Options] to [Print Report] under [Acknowledgement Report]. By enabling this feature, the machine automatically prints a transmission report when fax transmission completes successfully, and prints a transmission report (undelivered) when fax transmission ends unsuccessfully. To receive Internet Fax transmission results, select [Read Receipts]. There are two types of [Read Receipts]: [Read Receipts] and [Delivery Receipts]. Each has different items that you can confirm. When selecting [Read Receipts], you can check whether or not the Internet Fax you sent was delivered to the recipients mailbox successfully. When selecting [Delivery Receipts], you can check whether or not the Internet Fax you sent was correctly delivered and the attached files were correctly processed.
Note The optional package is necessary to use the Read Receipts feature. For information, contact our Customer Support Center. The Read Receipts feature can be used when the recipients machine supports MDN. The Delivery Receipts feature can be used when the recipients machine supports DSN. You can select either [Read Receipts] or [Delivery Receipts] in the System Settings. Refer to "5 Tools" > "Fax Service Settings" > "Fax Defaults" > "Delivery Receipts/Read Receipts" in the Administrator Guide.

159

4 Fax

You can only use the Delivery Receipts (DSN) feature to check the delivery of e-mail to servers that support this feature. Furthermore, if any of the e-mail servers on the transmission route do not support DSN, you cannot confirm the delivery of the e-mail, even if the e-mail has been delivered successfully. For this reason, the result of the Delivery Receipts may differ from the actual delivery status. If [Confirmation Options] is set to [Print Report] and the transmission completes unsuccessfully, [Transmission Report - Job Undelivered] will be printed.

This section describes how to use the MDN feature. The procedure is the same for the DSN feature.

1 2

Select [Acknowledgement Report]. Select any item. Confirmation Options No report No Transmission Report is printed. Print Report A Transmission Report is automatically printed when the transmission completes successfully. If the transmission does not end successfully, a "Transmission Report Job Undelivered" is printed. Read Receipts Off The Read Receipts feature is not activated. On The Read Receipts feature is activated. You can check whether the Internet Fax you sent was delivered to the recipient's mailbox successfully.

Fax

160

Fax/Internet Fax Options

Starting Rate (Selecting a Communication Mode)


You can select a communication mode based on the features of the remote machine. G3 is the international standard for facsimile transmissions established by the ITU-T.
Important When the speed dialing, one touch buttons, group dial numbers, or address book is used to specify a recipient registered in an address number, the communications mode currently set to the address number is set and cannot be changed. For information on how to register address numbers, refer to "5 Tools" > "Setup" > "Add Address Book Entry" in the Administrator Guide. Note The default communication mode can be changed in the System Administration mode. For information on how to change the default mode, refer to "5 Tools" > "Fax Service Settings" > "Fax Defaults" > "Starting Rate" in the Administrator Guide.

1 2

Select [Starting Rate] on the [Fax/Internet Fax Options] screen. Set the communication mode. G3 Auto Select this mode if the remote machine is G3 compatible. This mode is the one normally selected. In accordance with the reception capabilities of the remote machine, the machine automatically switches modes in the following order: G3 Unique ECM ITU-T G3 ECM ITU-T G3. Forced 4800 bps Select this mode when transmitting over noisy or poor telephone lines, as can be the case with overseas calls. Also select this mode when transmitting over noisy or poor telephone lines domestically. G4 Auto Do not use this mode.
Note [G4 Auto] is displayed on when Internet Fax Kit is installed. This setting applies the transmission speed between the fax gateway and destination fax for the Internet Fax.

Fax

4
G3 Unique

About Forced 4800 bps


You can communicate with faxes overseas via telephone company exchanges, etc.
Note The international telephone networks are originally designed for voice communications. Noise that does not really affect voice communications causes a problem with fax communications. It may result in the deterioration of images quality, the inability to transmit a fax, or even terminate the transmission. Regardless of whether transmission is successful, you are charged for the call once the line is connected. For information on line trouble and call charges, contact your telephone company. If you select [F4800], the transmission time may be longer because transmission is performed at 4800 bps or less to ensure transmission is successful.

161

4 Fax

1 2

Select [Communication Mode] on the [Fax/ Internet Fax Options] screen. Select [F4800], then [Save].

Enter the telephone company ID number, "0011", country code, area code, and recipient fax number as shown below.

Important In some areas, you may need to enter a pause after the telephone company ID number.

Fax

Priority Send / Delay Start (Specifying Send Priority/Send Time)


Priority Send allows you to give priority to a fax or polling job over other jobs. Delay Start allows you to specify when to send your fax. This feature is useful for sending fax when communication charges are low, such as during night time.
Note This feature is unavailable for Internet Fax and Server Fax. [Priority Send] can be set in combination with [Delay Start]. If both features are set, Priority Send is performed at the set time.

1 2

Select [Priority Send / Delay Start]. Select any item. Priority Send Off Priority Send is not applied. On Priority Send is applied.
Note If the Priority Send feature is selected during transmission, the fax will be sent after the current transmission ends. In redial mode, the fax will be resent preferentially after the set redial interval. The Priority Send feature cannot be set separately for each recipient of Broadcast and multipolling jobs.

You can give priority to a pending job. For more information, refer to "Job Status" (P.289).

Delay Start Off Delay Start is not applied. Specific Time Delay Start is applied.

162

Fax/Internet Fax Options

Important If a power failure occurs or if the power is turned off after the Delay Start feature is set, the setting is cleared and transmission begins as soon as the power is turned on. Note You can specify a time within 24 hours in 1 minute increments. You cannot specify a date. You can set [Delay Start] separately for each address number. For information on how to register address numbers, refer to "5 Tools" > "Setup" > "Add Address Book Entry" in the Administrator Guide. If address numbers or group dial numbers are used for the Broadcast Send feature, the Delay Start setting specified for each address number is invalid. If the fax cannot be sent at the specified time because, for example, the telephone line is busy, it will be sent as soon as the line becomes available.

Specific Time Displays the [Delay Start - Specific Time] screen.


Refer to "[Delay Start - Specific Time] Screen" (P.163).

[Delay Start - Specific Time] Screen


Allows you to specify the start time.
Note The default value of [Start Time] can be changed in the System Administration mode. For more information, refer to "5 Tools" > "Fax Service Settings" > "Fax Defaults" > "Delay Start - Specific Time" in the Administrator Guide.

Fax

1 2

Select [AM] or [PM]. Enter [Hours] and [Minutes].


Important If you press the <Start> button after the specified time, the stored document will be sent at the specified time on the following day.

Transmission Header Text (Adding Sender Name and Phone Number to Faxes)
The Transmission Header Text feature adds the start time, sender name, recipient name, G3 ID, and number of pages onto the transmitted document. This feature enables the recipient to confirm when and from whom the fax was sent.
Important The Transmission Header Text is printed at the top of the document, so an area of about 3 to 5 mm may not be printed at the top of each page at the remote machine. Note If the document is resent, "Resend" is printed at the left of the date and time indication. If this feature is enabled for Broadcast transmission, header information is attached to faxes for all the recipients. The start time is printed in the format set on the machine (12 or 24 hour clock). For information on setting the time, refer to "5 Tools" > "Common Service Settings" > "Machine Clock/Timers" in the Administrator Guide. The recipient name is only added if it has been registered in the address number.

For information on the sender name and G3 ID, refer to "5 Tools" > "Fax Service Settings" > "Local Terminal Information" in the Administrator Guide. The default value of [Transmission Header Text] can be changed in the System Administration mode. For information on how to change the default values, refer to "5 Tools" > "Fax Service Settings" > "Fax Defaults" > "Transmission Header Text" in the Administrator Guide.

163

4 Fax

1 2

Select [Transmission Header Text]. Select [On].

Off No sender information is added. Display Header Sender information is added.

Cover Page (Transmitting Documents With a Cover Page)


Cover Note is a feature for attaching a cover page to the document. It includes the recipient name, comment, sender name, machine fax number, number of pages, and send date and time.
[Cover Note] can be individually set for each address number. For information on how to register address numbers, refer to "5 Tools" > "Setup" > "Add Address Book Entry" in the Administrator Guide.
Note This feature is not available for the Server Fax feature. When [Transmission Header Text] is set, the sender information is not printed on the cover note. You cannot use the Cover Note feature for Broadcast transmission using the numeric keypad. To use this Cover Note feature for Broadcast transmission, register recipients to address numbers. The size and resolution of the cover note is based on the first page of the document.

Fax

1 2

Select [Cover Page] on the [Fax/Internet Fax Options] screen. Select [On].

Off No cover note is added. Print Cover Page A cover note is added. Recipient's Comment The [Cover Page - Recipient's Comment] screen is displayed.
Refer to "[Cover Page - Recipient's Comment] Screen" (P.165).

Sender's Comment The [Cover Page - Sender's Comment] screen is displayed.


Refer to "[Cover Page - Sender's Comment] Screen" (P.165).

164

Fax/Internet Fax Options

[Cover Page - Recipient's Comment] Screen


Select a comment to be added to the recipient field.

Select any item.

None No comment is added to the recipient field. Comment A comment is added to the recipient field. Select a comment from [Select Comment]. Select Comment The registered comments are displayed.
For information on how to register comments, refer to "5 Tools" > "Setup" > "Add Fax Comment" in the Administrator Guide.

Fax

[Cover Page - Sender's Comment] Screen


Select a comment to be added to the sender field.

Select any item.

None No comment is added to the sender field. Comment A comment is added to the sender field. Select a comment from the registered comments. Select Comment The registered comments are displayed.
For information on how to register comments, refer to "5 Tools" > "Setup" > "Add Fax Comment" in the Administrator Guide.

About the Cover Page


To When an address number is used, the recipient name registered for the address number is printed. This field is blank if no recipient name is registered for the address number. Recipient's Comment Prints the comment selected on the [Cover Page - Recipients Comment] screen.

165

4 Fax

From Prints the registered sender name. Sender's Comment Prints the comment selected on the [Cover Page - Senders Comment] screen. Fax Number Prints the fax number of the machine. For G3 communications, "G3 ID" is printed. Number of Pages Prints the number of pages. Send Date and Time Prints the transmission date and time. Remarks Prints remarks when the document is sent using Broadcast, Mailbox, Relay Broadcast, or Redial Mode.
Fax

Internet Fax Subject (Specifying the Internet Fax Subject)


You can specify an Internet Fax subject. If no subject is specified, the preset subject will be automatically entered.
Note This feature is not available for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more information, contact our Customer Support Center.

1 2 3

Select [Internet Fax Subject]. Select [Keyboard]. Enter a subject using the keyboard displayed. Up to 128 characters can be entered.
For information on how to enter characters, refer to "Entering Text" (P.53).
Note If no subject is entered, the following will be automatically entered as a subject: [InternetFAX:<From> : <Send Date and Time>].

Internet Fax Message (Editing the Internet Fax Mail Contents)


You can edit Internet Fax comments. Enter text using the keyboard or use a preregistered comment.
Note This feature may not be available for some models. The optional package is necessary. For more information, contact our Customer Support Center.

For information on how to register comments, refer to "5 Tools" > "Setup" > "Add Fax Comment" in the Administrator Guide.

166

Fax/Internet Fax Options

1 2

Select [Internet Fax Message]. Select any item.

Delete Text Deletes the comment displayed on the screen. Keyboard Allows you to enter body text using the keyboard. Up to 256 characters can be entered. You can also click [Add Comment] to select a registered comment and edit it.
For information on how to enter the characters, refer to "Entering Text" (P.53).

Add Comment Allows you to insert a registered comment. Click this button to display the [Internet Fax Comment (Mail Contents) - Add Comment] screen.
For information, refer to "[Add Comment] Screen" (P.167)

Fax

[Add Comment] Screen


Select a comment to be added.

Select any item. Select Comment The registered comments are displayed.
For information on how to register comments, refer to "5 Tools" > "Setup" > "Add Fax Comment" in the Administrator Guide.

Recipient Print Sets (Printing Multiple Sets at the Destination Machine)


This feature allows you to print multiple sets of a fax document at the destination machine.
Note This feature is not available for Server Fax.

1 2

Select [Recipient Print Sets] on the [Fax/ Internet Fax Options] screen. Select any item.

1 Set The destination machine will output one set of the fax document. Multiple Sets Allows you to specify the number of print sets within the range from 2 to 99 in increments of 1. Use [ ] and [ ] or the numeric keypad on the screen to specify the number of print sets.

167

4 Fax

Multiple-Up (Combining Multiple Pages into One Sheet)


This feature allows you to print multiple pages of a document onto one side of a single sheet of paper. For example, if you have a document of 12 pages, and you select [3 Pages Up], the machine combines the scan data into 4 pages. You can specify a multiple-up value in the range of 2 to 9.
Important If the length of each resultant page is too long, the output data may be split on the recipient machine. If number of pages of documents is smaller than the specified pages, scanned number of pages will be only combined and transmitted. Note This feature is not available for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more information, contact our Customer Support Center.

1 2

Select [Multiple-Up]. Select [On].

Off Multiple-Up is not applied. On Multiple-Up is applied. Specify the number of pages in [Originals]. Use [ enter the number of pages. ] and [ ] to

Fax

Remote Mailbox (Using Remote Mailbox)


Remote Mailbox is a feature for sending or receiving confidential documents that you do not want others to see.
Note This feature is not available for Server Fax.

Sending to Mailbox (Fax Signal Method) This feature allows you to send a document directly to a mailbox on the destination machine. The document can be printed on the destination machine. To use this feature, you need the mailbox number and passcode of the destination mailbox. Private Polling (Fax Signal Method) This feature allows you to retrieve a document from a mailbox on a remote machine by sending a polling request from your machine. To use this feature, you need the mailbox number and passcode of the remote mailbox. The retrieved document is stored in a mailbox on the machine. When a document is received in a mailbox, the <Job in Memory> indicator lights and a [Mailbox Report] is printed. The [Mailbox Report] includes the mailbox number and name.
Important You cannot use polling to retrieve documents from multiple remote mailboxes simultaneously. Note The DTMF method is available for this feature. The supported signals are numerals, *, and #.

For information on printing received documents, refer to "Checking Document Details" (P.247)". Documents received in mailboxes can be automatically printed. For information on the mailbox settings, refer to "Configuring/Starting Job Flow" (P.251). Depending on the report print settings, a Mailbox Report may not be printed after a document is received in a mailbox. For information on the report print settings, refer to "5 Tools" > "Common Service Settings" > "Reports" > "Mailbox Report" in the Administrator Guide.

168

Fax/Internet Fax Options

Sending to Mailbox (DTMF Method) To send a fax to a mailbox using the DTMF method, you need the mailbox number of the destination mailbox. Two DTMF methods are available: Auto and Manual.

Sending to Mailbox (Fax Signal Method)

1 2

Select [Remote Mailbox] on the [Fax/Internet Fax Options] screen. Select [On]. Off Disables the Remote Mailbox feature. On Enables the Remote Mailbox feature. Enter a mailbox number into [Remote Mailbox Number].
Fax

Remote Mailbox Number Enter a 3-digit mailbox number using the numeric keypad. Mailbox Passcode Enter the 4-digit passcode of the remote mailbox using the numeric keypad. If a passcode has not been set, leave this box blank.

Private Polling (Fax Signal Method)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Select [More Options] tab to display the [More Options] screen. Select [Remote Polling]. Select [Poll a Remote Device]. Select [Save]. Select the [Fax/Internet Fax Options] tab to display the [Fax/Internet Fax Options] screen. Select [Remote Mailbox]. Select [On].

Off Disables the Private Polling feature. On Enables the Private Polling feature. Enter a mailbox number into [Remote Mailbox Number]. Remote Mailbox Number Enter a 3-digit mailbox number using the numeric keypad.

169

4 Fax

Mailbox Passcode Enter the 4-digit passcode of the remote mailbox using the numeric keypad. If a passcode has not been set, leave this box blank.

Format for Auto Send (DTMF Method)

Select [Keyboard] to display a keyboard on the touch screen, and enter the destination and passcode in the following format.
Mailbox number on remote machine Passcode of mailbox on remote machine

Format for Manual Send (DTMF Method)

Select the [On-hook (Manual Send/Receive)] button on the [More Options] screen to display a keyboard on the touch screen, and enter the destination and passcode in the following format.

Fax

4
Note

Mailbox number on remote machine

Passcode of mailbox on remote machine

Use the keyboard on the touch screen to enter symbols such as "!" and "". For information on how to enter characters, "Entering Text" (P.53). Enter a passcode only if necessary. You can specify any machine that supports our DTMF method feature.

By registering destinations into address numbers using the above dialing formats, you can use the address numbers for the Private Polling feature. For information on how to register address numbers, refer to "5 Tools" > "Setup" > "Add Address Book Entry" in the Administrator Guide.

F Code (Using F Code Transmission)


F Code is the transmission procedure set by the Communications and Information Network Association of Japan and is the T.30 (communication protocol) method for using sub-addresses that was standardized by the ITU-T. The F Code feature enables various features to be used with transmission among F Code-compatible machines manufactured by different companies. When using F Code transmission, use an F Code and password. The F Code, which is also called a sub-address by other companies, must be registered (entered). Set the password if necessary.
Note This feature is not available for Server Fax except when an F code is included in a dialing number. To use the F Code feature, you need to confirm the F Code of the recipients machine in advance.

You can set the F Code and password for each address number. For information on how to register address numbers, refer to "Configuring/Starting Job Flow" (P.251). You can use Relay Broadcast/Remote Relay Broadcast with F Code transmission. For information on Relay Broadcast, refer to "Relay Broadcast (Transmitting Documents Through a Relay Station)" (P.180).

You can use the following features with F Code transmission.

170

Fax/Internet Fax Options

Sending to Mailbox (F Code Method) When a mailbox is set on a remote machine, you can send a document directly to the mailbox by specifying the F code (sub-address) and password (if set up) of the mailbox. Obtain the F Code (sub-address) and password of the destination mailbox in advance. Example of specifying a destination: F Code (sub-address) Password (if necessary) : 0 (to designate an F Code transmission) and the mailbox number of a mailbox on the remote machine : The password of the mailbox

Private Polling (F Code Method) When a mailbox is set on a remote machine, you can perform private polling for the mailbox by specifying its F code (sub-address) and password (if set up). If you use your machine to perform private polling for a mailbox on a remote machine, obtain the F Code (sub-address) and password of the target mailbox. If you use a remote machine to perform private polling for a mailbox on your machine, give the following information. F Code (sub-address) Password (if necessary)
Note

: 0 (to designate an F Code transmission) and the mailbox number of the target mailbox : The password of the target mailbox

Fax

Mailbox reception using the DTMF method is possible, but the only signals that can be received are numerals, , and #.

It may be possible to automatically print a document received in the mailbox depending on the mailbox settings. For information about setting the mailbox, refer to "Configuring/Starting Job Flow" (P.251). Depending on the report print settings, the [Mailbox Report] may not be printed even if e-mail is received in the mailbox. For information on setting the report print settings, refer to "5 Tools" > "Common Service Settings" > "Reports" > "Mailbox Report" in the Administrator Guide. For information on printing received documents, refer to "Printing Documents in a Mailbox" (P.248).

Sending to Mailbox (F Code Method)

1 2 3

Select [F Code] on the [Fax/Internet Fax Options] screen. Select [On]. Select [F Code], and then enter an F code using numeric keys.
Note You can enter up to 20 digits for the F code.

If required, select [Password], and then enter a password using numeric keys.
Note You can enter up to 20 digits for the password.

Off The F code transmission is not used. On The F code transmission is used. Enter the F Code. F Code Enter the F code using the numeric keypad.
Note You can enter up to 20 digits for the F Code.

171

4 Fax

Password Enter the password using the numeric keypad. If a password has not been set, leave this box blank.
Note You can enter up to 20 digits for the password.

Private Polling (F Code Method)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Select the [More Options] tab to display the [More Options] screen. Select [Remote Polling]. Select [Poll a Remote Device]. Select [Save]. Select the [Fax/Internet Fax Options] tab to display the [Fax/Internet Fax Options] screen. Select [F Code]. Select [On]. Select [F Code], and then enter the F Code using the numeric keypad.
Note You can enter up to 20 digits for the F Code.

Fax

If necessary, select [Password], and then enter a password using the numeric keypad.
Note You can enter up to 20 digits for the password.

Off Private Polling is not used. Poll a Remote Device Private Polling is used.

Internet Fax Profile (Specifying Internet Fax Profiles)


A profile is specified to restrict attribute information such as image resolution and paper size for transmissions between Internet Fax-compatible machines.
Note This feature is not available for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more information, contact our Customer Support Center. The profiles that can be processed differ depending on the Internet Fax-compatible machine of the recipient. Before specifying a profile, confirm the profiles the Internet Fax-compatible machine of the recipient can process. If inconsistency occurs between a profile, and stored document size and resolution, priority is given to the settings specified in the profile. If the profile differs for each recipient when using Broadcast Send, the smallest size becomes the maximum image size.

You can set an Internet Fax profile for each address number. For information on how to register address numbers, refer to "5 Tools" > "Setup" > "Add Address Book Entry" in the Administrator Guide.

172

Fax/Internet Fax Options

The default values of [Internet Fax Profile] can be changed in the System Administration mode. For information on how to change the default values, refer to "5 Tools" > "Fax Service Settings" > "Fax Defaults" > "Internet Fax Profile" in the Administrator Guide.

1 2

Select [Internet Fax Profile]. Select the profile.

TIFF-S This profile is the Internet Fax standard. For documents that are larger than A4, the size is reduced automatically to A4 for transmission. Encoding method Resolution TIFF-F Select this profile when you specify super-fine for the resolution or when you send A3 or B4 documents. Encoding method Resolution
Note

: :

MH A4 Standard, Fine
Fax

Stored Document Size :

: MMR : Standard, Fine, Superfine (400 dpi), Superfine (600 dpi)

Stored Document Size : A4, B4, A3


When a fax is sent to a machine that does not support TIFF-F, the recipient machine will not be able to display or print the images.

TIFF-J Select this profile for sending documents in JBIG. Encoding method Resolution
Note

: JBIG : Standard, Fine, Superfine (400 dpi), Superfine (600 dpi)

Stored Document Size : A4, B4, A3


When a fax is sent to a machine that does not support TIFF-J, the recipient machine will not be able to display or print the images.

Encryption (Sending Internet Fax Encrypted by S/MIME)


You can send Internet Fax encrypted by S/MIME. When sending encrypted Internet Fax, select a recipient with a certificate that can be encrypted from Address Book.
Note This feature is supported only by the ApeosPort series.

Off Sends Internet Fax without encryption. On Sends encrypted Internet Fax.

173

4 Fax

Digital Signature (Sending iFax with a Digital Signature by S/MIME)


You can send Internet Fax with a digital signature by S/MIME. Digital Signature allows a recipient to confirm whether the contents of the Internet Fax are changed, or whether the Internet Fax is sent from the proper sender. To use this feature, the machine's mail address must be linked to a certificate.
Note This feature is supported only by the ApeosPort series.

For information on how to link a certificate to the machines e-mail address, refer to "12 Encryption and Digital Signature Settings" > "Configuration of E-mail Encryption/Digital Signature" > "Step 1 Configuration on the Machine" in the Administrator Guide.

Off Sends iFax without a digital signature. On Sends iFax with a digital signature.
Fax

174

More Options

More Options
You can set the polling and on-hook features in the [More Options] screen. The following shows the reference section for each feature.
Remote Polling (Retrieving Documents from Remote Machines) .......................................... 175 Store for Polling (Allowing Remote Machines to Retrieve Documents from Your Machine) 177 On-hook (Confirming Remote Machine Response Prior to Transmission)............................. 178

1 2

Select [Fax/Internet Fax] on the [All Services] screen. Select the [More Options] tab, and then select a feature on the [More Options] screen.

Fax

Remote Polling (Retrieving Documents from Remote Machines)


Remote Polling is a feature that allows your machine to retrieve a document stored in a remote machine. You are charged for the transmission fee. This feature is used for Facsimile Information Services.
For information on Facsimile Information Services, refer to "Receiving Faxes" (P.189).
Note Depending on the remote machine, the Polling feature may be unavailable. This feature is not available for Server Fax. When you specify polling in combination with [Delay Start] on the [Fax/Internet Fax Options] screen, you can retrieve a document at a specified time.

Remote Polling You can retrieve a document stored on a remote machine by sending a poling request from your machine. You can also retrieve documents from multiple machines. This is known as Multi-Polling. Private Polling (DTMF Method) You can retrieve a document from a mailbox on a remote machine by sending a request from your machine. A mailbox must be created on the remote machine. If the mailbox is passcode-protected, you can retrieve a document confidentially.
Important You cannot use polling to retrieve documents from multiple remote mailboxes simultaneously.

175

4 Fax

Remote Polling

1 2

Select [Remote Polling] on the [More Options] screen. Select [Poll a Remote Device].
Note To use Multi-Polling, specify multiple recipients.

Off Disables the Polling feature. Poll a Remote Device Enables the Polling feature.

Private Polling (DTMF Method)

1
Fax

Select [New Recipients] on the [Fax/Internet Fax] screen to display the keyboard on the touch screen. Enter a format corresponding to Auto Send or Manual Send, and then select [Save]. Select the [More Options] screen to display the [More Options] screen. Select [Remote Polling]. Select [Poll a Remote Device]. Select [Save].

2 3 4 5 6

Off Disables the Private Polling feature. Poll a Remote Device Enables the Private Poling feature. Format for Auto Send

Mailbox number on remote machine

Passcode of mailbox on remote machine

Format for Manual Send

Mailbox number on remote machine

Passcode of mailbox on remote machine

Note

Use the keyboard on the touch screen to enter symbols such as "!" and "". For information on how to enter characters, refer to "Entering Text" (P.53).

176

More Options

Enter a passcode only if necessary. You can specify any machine that supports our DTMF method feature.

By registering destinations into address numbers using the above dialing formats, you can use the address numbers for the Private Polling feature. For information on how to register address numbers, refer to "5 Tools" > "Setup" > "Add Address Book Entry" in the Administrator Guide.

Store for Polling (Allowing Remote Machines to Retrieve Documents from Your Machine)
Store for Polling is to store a document on your machine so as a remote machine can retrieve it from your machine. There are two methods of Store for Polling: Store for Free Polling and Store for Secure Polling.
The machine can be set to automatically delete documents after they are retrieved with polling. For more information, refer to "5 Tools" > "Fax Service Settings" > "Fax Control" > "Polled Documents - Auto Delete" in the Administrator Guide.
Note This feature is not available for Server Fax.

1 2

Select [Store for Polling] on the [More Options] screen. Select any item.

Fax

Off Disables this feature. Store for Free Polling Stores the document into the public mailbox on the machine. The document in the public mailbox can be retrieved by a remote machine. Store for Secure Polling Stores the document into a private mailbox on the machine. If the mailbox is passcodeprotected, the document can be retrieved by a remote machine confidentially.
A private mailbox must be created on the machine. For more information on registering a mailbox, refer to "5 Tools" > "Setup" > "Create Mailbox" in the Administrator Guide.

Save in: When selecting [Store for Free Polling] The [Public Mailbox] button is displayed. When the button is selected, the [Public Mailbox] screen appears.
For more information, refer to "[Public Mailbox] Screen" (P.178).

When selecting [Store for Secure Polling] The [Private Mailbox] button is displayed. When the button is selected, the [Mailbox] screen appears. Select a mailbox to store documents.
For information on how to select a mailbox, refer to "Selecting a Mailbox" (P.244). For information on how to check and print/delete documents for Private Polling, refer to "Checking/Operating Documents in a Mailbox" (P.245).

177

4 Fax

[Public Mailbox] Screen


You can print and delete documents stored for polling.

Select the document to print or delete. You can select either one document or all documents.
Note Select [ ] to return to the previous screen or [ ] to move to the next screen.

Refresh Refreshes the information about documents stored in the public mailbox. Select All Selects all documents stored in the public mailbox. Delete Deletes the selected document. Selecting this button displays a confirmation screen. Select [Yes] on the screen to delete the document. Print Prints the selected document.
Fax

On-hook (Confirming Remote Machine Response Prior to Transmission)


Use this feature when using Manual Send. Manual Send is the transmission method that allows you to send a fax after you make a phone call to a destination machine and then check that the connection is established. This feature can be used with the receiver (optional) either off-hook or onhook. It is recommended that you set the line monitor volume to "Loud".
Note If an error occurs during transmission of, for example, the second page, the transmission of the first page may also end abnormally.

The volume of the line monitor can be changed in the System Administration mode. For information on how to change the volume, refer to "5 Tools" > "Common Service Settings" > "Audio Tones" > "Line Monitor Volume" in the Administrator Guide.

Lift the receiver, or select [On-hook (Manual Send/Receive)] on the [More Options] screen.

178

More Options

Select any item.

Manual Receive/Manual Send Use the drop-down menu to switch between [Manual Receive] and [Manual Send]. Manual Send: Allows you to check if connection is established before sending a fax. Manual Receive: Allows you to receive a fax manually, such as Facsimile Information Services. Alphanumeric character buttons Displays alphanumeric characters. Use alphanumeric characters to specify a destination.
Note Touch-tone dialing may not be available depending on the services provided. When the dial type is Tone, the [Tone (:)] button is not displayed on the screen. When the dial type is Pulse, select [Tone (:)] if you want to use touch-tone dialing.

Fax

More Characters Selecting this button displays a symbol screen, allowing you to use symbols to specify a destination. Exit (Line Cut) Cuts the line connected.

179

4 Fax

Broadcast
This section describes setting Broadcast Send and Relay Broadcast.
Broadcast Send (Transmitting to Multiple Recipients).............................................................180 Relay Broadcast (Transmitting Documents Through a Relay Station).....................................180 Remote Relay Broadcast (Performing Relay Broadcast to Remote Locations) .......................184

Broadcast Send (Transmitting to Multiple Recipients)


The Broadcast Send feature allows you to transmit the same document to multiple recipients with a single operation. There is no need to repeat the same operation for each recipient. When an Additional G3 Port Kit (optional) is installed, you can use the extra lines to make multiple transmissions simultaneously with Broadcast Send. If you specify Broadcast Send, the machine prints a relay broadcast report/multi-poll report after the Broadcast Send operation finishes.
Fax
Note

The maximum number of recipients that you can specify at one time is as follows: Using the numeric keypad: 200 locations; using address numbers: 500 locations; and using the numeric keypad in combination with address numbers: 699 locations. When an Address Book Extension Kit (optional) is installed, the maximum number of recipients that you can specify at one time is as follows: Using address numbers: 999 locations; and using the numeric keypad in combination with address numbers: 1198 locations. One touch buttons are associated with address numbers 001 to 070. When using Broadcast Send, the Cover Page and Remote Mailbox features are not available even if they are enabled on the control panel. If you want to use [Cover Page] and [Remote Mailbox], set them when registering each recipient in an address number. The transmission report feature is not available. Check Broadcast/Multi-poll reports to see transmission results.

1 2 3 4 5 6

Select the first recipient. Select [+ Add]. Select the next recipient. Repeat Step 3 and Step 4. Press the <Start> button. Select [Yes] on the confirmation screen to start transmission.

Relay Broadcast (Transmitting Documents Through a Relay Station)


The Relay Broadcast feature transmits documents to multiple recipients via other fax machines (relay stations). When a document is to be transmitted over a long distance to multiple recipients, it is first transmitted to one relay station and from there to multiple recipients. When you transmit documents over a long distance to many recipients, using Relay Broadcast can save on call charges. Furthermore, multiple Relay Broadcast operations can be performed simultaneously. This is referred to as Multiple Relay Broadcast. There are three Relay Broadcast methods.

180

Broadcast

Fax Signal Method This method employs a Fuji Xerox proprietary communication procedure that is only for use with specific machines that have the Relay Broadcast feature. The G3 mode is available. DTMF Method G3 fax machines that support Manual Send can make Relay Broadcast for the machine. F Code Method This method can be used among machines that have the F Code and the Relay Broadcast features. The G3 is available.

Before using the Relay Broadcast Feature


Before using the Relay Broadcast feature, register the following information in the address numbers of initiating stations and relay stations.
For information on how to register address numbers, refer to "5 Tools" > "Setup" > "Add Address Book Entry" in the Administrator Guide.

Fax

Where
Initiating Station

Contents
Fax Signal Method Assign the relay station to an address number (001 to 500*) to set up the Relay Broadcast feature. Register the last two digits of the address number of the initiating station (which is already registered at a relay station) as a relay station ID for the Relay Broadcast operation. Register the address numbers or group dial number of the relay recipients (which are registered at a relay station) as broadcast recipients. The wildcard "" can be used. DTMF Method (G3)/F Code Method No registration is required. The dialing format can be registered to an address number. Fax Signal Method Assign the initiating station to an address number from 001 to 099 and set Relay Station Setup of the address number to [On]. Assign the relay recipient to an address number from 001 to 099. The relay recipients can also be assigned group dial numbers from the initiating station. DTMF Method (G3)/F Code Method Assign the initiating station either to an address number from 001 to 500* (when the specification method for the initiating station is 3 digits in F Code) or to 001 to 099 (when the specification method for the initiating station is 2 digits in F Code). Then, set Relay Station Setup of the address number to [On]. Assign the relay recipients to an address number. Assign the relay recipient either to a relay station address number from 001 to 500* (when the specification method for the initiating station is 3 digits in F Code) or to 001 to 099 (when the specification method for the initiating station is 2 digits in F Code).

Relay Station

* When the Speed Dial Extension Kit is installed, it will be 001 to 999.

Note

The above describes using Relay Broadcast with the machine. When using a machine of a different model as a relay station, obtain the F Code (sub-address) and password of the target recipient machine.

181

4 Fax

Fax Signal Method

Select an address number or group dial number to which a relay broadcast is registered and press the <Start> button. To perform Multiple Relay Broadcast, repeat this step.

DTMF Method
There are two methods in the DTMF method: Auto Send and Manual Send. Auto Send (transmitting without picking up the receiver)

Select [Keyboard] to display the keyboard on the touch screen and enter in the following format.

2
Fax

Select [+ Add] to perform Multiple Relay Broadcast.


Note You can specify up to 20 locations for relay recipients.

Password A pre-registered two-digit number


Note By default, no password is set. For setting a password, contact our Customer Support Center. If a password has not been set, you do not need to enter one.

Relay station ID The last two digits of the initiating station address number registered at the relay station Address number An address number for the relay recipients registered at the relay station The wildcard "" can also be used.
The above dialing format can be registered in an address number to send using the address number. For information on how to register address numbers, refer to "5 Tools" > "Setup" > "Add Address Book Entry" in the Administrator Guide.

3 1

Press the <Start> button. Manual Send (transmitting with picking up the receiver or on-hook) Select the [More Options] tab to display the [More Options] screen.

Select [On-hook (Manual Send/Receive)].

182

Broadcast

3 4

Select [Manual Send] from the drop-down menu. Use the keyboard shown in the touch screen to enter numbers in the following format.

Note

You can specify up to 20 locations for relay recipients.

F Code Method
When the machine is an initiating station, you can perform Relay Broadcast by registering the relay stations F code and password (if necessary) to the machine.
Fax

When the machine is a relay station, you can perform Relay Broadcast by registering the machines F code and password (if necessary) to an initiating station.
Important When performing Relay Broadcast with the F Code method, you can use a password if you set a receive password for the relay station. Note When performing Relay Broadcast with machines of this model, we recommend using the fax signal method. When using a machine of a different model as a relay station, confirm the F Code (subaddress) and password of the target recipient machine.

When using the machine as a relay station, the F Code that is transmitted to the initiating station is as follows.
Relay Broadcast Print Directive Relay Station ID Address Number Address Number Address Number ....

Up to 20 digits

Relay Broadcast The number of digits of the relay station ID: 1: When the relay station IDs and address numbers are two digits 2: When the relay station IDs and address numbers are three digits Print Directive Printing/not printing at the relay station 1: Printing at the relay station 0: Not printing at the relay station Relay Station ID An address number for an initiating station registered at the relay station When the relay station ID is set, the initiating station is notified of the results of a Relay Broadcast. When the relay station ID is "00" or "000", the initiating station is not notified of the results of a Relay Broadcast.

183

4 Fax

Address Number The address number assigned to the relay recipient The following shows an example of F Code that indicates printing at the relay station, notifying the initiating station (100) of the results, and performing Relay Broadcast to relay recipients (200, 201, 202 and 203). F Code Example: 21100200201202203

1 2 3 4 5

Select the [Fax/Internet Fax Options] tab to display the [Fax/Internet Fax Options] screen. Select [F Code]. Select [On]. Enter the F Code with the numeric keypad.
Note You can enter up to 20 digits for the F Code.

If necessary, enter the password using the numeric keypad and select [Next].
Important You can enter up to 20 digits for the password.

Fax

Remote Relay Broadcast (Performing Relay Broadcast to Remote Locations)


The Remote Relay Broadcast feature combines two or more Relay Broadcast operations and use Broadcast Send. This feature is more economical than Relay Broadcast in transmitting documents to multiple remote machines.
Note Multiple Relay Broadcast can be performed from a secondary relay station.

There are three Relay Broadcast methods. Fax Signal Method This method employs a Fuji Xerox proprietary communication procedure that is only for use with specific machines that have the Relay Broadcast feature. The G3 is available. DTMF Method G3 fax machines that support Manual Send can make Remote Relay Broadcast for the machine. F Code Method This method can be used among machines that have the F Code and the Relay Broadcast features. The G3 is available.

Fax Signal Method


Register the following information in the address numbers of initiating stations and relay stations in advance.
For information on how to register address numbers, refer to "5 Tools" > "Setup" > "Add Address Book Entry" in the Administrator Guide.

184

Broadcast

Where
Initiating Station

Contents
Assign the relay station to an address number (001 to 500*) to set up the Relay Broadcast feature. Register the last two digits of the address number of the initiating station (which is already registered at a primary relay station) as a relay station ID. Register the address numbers or group dial number of the secondary relay stations (which are registered at a primary relay station) as broadcast recipients. Assign the initiating station to an address number from 001 to 099 and set Relay Station Setup of the address number to [On]. Assign the secondary relay station to an address number from 001 to 099. As the relay station ID, assign the last two digits of the address number for the primary relay station that is registered to the secondary relay station. As the broadcast recipients, assign the address number for the relay recipients that have been registered to the secondary relay station.

Primary Relay Station

Secondary Assign the primary relay station to the same address number as that of the initiating station registered at the primary relay station, and set Relay Station Relay Setup of the address number to [On]. Station Assign the relay recipient to an address number from 001 to 500*. Relay recipients of address number 100 or above can be registered to a group and specified by address number.
* When the Speed Dial Extension Kit is installed, it will be 001 to 999.

Fax

Select an address number or group dial number to which a remote relay broadcast is registered and press the <Start> button.

DTMF Method
Register the following information in the address numbers of the primary relay station and the secondary relay station in advance.
For information on how to register address numbers, refer to "5 Tools" > "Setup" > "Add Address Book Entry" in the Administrator Guide.

Where
Primary Relay Station

Contents
Assign the initiating station to an address number from 001 to 500* and set Relay Station Setup of the address number to [On]. Assign the secondary relay station to an address number from 001 to 500*. As the relay station ID, assign the last two digits of the Address Number for the primary relay station that is registered to the secondary relay station. As the broadcast recipients, assign the Address Number for the relay recipients that have been registered to the secondary relay station.

Secondary Assign the primary relay station to the same address number as that of the initiating station registered at the primary relay station, and set Relay Station Relay Setup of the address number to [On]. Station Assign the relay recipient to an address number from 001 to 500*.
* When the Speed Dial Extension Kit is installed, it will be 001 to 999.

Important You can specify any machine that supports our DTMF method feature. Auto Send (transmitting without picking up the receiver)

Select [Keyboard] to display the keyboard on the touch screen and enter in the following format.

185

4 Fax

Select [+ Add] to perform Multiple Relay Broadcast. Password A pre-registered two-digit number
Note By default, no password is set. For setting a password, contact our Customer Support Center. If a password has not been set, you do not need to enter one.

Relay Station ID The last two digits of the initiating station address number registered at the primary relay station Address Number The address number for the secondary relay station registered at the primary relay station
The above dialing format can be registered in an address number to send using the address number. For information on how to register address numbers, refer to "5 Tools" > "Setup" > "Add Address Book Entry" in the Administrator Guide.

Manual Send (transmitting with picking up the receiver or on-hook)

Fax

1 2

Select the [More Options] tab to display the [More Options] screen. Pick up the telephone receiver, or select [Onhook (Manual Send/Receive)].

3 4

Select [Manual Send] from the drop-down menu. Use the keyboard shown in the touch screen to enter numbers in the following format.

Note

You can specify up to 20 locations for relay recipients.

F Code Method
When using the machine as the initiating station for performing Remote Relay Broadcast, confirm the F Code and the password (if necessary) for the primary relay station. When using the machine as the primary relay station for performing Remote Relay Broadcast, inform the initiating station of the F Code (sub-address) and the password (if necessary) and confirm the F Code for the secondary relay station.

186

Broadcast

When using the machine as the secondary relay station for performing Remote Relay Broadcast, inform the primary relay station of the F Code and the password (if necessary). Register the following information in the address numbers of the primary relay station and the secondary relay station in advance. Where
Primary Relay Station

Contents
Assign the initiating station either to an address number from 001 to 500* (when the specification method for the initiating station is 3 digits in F Code) or to 001 to 099 (when the specification method for the initiating station is 2 digits in F Code). Then, set Relay Station Setup of the address number to [On]. Assign the secondary relay station either to an address number from 001 to 500* (when the specification method for the initiating station is 3 digits in F Code) or to 001 to 099 (when the specification method for the initiating station is 2 digits in F Code). As the relay station ID, assign the last two digits of the Address Number for the primary relay station that is registered to the secondary relay station. As the broadcast recipients, assign the Address Number for the relay recipients that have been registered to the secondary relay station.

Fax

Secondary Assign the primary relay station to the same address number as that of the initiating station registered at the primary relay station, and set Relay Station Relay Setup of the address number to [On]. Station Assign the relay recipients either to an address number from 001 to 500* (when the specification method for the initiating station is 3 digits in F Code) or to 001 to 099 (when the specification method for the initiating station is 2 digits in F Code).
* When the Speed Dial Extension Kit is installed, it will be 001 to 999.

Important When using the F Code method for Remote Relay Broadcast, the primary relay stations and secondary relay stations must support our F Code method and be equipped with the Relay Broadcast feature. Note When performing Relay Broadcast with machines of this model, we recommend using the fax signal method.

When using the machine as a relay station, the F Code that is transmitted to the initiating station is as follows.
Relay Broadcast Print Directive Primary Relay Station ID Address Number Address Number Address Number ....

Up to 20 digits

Relay Broadcast The number of digits of the relay station ID: 1: When the relay station IDs and address numbers are two digits 2: When the relay station IDs and address numbers are three digits Print Directive Printing/not printing at the relay station 1: Printing at the primary relay station 0: No printing at the primary relay station

187

4 Fax

Primary Relay Station ID The address number for the initiating station registered at the primary relay station When the primary relay station ID is set, the initiating station is notified of the results of the Remote Relay Broadcast. When the relay station ID is "00" or "000", the initiating station is not notified of the results of a Remote Relay Broadcast. Address Number The address number assigned to the secondary relay station The operating procedure is the same as for Relay Broadcast.

Fax

188

Receiving Faxes

Receiving Faxes
There are two reception modes: Auto Receive and Manual Receive. In the Auto Receive mode, reception of a fax from a remote machine begins automatically. In the Manual Receive mode, reception of a fax from a remote machine is manual. This mode is convenient for confirming the sender or using an external telephone to confirm whether it is a fax before beginning reception.
The Fax Receiving Mode default value can be changed in the System Administration mode. For information on how to change the default values, refer to "5 Tools" > "Fax Service Settings" > "Fax Control" > "Fax Receiving Mode" in the Administrator Guide.

Switching between Auto Receive and Manual Receive

1 2

Press the <Machine Status> button.


Fax

Select [Fax Receiving Mode] on the [Machine Information] screen.

Select [Manual Receive] or [Auto Receive].

Manual Receive Reception of a fax from a remote machine is manual. This mode is convenient for confirming the sender or using an external telephone to confirm whether it is a fax before beginning reception. Auto Receive Reception of a fax from a remote machine begins automatically.

Using Auto Receive


When the machine is in the Auto Receive mode, it automatically answers incoming calls and receives documents.
Note You can set the length of time that the machine rings when there is an incoming call. While the machine is ringing, you can pick up the telephone and then talk if the call is from a telephone, or you can receive a fax manually if the call is from a fax machine.

189

4 Fax

Using Manual Receive


If the fax reception mode is set to [Manual Receive] when the machine rings to notify of an incoming call, pick up the receiver of the external telephone or select [On-hook] on the screen that appears.
Note We recommend setting the monitor volume to [Loud] when using the On-hook feature. The volume of the line monitor can be changed in the System Administration mode. For information on how to change the default values, refer to "5 Tools" > "Common Service Settings" > "Audio Tones" > "Line Monitor Volume" in the Administrator Guide.

1 2

When the machine rings, the screen appears. If there is a telephone, pick the receiver up. If not, select [On-hook] on the receiving screen. Confirm whether the call is from a telephone or a fax machine. If the call is from a telephone, use the receiver to talk. If the call is from a fax machine, you will hear the sound of a fax machine.
Note If [On-hook] was selected, you will hear the sound from the machine speaker. However, you cannot talk to the other party.

3 4

Press the <Start> button. If you picked up the receiver, put it back in the cradle when the <Online> indicator on the control panel lights up.
Important Make sure that the receiver is placed properly in the cradle. Otherwise, the line will remain "busy".

Fax

Using Mailbox Receive


Documents received using Mailbox Receive are stored in a mailbox. After receiving a document, the <Job in Memory> indicator lights up and the machine prints a mailbox report. The mailbox number and the mailbox name are printed on the mailbox report. To receive a Mailbox Receive document using F Code transmission, notify the sender of the following information: F Code (sub-address): 0 (represents F Code transmission) and the storage mailbox number. Password (if necessary): the passcode of the mailbox in which the document is stored.
Note Mailbox reception using the DTMF method is possible, but the only signals that can be received are numerals, *, and #.

Depending on the report print settings, a mailbox report may not be printed even if there is a received document in the mailbox. For more information on the Mailbox Report settings, refer to "5 Tools" > "Common Service Settings" > "Reports" > "Mailbox Report" in the Administrator Guide. For information on how to print a document stored in a mailbox, refer to "Printing Documents in a Mailbox" (P.248)".

190

Facsimile Information Services

Facsimile Information Services


For information on subscriptions and advanced operating procedures, contact the corresponding facsimile information service.

Using the Receiver

Pick up the telephone receiver.

Fax

2 3

Select [Manual Receive] from the drop-down menu. Specify the fax number of the facsimile information service. The call destination can be specified using the numeric keypad, address numbers, or one touch buttons. The address book cannot be used. The call destination can be specified also with the keyboard displayed on the screen. Pressing [More Characters] on the screen displays symbols.
Note When the line type is set to a pulse line, [Tone (:)] does not appear. If you want to send tones (or to use the touch-tone services) while using a pulse line, select [Tone (:)]. Some touch-tone services may not be available even if you set your telephone to send tones.

4 5 6

When the machine connects to the service, you will hear voice prompts. Follow the voice that prompts to enter the required numbers. When input is finished, press the <Start> button.
Note The <Online> indicator on the control panel lights and reception begins.

Place the receiver back in the cradle.


Important Make sure that the receiver is placed properly in the cradle. Otherwise, the line will remain "busy".

191

4 Fax

When Not Using a Receiver

Adjust the volume of the line monitor. We recommend setting the volume of the line monitor to [Loud] so that it is easy to hear the voice prompts.
For information on how to change the volume of the line monitor, refer to "5 Tools" > "Common Service Settings" > "Audio Tones" > "Line Monitor Volume" in the Administrator Guide.

2 3 4
Fax

Select [On-hook (Manual Send/Receive)] on the [More Options] screen. Select [Manual Receive] from the drop-down menu. Specify the fax number of the facsimile information service. The call destination can be specified using the numeric keypad address numbers, or one touch buttons. The address book cannot be used. The call destination can also be specified using the keyboard displayed on the screen.
Note When the line type is set to a pulse line, [Tone (:)] does not appear. If you want to send tones (or to use the touch-tone services) while using a pulse line, select [Tone (:)] Some touch-tone services may not be available even if you set your telephone to send tones.

5 6

When the machine connects to the service, you will hear voice prompts. Follow the voice prompts to enter the required numbers. When input is finished, press the <Start> button.

192

5 Scan
This chapter describes the basic scanning procedures and the scan features provided by the machine.
Note The scan features are not available for some models. To use the features, an optional package will be necessary. For more information, contact our Customer Support Center.

To use the scan features, network settings are required. For information on the network settings, refer to "9 Scanner Environment Settings" in the Administrator Guide.

Scanning Procedure .................................................................................194 Operations during Scanning .....................................................................200 E-mail........................................................................................................203 Scan to Mailbox ........................................................................................210 Network Scanning.....................................................................................211 Scan to PC................................................................................................213 General Scan Features.............................................................................217 Advanced Settings....................................................................................227 Layout Adjustment ....................................................................................230 E-mail Options/Filing Options ...................................................................236

5 Scan

Scanning Procedure
This section describes the basic scanning procedure. The following shows the reference section for each step.
Step 1 Loading Documents .......................................................................................................194 Step 2 Selecting Features ..........................................................................................................196 Step 3 Starting the Scan Job......................................................................................................197 Step 4 Confirming the Scan Job in Job Status ..........................................................................199 Step 5 Saving the Scanned Data ...............................................................................................199

Step 1 Loading Documents


There are two methods for loading documents: Document Feeder Single sheet Multiple sheets
Scan

Document Glass Single sheet Bound documents, such as books

Document Feeder
The document feeder supports single and multiple sheet documents with sizes from 139.7 x 210 mm (A5, 5.5 x 8.5 inches) to 297 x 432 mm (A3, 11 x 17 inches). The document feeder automatically detects standard size documents. For nonstandard size documents, input the size in the [Original Size] screen.
For information about document sizes that can be detected automatically, or how to enter variable sizes, refer to "Original Size (Specifying a Scan Size)" (P.232)". The standard document sizes that can be detected automatically depend on the [Paper Size Settings] in the System Administration mode. For information about paper size settings, refer to "5 Tools" > "Common Service Settings" > "Other Settings" > "Paper Size Settings" in the Administrator Guide.

The document feeder accepts the following number of sheets. Document Type (Weight)
Lightweight paper (38 - 49 g/m2) Plain paper (50 - 80 g/m2) Heavyweight paper (81 - 128 g/m2)

Number of Sheets
75 sheets 75 sheets 50 sheets

Important To avoid paper jams, use the document glass for folded or creased documents. Two sided scanning of lightweight paper 38 - 49 g/m2 is not supported.

For information about scanning mixed sized documents, refer to "Mixed Sized Originals (Scanning Different Size Documents Simultaneously)" (P.232).

194

Scanning Procedure

1 2

Remove any paper clips and staples before loading the document. Place the documents face up (when the documents are 2-sided, place the front side up) in the center of the document feeder
Note In normal occasions, load the document in the [Head to Left] orientation. When viewing the scanned document on a computer, the document is displayed in the [Head to Top] orientation. The indicator lights up when the document is loaded correctly.

Indicator

Adjust the movable document guides to match the size of the document loaded.

Scan

Document Glass
The document glass supports a single sheet, a book, or other similar documents up to 297 x 432 mm (A3, 11 x 17 inches).
Important After using the document glass, close the document cover.

The document glass automatically detects standard size documents. For non-standard size documents, input the size in the [Original Size] screen.
For information about document sizes that can be detected automatically, or how to enter variable sizes, refer to "Original Size (Specifying a Scan Size)" (P.232)". The standard document sizes that can be detected automatically depend on the [Paper Size Settings] in the System Administration mode. For information on the paper size settings, refer to "5 Tools" > "Common Service Settings" > "Other Settings" > "Paper Size Settings" in the Administrator Guide.

CAUTION Do not apply excessive force to hold thick document on the platen glass. It may break the glass and cause injuries.

Open the document cover.


Important Ensure that a screen is displayed on the control panel, and then load a document. If a document is loaded before a screen is displayed, the machine may not properly detect the document size.

195

5 Scan

2 3

Place the document face down, and align it against the top left corner of the document glass. Close the document cover.

Step 2 Selecting Features


On the [All Services] screen, you can select from 4 scan modes: E-mail, Scan to Mailbox, Network Scanning, and Scan to PC. You can select features on each mode.
Note Features displayed may vary depending on the model of your machine. When the Auditron mode used, a user ID and passcode may be required. Ask your system administrator for the user ID and passcode. To use the scan features, network settings are required. For information on the network settings, refer to "9 Scanner Environment Settings" in the Administrator Guide.

E-mail Scans a document, and sends the scanned data as an e-mail attachment after converting the data to TIFF, JPEG, PDF, Docuworks, or XPS. Scan to Mailbox Scans a document and saves the scanned data into a mailbox on the machine.
You need to create a mailbox in advance. For information on how to create a mailbox, refer to "5 Tools" > "Setup" > "Mailbox" in the Administrator Guide.

Scan

Network Scanning Scans a document using a job template created on CentreWare Internet Services. Scan to PC Scans a document and sends the scanned data to a network computer via the FTP or SMB protocol. The following describes how to store scanned data into a mailbox.

Press the <All Services> button.


1 4 7 2 5 8 0 C 3 6 9 #

<All Services> button

196

Scanning Procedure

Select [Scan to Mailbox].

If the previous settings still remain, press the <Clear All> button.
1 4 7 2 5 8 0 C 3 6 9 #

<Clear All> button

Scan

Select each tab, and configure features as necessary.

The following shows the reference section for each feature.


"General Scan Features" (P.217) "Advanced Settings" (P.227) "Layout Adjustment" (P.230) "E-mail Options/Filing Options" (P.236)

Step 3 Starting the Scan Job


The following describes how to start a scan job.

Press the <Start> button.


Important If the document has been set in the document feeder, do not hold down the document while it is being conveyed. Scanning cannot be performed if a copy protection code is detected. Note If a problem occurs, an error message appears in the touch screen. Solve the problem in accordance with the message. The next scan job can proceed while scanning.
1 4 7 2 5 8 0 C 3 6 9 #

<Start> button

197

5 Scan

If you have more documents If you have more documents to scan, select [Next Original] on the touch screen while the current document is being scanned. This allows you to scan the documents as a single set of data. Up to 999 pages can be stored.
Note If the number of document pages exceeds the maximum, then scanning stops. Follow the displayed message, and either abort the operation, or save the scanned data.

While documents are being scanned, select [Next Original].

Note

When using the document feeder, load the next document after the machine has finished scanning the first document. When the screen shown above is displayed and no operation is performed for a certain period of time, the machine automatically assumes that there are no more documents. You can change the scan settings of the next document by selecting the [Change Settings] button that is displayed after selecting [Next Original].

Scan

5
3

Load the next document.

4 5

Press the <Start> button. If you have more documents, repeat Steps 3 and 4. When all documents have been scanned, select [Last Original].

198

Scanning Procedure

Step 4 Confirming the Scan Job in Job Status


The following describes how to confirm the status of a scan job.

Press the <Job Status> button.


1 4 7 2 5 8 0 C 3 6 9 #

<Job Status> button

Confirm the job status. From the pull-down menu, you can select and display the types of jobs ([All Jobs], [Printer & Print from Mailbox Jobs], [Scan, Fax, & Internet Fax Jobs], [Job Flow & Auto File Transfer Jobs]).
Scan
Note Select [ ] to return to the previous screen or [ ] to move to the next screen.

Step 5 Saving the Scanned Data


When you used the Scan-to-Mailbox feature, the document stored in a mailbox of the machine can be imported into your computer using the following: Import using an application Use a network scan driver.
Refer to "Importing Using Mailbox Viewer 3" (P.318).

Import using Mailbox Viewer 3 Use Mailbox Viewer 3 (Fuji Xerox application software).
Refer to "Importing Using Mailbox Viewer 3" (P.318).

Import using CentreWare Internet Services Use CentreWare Internet Services.


Refer to "CentreWare Internet Services" (P.323).

Import using EasyOperator Use EasyOperator.


Refer to "Importing Using EasyOperator" (P.322).

199

5 Scan

Operations during Scanning


The following describes the operations available during scanning. The following shows the reference for each operation.
Stopping the Scan Job ...............................................................................................................200 Changing Scan Settings ............................................................................................................201

Stopping the Scan Job


To cancel scanning a document, follow the procedure below.

Press either [Stop] on the touch screen or the <Stop> button on the control panel.
1 4 7 2 5 8 0 C 3 6 9 #

Scan

<Stop> button

Select [Cancel].

200

Operations during Scanning

If the screen shown in Step 2 does not appear even after you press the <Stop> button on the control panel:

Press the <Job Status> button.


1 4 7 2 5 8 0 C 3 6 9 #

<Job Status> button

Select the job to cancel, and then select [Stop].


Note If you cancel the job, scanned data stored in the mailbox will also be deleted.

Scan

Changing Scan Settings


You can change scan settings while scanning the document.

Select [Next Original].

Select [Change Settings...].

Set [Color Scanning], [Original Type], [Image Options], [Resolution], [2 Sided Scanning], and [Original size].
"Color Scanning (Selecting an Output Color)" (P.217). "Original Type (Selecting the Document Type)" (P.219). "Image Options (Adjusting Scan Density and Image Sharpness)" (P.228). "Resolution (Specifying a Scanning Resolution)" (P.230).

201

5 Scan

"2 Sided Scanning (Scanning Both Sides of a Document)" (P.230). "Original Size (Specifying a Scan Size)" (P.232).

Press the <Start> button.

Scan

202

E-mail

E-mail
The following describes how to select features on the [E-mail] screen. You can scan a document and send the scanned data as an e-mail attachment after converting the data to TIFF, JPEG, PDF, DocuWorks, or XPS. The following shows the reference section for each feature.
Address Book (Specifying an E-mail Address) ....................................................................... 203 New Recipient (Entering an Address)...................................................................................... 206 Add Me (Adding the Senders Address) .................................................................................. 207 Recipient(s) (Editing a Recipient)............................................................................................ 207 From (Setting the Senders Address) ....................................................................................... 208 Subject (Setting the Subject) .................................................................................................... 209 Message (Entering the E-mail Body) ....................................................................................... 209

The [Read Receipts] and [Split Send] features on the [Output Format] screen are only available for the [E-mail] feature. The following shows the reference section for each feature.
Read Receipts (Specifying Read Receipts) .............................................................................. 237 Split Send (Sending in Sections).............................................................................................. 237
Note This feature is not available for some models. An optional package is necessary to use the feature. For details, contact our Customer Support Center.

Scan

Some e-mail settings are required to use this feature. For information on configuring scanner, refer to "9 Scanner Environment Settings" in the Administrator Guide.

1 2

Select [E-mail] on the [All Services] screen. On the [E-mail] screen, specify recipients using the Address Book or the keyboard.
Important You can only specify recipients registered for e-mail. Recipients cannot be specified with address numbers using the numeric keypad, one-touch buttons, or group numbers. Depending on the settings in the System Settings, the [New Recipient], and [Add Me] buttons are not displayed.

Address Book (Specifying an E-mail Address)


The following describes how to select a recipient using the Address Book. When sending an encrypted e-mail, select an e-mail address associated with a valid certificate from the Address Book. To use this feature, an e-mail address associated with a certificate for S/MIME must be registered in the Address Book. For information on the Address Book, refer to "5 Tools" > "Setup" > "Add Address Book Entry" in the Administrator Guide.
To encrypt an e-mail, prior settings are required. For information on the settings, refer to "12 Encryption and Digital Signature Settings" > "Configuration of E-mail Encryption/Digital Signature" in the Administrator Guide. To verify invalidity of a certificate, prior settings are required. For information on the settings, refer to "5 Tools" > "Connectivity and Network Settings" > "Certificate Revocation Retrieval Settings" in the Administrator Guide.
Note While displaying the Address Book, if a message indicating "Validating..." appears on the screen, you can not start a scan job until the message disappears.

203

5 Scan

1 2

Select [Address Book]. From the [Address Books] list, select [List all public entries], [Search Public], or [Search Network].
Note When specifying multiple recipients, specify them continuously.

3 4

Select a recipient from the address list, and then select [To], [CC], or [BCC]. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 as necessary. List all public entries Displays the local address list.
Refer to "When [List all public entries] is Selected" (P.205).

Search Public Searches recipients in the local address list.


Refer to "When [Search Public] or [Search Network] is Selected" (P.205).

Scan

Search Network Searches recipients in the remote address list.


Note This feature is supported only by the ApeosPort series.

Refer to "When [Search Public] or [Search Network] is Selected" (P.205).

Name/E-mail Address Lists names and their e-mail addresses. To Sets the selected address as a recipient. CC Sets the selected address as CC. BCC Sets the selected address as BCC. Details Displays detailed information on the selected recipient. Show E-mail Address Placing a check mark in the box displays only e-mail addresses in the list.

204

E-mail

When [List all public entries] is Selected

Select a recipient from the local address list.


Note Select [ ] to return to the previous screen or [ ] to move to the next screen.

When [Search Public] or [Search Network] is Selected

Enter keywords to search for an address.


For information on how to enter characters, refer to "Entering Text" (P.53).
Note When multiple keywords are used, the address is searched with the AND clause. The screen on the right appears when [Search Public] is selected.

Scan

Name Searches with a recipient name as a keyword. Selecting [Keyword] displays the screen for entering the keyword. Up to 32 characters are allowed. Example: John Smith E-mail Address Searches with an e-mail address as a keyword. Selecting [Keyword] displays the screen for entering the keyword. Up to 128 characters are allowed. Example: myhost@example.com Custom Item This field is used to search with a keyword item other than the recipient name and email address. Selecting [Enter/Change Keyword] displays the screen listing the custom items.
Note Only one custom item can be selected.

None No custom item is used for the keyword search. telephonenumber A telephone number is used for the keyword search. o An office name is used for the keyword search. ou A department name is used for the keyword search. Change Settings

205

5 Scan

Select a custom item, and select this button. Then the keyword entry screen appears. Up to 60 characters are allowed. Keyword Select a keyword item, and select [Enter/Change Keyword]. Then the keyword is set or changed. Search The search starts. The searched results are listed on the screen.

New Recipient (Entering an Address)


You can enter addresses using the keyboard.

1 2
Scan

Select [New Recipient] on the [E-mail] screen. Use the keyboard shown on the screen to enter an e-mail address of up to 128 characters.

5
To/CC/BCC Switches the recipient type (To/CC/BCC) using the drop-down menu. + Add Allows you to specify e-mail addresses to send e-mails to multiple recipients (Broadcast). Search for names Placing a check mark in the box searches for names. Delete Text Deletes entered text. Backspace Moves the cursor back to delete one character. Shift Used for entering uppercase characters. More Characters Displays symbols. Use this button to enter symbols for the e-mail address.

206

E-mail

Add Me (Adding the Senders Address)


This button is used to add the sender's address to [To], [CC], or [BCC].

1 2

Select [Add Me]. Select an option. To Adds the sender's address to To. CC Adds the sender's address to CC. BCC Adds the sender's address to BCC.

Recipient(s) (Editing a Recipient)


You can confirm, delete or edit recipients using the pop-up menu displayed.
Scan

1 2

From the [Recipient(s)] list, select the recipient to be deleted, confirmed, or edited. Select any item from the pop-up menu. Remove Removes the selected recipient. Edit Displays the [Change Recipient Settings] screen where you can confirm or edit the recipient.
Refer to "[Edit Recipient] Screen" (P.207).

Close Menu Hides the pop-up menu.

[Edit Recipient] Screen


You can confirm and change the settings of the recipient.

1 2

Select the item to be changed. Select [Change Settings].

E-mail Address To change the e-mail address, select [Change Settings] to display the keyboard and enter a new address.

207

5 Scan

Name To change the recipient name, select [Change Settings] to display the keyboard and enter a new name. The recipient name appears when registered in the Address Book. S/MIME Certificate To check whether or not any certificate is linked to the e-mail address, select [Change Settings]. If S/MIME is enabled, and a certificate is linked to the e-mail address, you can check the contents of the S/MIME certificate.
Note This feature is supported only by the ApeosPort series.

For information on S/MIME communication, refer to "10 Encryption and Digital Signature Settings" > "Configuration of E-mail Encryption/Digital Signature" in the Administrator Guide.

Change Settings Displays the [Change Recipient Settings] screen. You can change recipients, or confirm S/MIME certificates.

From (Setting the Senders Address)


Specify a sender's e-mail address. You can specify only one address as a sender's address.
Note When using the Authentication feature, the e-mail address registered in user information is automatically set as a sender's address. For more information on user information, refer to "5 Tools" > "Accounting" > "Create/View User Accounts" in the Administrator Guide. Depending on the System Settings, [From] may not be editable. When using a digital signature, the machine e-mail address becomes the senders address.

Scan

For information on a digital signature, refer to "10 Encryption and Digital Signature Settings" > "Configuration of E-mail Encryption/Digital Signature" in the Administrator Guide.

1 2

Select [From]. Select any item from the pop-up menu.

Address Book Allows you to select the sender's e-mail address from the address book.
For information on the address book, refer to "Address Book (Specifying a Destination PC Using the Address Book)" (P.214).

Keyboard Enter the senders e-mail address of up to 128 characters. Close Menu Hides the pop-up menu.

208

E-mail

Subject (Setting the Subject)


Set the e-mail subject using the following procedure. Auto Set Automatically sets the subject to [Scan data from XXX] (where XXX is the host name of the machine). To set a user-defined subject

1 2

Select [Subject]. Enter a subject of up to 128 characters using the displayed keyboard.
For information on how to enter characters, refer to "Entering Text" (P.53).

Message (Entering the E-mail Body)


Enter the e-mail body using the following procedure.

1 2

Select [Message].
Scan

Enter a message of up to 512 characters using the keyboard.


For information on how to enter characters, refer to "Entering Text" (P.53).

Color Scanning (Selecting an Output Color)


You can set the output color to scan a document.
For information about the feature, refer to "Color Scanning (Selecting an Output Color)" (P.217).

2 Sided Scanning (Scanning Both Sides of a Document)


You can automatically scan both sides of a 2-sided document. By setting the binding style, both sides are scanned in the same orientation.
For information about the feature, refer to "2 Sided Scanning (Scanning Both Sides of a Document)" (P.218).

Original Type (Selecting the Document Type)


You can select the type of the document.
For information about the feature, refer to "Original Type (Selecting the Document Type)" (P.219).

File Format (Selecting a File Format for Output Data)


You can select a file format for output data.
For information about the feature, refer to "File Format (Selecting a File Format for Output Data)" (P.220).

209

5 Scan

Scan to Mailbox
The following describes the procedure to select features on the [Scan to Mailbox] screen. You can scan documents and save the scanned data into a mailbox of the machine. The following explains the [Scan to Mailbox] screen.
A mailbox needs to be registered beforehand. For more information on registering a mailbox, refer to "5 Tools" > "Setup" > "Mailbox" in the Administrator Guide.

1 2

Select [Scan to Mailbox] on the [All Services] screen. Select a feature on the [Scan to Mailbox] screen.
Note If a passcode is set for the mailbox, the passcode entry screen may appear. Enter the passcode and select [Enter]. If you have forgotten the passcode, set the mailbox passcode in the System Administration mode again.

Mailbox Select a mailbox to save the scanned data in.


Note Select [ ] to return to the previous screen and select [ ] to move to the next screen.

Scan

Go to Use the numeric keypad to enter a 3-digit mailbox number. The mailbox then appears at the top of the list. Document List Select a mailbox and then select this button to display the [Document List] screen. You can confirm or delete documents stored in the mailbox.
For more information on the [Document List] screen, refer to "Step 3 Checking/Selecting Mailbox Documents" (P.243).

Color Scanning (Selecting an Output Color)


You can set the output color to scan a document.
For information about the feature, refer to "Color Scanning (Selecting an Output Color)" (P.217).

2 Sided Scanning (Scanning Both Sides of a Document)


You can automatically scan both sides of a 2-sided document. By setting the binding style, both sides are scanned in the same orientation.
For information about the feature, refer to "2 Sided Scanning (Scanning Both Sides of a Document)" (P.218).

Original Type (Selecting the Document Type)


You can select the type of the document.
For information about the feature, refer to "Original Type (Selecting the Document Type)" (P.219).

210

Network Scanning

Network Scanning
The following describes the procedure to select features on the Network Scanning screen. On the Network Scanning screen, you can scan documents after specifying a file (job template) saving scanning conditions, information on the forwarding destination server and others. This feature creates job templates on a computer using CentreWare Internet Services. Scanned data is converted to the format specified in a job template, and is automatically sent to a server. The machine allows you to automatically retrieve job templates stored in a server. The following explains the [Network Scanning] screen.
Note If characters not supported by the machine are used in names or description of job flow sheets, the characters will not be displayed or will be garbled on the screen. For information on characters available for use, refer to "15 Appendix" > "Notes and Restrictions" > "Notes and Restrictions on the Use of the Machine" in the Administrator Guide. This feature is supported only by the ApeosPort series.

When Scan to Home is enabled, and when the Access Remote feature is available, the scanned document can be transferred to a different destination based on an authenticated user.
Important When using the Scan to Home feature in computer environment earlier than Windows 98 NT, a destination user name in the earlier format (domain name\user name) will not be determined automatically. Before scanning, change the user name with which you can log in correctly. Note You can configure Scan to Home from CentreWare Internet Services.

Scan

For information on how to use CentreWare Internet Services, refer to the online help of CentreWare Internet Services.

1 2

Select [Network Scanning] on the [All Services] screen. Select a job template.

Job Template Select a job template that has the scan conditions you want.
Note Select [ ] to return to the previous screen or [ ] to move to the next screen.

Go to Use the numeric keypad to enter a 3-digit job template number. The job template then appears at the top of the list. Template Description Displays the [Template Description] screen. The screen displays the description of the job template. This applies only when the description has been added to a job template. Update Templates Refreshes the information. If a created job template has not been displayed, selecting [Refresh] will display the job template.

211

5 Scan

Color Scanning (Selecting an Output Color)


You can set the output color to scan a document.
For information about the feature, refer to "Color Scanning (Selecting an Output Color)" (P.217).

2 Sided Scanning (Scanning Both Sides of a Document)


You can automatically scan both sides of a 2-sided document. By setting the binding style, both sides are scanned in the same orientation.
For information about the feature, refer to "2 Sided Scanning (Scanning Both Sides of a Document)" (P.218).

Original Type (Selecting the Document Type)


You can select the type of the document.
For information about the feature, refer to "Original Type (Selecting the Document Type)" (P.219).

File Format (Selecting a File Format for Output Data)


You can select a file format for output data.
For information about the feature, refer to "File Format (Selecting a File Format for Output Data)" (P.220).

Scan

212

Scan to PC

Scan to PC
You can convert scanned data to TIFF, JPEG, PDF, DocuWorks, or XPS format, and then use the FTP or SMB protocol to send the data to a computer on the network. The following shows the reference section for each feature.
Transfer Protocol...................................................................................................................... 213 Address Book (Specifying a Destination PC Using the Address Book).................................. 214 Browse... (Specifying a Destination PC by Browsing Your Network).................................... 214 Specifying a Destination (Specifying a Destination PC Using the Screen Keyboard) ............ 215
Note This feature does not appear for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more information, contact our Customer Support Center. Before scanning, a shared folder must be created on the computer for saving scanned data. If the FTP protocol is used, the FTP service must be set. For information on the computer settings, refer to the documentation supplied with your operating system. For information on compatible operating systems, refer to "15 Appendix" > "Specifications" > "Scan Feature Specifications" in the Administrator Guide.

1 2

Select [Scan to PC] from the [All Services] screen. Specify a forwarding destination on the [Scan to PC] screen.
Note Fields displayed vary depending on the protocol.

Scan

Transfer Protocol
You can select a transfer protocol using the following procedure.

1 2

Select [Transfer Protocol]. Select any item.

FTP Transfers using the FTP protocol. SMB Transfers using the SMB protocol. SMB (UNC Format) Transfers using the SMB protocol (UNC Format). UNC stands for Universal Naming Convention and its format is as follows: \\host name\shared name\directory name

213

5 Scan

Address Book (Specifying a Destination PC Using the Address Book)


You can specify the server name, user name and other information from the address book.
For information on settings of the address book, refer to "5 Tools" > "Setup" > "Add Address Book Entry" in the Administrator Guide. To verify invalidation of a certificate, prior settings are required. For the settings, refer to "5 Tools" > "Connectivity and Network Setup" > "Certificate Revocation Retrieval Settings" in the Administrator Guide.
Note While displaying the Address Book, if a message indicating "Validating..." appears on the screen, you can not start a scan job until the message disappears.

1 2 3

Select [Address Book]. Select the destination in which data is to be stored. Select [Add].
Important You can only use destinations configured for SMB or FTP. You cannot use destinations for faxes, e-mails or Internet Faxes. Note Select [ ] to return to the previous screen and select [ ] to move to the next screen.

Scan

Name Protocol Lists recipient names and protocols. Add Adds a selected recipient to the [Save In] box. Save in Displays a selected recipient. Details You can confirm information such as [Name] and [Server Name/IP Address].

Browse... (Specifying a Destination PC by Browsing Your Network)


Displays a hierarchy consisting of server names and folders. You can specify a save destination by tracing the hierarchy.

1 2

Select [Browse...]. Select the destination in which data is to be stored. You can move to another level by pressing [Previous] or [Next].
Important You can specify recipients for SMB only.

Save in Shows the current location in the hierarchy.

214

Scan to PC

Specifying a Destination (Specifying a Destination PC Using the Screen Keyboard)


Enter information into the fields provided for the selected protocol, to specify a forwarding destination.

Select the item to be set.


Note You can also select [Address Book] to enter information. Fields displayed on the screen vary depending on the protocol.

Enter information using the keyboard on the screen.


For information on how to enter characters, refer to "Entering Text" (P.53).
Note To delete characters, select [Backspace].

Scan

5
Server Displayed when [FTP] or [SMB] is selected for [Transfer Protocol]. Enter a server name or IP address. Up to 64 characters are allowed. Example:myhost.example.com (myhost: host name, example.com: domain name) Shared Name Displayed when [SMB] is selected for [Transfer Protocol]. Enter a shared name. Up to 64 characters are allowed. Save In Displayed when [FTP] or [SMB] is selected for [Transfer Protocol]: Enter a directory name. Up to 128 characters are allowed. When [SMB(UNC format) is selected for [Transfer Protocol]: Enter "\\Host Name\Shared Name\Directory Name". Up to 260 characters are allowed. User Name Enter the user name of the computer you are forwarding to. When a user name is not required for the destination, this field can be skipped. When [FTP] is selected for [Transfer Protocol], up to 97 characters are allowed. When [SMB] is selected for [Transfer Protocol], use one of the following formats. For Active Directory: User name@Domain name (user name: up to 32 characters, domain name: up to 64 characters) Example: fuji@example.com (fuji: user name, example.com: domain name)

215

5 Scan

For Windows NT Domain: Domain name\User name (domain name: up to 64 characters, user name: up to 32 characters) Example: example\fuji (example: domain name, fuji: user name) For workgroups: Local user (up to 32 characters) Example: Fuji-Taro Password Enter the password for the user name. Up to 32 characters are allowed.

Color Scanning (Selecting an Output Color)


You can set the output color to scan a document.
For information about the feature, refer to "Color Scanning (Selecting an Output Color)" (P.217).

2 Sided Scanning (Scanning Both Sides of a Document)


You can automatically scan both sides of a 2-sided document. By setting the binding style, both sides are scanned in the same orientation.
For information about the feature, refer to "2 Sided Scanning (Scanning Both Sides of a Document)" (P.218).

Scan

Original Type (Selecting the Document Type)


You can select the type of the document.
For information about the feature, refer to "Original Type (Selecting the Document Type)" (P.219).

File Format (Selecting a File Format for Output Data)


You can select a file format for output data.
For information about the feature, refer to "File Format (Selecting a File Format for Output Data)" (P.220).

216

General Scan Features

General Scan Features


The [E-mail], [Scan to Mailbox], [Network Scanning], and [Scan to PC] screens allow you to set basic features. The following shows the reference section for each feature.
Color Scanning (Selecting an Output Color) ........................................................................... 217 2 Sided Scanning (Scanning Both Sides of a Document) ........................................................ 218 Original Type (Selecting the Document Type) ........................................................................ 219 File Format (Selecting a File Format for Output Data)............................................................ 220
Note When you select [Scan to Mailbox], [File Format] is disabled.

1 2

On the [All Services] screen, select [E-mail], [Scan to Mailbox], [Network Scanning] or [Scan to PC]. On the [E-mail]/[Scan to Mailbox]/[Network Scanning]/[Scan to PC] screen, select a feature.

Scan

Color Scanning (Selecting an Output Color)


You can set the output color to scan a document.
Note [Black & White] cannot be selected when [Searchable Text] on the [File Format] screen is set to [Searchable] and [MRC High Compression] is set to [On]. [Black & White] can only be selected when [Searchable Text] on the [File Format] screen is set to [Searchable] and [MRC High Compression] is set to [Off].

Select a color mode from [Color Scanning].

Auto Detect The color of the document is determined automatically; the machine scans in full color when the document is colored, otherwise scans in monochrome.
Note The features which can be set in the [Advanced Settings] screen when [Auto Detect] is selected, are the same as if [Color] is specified for the [Color Scanning] when a color document is loaded, or the same as if [Black & White] is specified for the [Color Scanning] when a monochrome document is loaded.

Color Select to scan a color document. Black & White Scans a document in monochrome 2 tone. You can select the document type in the [Original Type].

217

5 Scan

Note

When [MRC High Compression] is is set to [On] in [Output Format], you cannot select [Black & White].

Grayscale Scans a document in grayscale. Adds shades to monochrome, creating intermediate tones that change gradually. Suited to documents containing gradations that cannot be reproduced with monochrome (2-color).

2 Sided Scanning (Scanning Both Sides of a Document)


Allows you to scan a 1-sided or 2-sided document on one or both sides of paper. By setting the binding style, both sides are scanned in the same orientation.

Select any item.

Scan

1 Sided Select this to scan only one side of the document. 2 Sided (Head to Head) Select this when both sides of the 2-sided document are in the same orientation. 2 Sided (Head to Toe) Select this when both sides of the 2-sided document are in opposite orientations. More... The [2 Sided Scanning] screen is displayed.
Refer to "[2 Sided Scanning] Screen" (P.218).

[2 Sided Scanning] Screen


This screen allows you to select the status and orientation of original documents.

Select any item.

1 Sided Select this to scan only one side of the document.

218

General Scan Features

2 Sided Select this to scan both sides of the document. Originals Displayed when [2 Sided] is selected. Head to Head Select this when both sides of the 2-sided document are in the same orientation. Head to Toe Select this when both sides of the 2-sided document are in opposite orientations. Original Orientation To scan using the document feeder, the orientation must be set to specify the head of the document. Load the document in the [Sideway Images] orientation when [File Format] is set to [TIFF/JPEG Auto Select], [TIFF], or [JPEG]. When viewing the scanned document on a computer, the document is displayed in the [Upright Images] orientation.
Note If the setting for [Original Orientation] differs from the actual document orientation, then the machine may mistakenly detect the top of the document.

Scan

Upright Images Select this item when placing the top edge of the document against the top side of the document glass or document feeder. Sideways Images Select this when placing the top edge of the document against the left side of the document glass or the document feeder.

Original Type (Selecting the Document Type)


When you set [Color Scanning] to [Black & White], select the document type.

Select an original type.

Photo & Text Select this item when the scanning document contains both text and photos. This setting automatically identifies text and photo areas to scan each area with optimum quality. Text Select this item when scanning text clearly. Photo Select this item when scanning photos.
Note [Photo] cannot be selected when [Searchable Text] on the [File Format] screen is set to [Searchable].

219

5 Scan

File Format (Selecting a File Format for Output Data)


You can select a file format for output data.
Note When [Scan to Mailbox] is selected, [File Format] is disabled. If High-compression Image Kit is installed, the machine can store PDF and DocuWorks files with higher compression rates.

Select a file format.

TIFF/JPEG Auto Select Automatically selects JPEG or TIFF. The file format is determined for each page: [JPEG] for full-color and grayscale pages, and [TIFF] for monochrome pages.
Scan

PDF Saves scanned data in PDF format.


Note The version of the output PDF files is AdobeAcrobat 4.0 (PDF 1.3).

DocuWorks Saves scanned data in DocuWorks format.


Note To browse or print DocuWorks files on a computer, one of the following software is required. - DocuWorks 4.0 or later - DocuWorks Viewer Light 4.0 or later - DocuWorks Viewer Light for Web 4.0 or later

More... The [File Format] screen is displayed.


Refer to "[File Format] Screen" (P.220).

[File Format] Screen


This screen displays all available File Format options.

Select any item.

TIFF/JPEG Auto Select Automatically selects JPEG or TIFF. The file format is determined for each page: [JPEG] for full-color and grayscale pages, and [TIFF] for monochrome pages.

220

General Scan Features

mTIFF - Multiple Pages per File Saves multiple pages into a single file in TIFF format. TIFF - File for Each Page Saves each page into a different file in TIFF format. JPEG - File for Each Page Saves as a JPEG file. When either [Color] or [Grayscale] is selected for [Color Scanning], configure the image compression method. You can also configure the compression ratio with [Quality/File Size] in the [Output Format] screen. PDF Images Multiple Pages per File Saves scanned data in PDF format.
Note The version of the output PDF files is AdobeAcrobat 4.0 (PDF 1.3).

DocuWorks Saves scanned data in DocuWorks format.


Note To browse or print DocuWorks files on a computer, one of the following software is required. - DocuWorks 4.0 or later - DocuWorks Viewer Light 4.0 or later - DocuWorks Viewer Light for Web 4.0 or later

Scan

XPS Saves scanned data in XPS format. Compression Method Allows you to select a compression method for scanned image data. MRC High Compression Allows you to save PDF, DocuWorks, and XPS files with high compression, and also to attach thumbnails to DocuWorks and XPS files. A thumbnail is a reduced, small file image that helps you check the file contents.
Important Creating thumbnail images increases the size of the output data. Check the data size before you send it by e-mail. DocuWorks 5.0.x and earlier versions (including trial version) do not support highcompressed DocuWorks files. Note Some models require an optional kit to use this feature. For more information, contact our Customer Support Center. To browse or print DocuWorks files on a computer, one of the following software is required. - DocuWorks 6.0 or later - DocuWorks Viewer Light 5.1 or later - DocuWorks Viewer Light for Web 5.1 or later

Searchable Text Select whether to perform character recognition in PDF and DocuWorks files.
Important Note the following when [Searchable Text] is set to [Searchable]. - When the text on the document is small (10 points or smaller), scan the document with high resolution (300 dpi). - Color scanning is recommended when the document has outlined white text, or when it has text placed on a dark background. - In the following cases, the Searchable Text feature may not function properly. - If the document is not loaded correctly and thus the text is slanted, or if the text on the document is in different orientations - If the text on the document is decorated (italic, hatching, strike-through, etc.)

221

5 Scan

- If the document has background patterns or noise - If the text on the document is handwritten Note Some models require an optional kit to use this feature. For more information, contact our Customer Support Center.

PDF Security Allows you to prevent the data saved as a PDF file from unauthorized access. The [File Format - PDF Security] screen appears.
Refer to "[File Format - PDF Security] Screen" (P.223).

PDF Signature The [File Format - PDF Signature] screen appears. A digital signature added to a file enables to detect alterations in the file, or to prevent impersonation of the sender. To verify the signature with Adobe Acrobat, select [Digital Signatures] under [Preferences] on Acrobat, and then select the following option for [Signing Method]. - Acrobat 6.0.x : Windows Digital Certificate Security - Acrobat 7.0.x : Adobe Default Security Off No visible signature is added. Visible Signature Adds a visible signature using the certificate of the machine. Invisible Signature Adds an invisible digital signature using the certificate of the machine. Signature Field Location Select the position for [Visible Signature] where the signature is displayed.
Note This feature is supported only by the ApeosPort series.

Scan

Optimize PDF For Fast Web View Optimizes the PDF file so that it is displayed faster on a web browser. DocuWorks Security Allows you to configure security on the data saved as a DocuWorks file to prevent unauthorized access. The [File Format - DocuWorks Security] screen appears.
Refer to "[File Format - DocuWorks Security] Screen" (P.225).

DocuWorks Signature The [File Format - DocuWorks Signature] screen appears. A visible signature added to a file enables to detect alterations in the file, or prevent impersonation of the sender. Off No visible signature is added. On Adds a visible signature using the certificate of the machine. Signature Field Location Select the position where the signature is displayed.

222

General Scan Features

Note

This feature is supported only by the ApeosPort series.

XPS Signature The [File Format - XPS Signature] screen appears. A visible signature added to a file enables to detect alterations in the file, or prevent impersonation of the sender. Off No visible signature is added. On Adds a visible signature using the certificate of the machine.
Note This feature is supported only by the ApeosPort series.

[File Format - PDF Security] Screen


Allows you to encrypt a PDF file by password, and assign the access privileges for the file operation.

Select any item.


Scan

5
Off The file is not encrypted, and no access privilege is configured. Password Encrypts the file using a password. Encryption Algorithm Set the encryption method. 128-bit RC4 Encrypts by the 128-bit RC4 method. Files encrypted by this method can be opened with Adobe Acrobat 5.0 or later.
Important When encrypted by the 128-bit RC4 method, and [PDF Signature] is selected, files can be opend only with Adobe Acrobat 6.0 or later.

128-bit AES Encrypts by the 128-bit AES method. Files encrypted by this method can be opened with Adobe Acrobat 7.0 or later. Supported Version The supported versions of Adobe Acrobat for encryption are displayed. Document Open Password The [PDF Security - Document Open Password] screen appears. If you select [On] and set a password, the password is required to open the file. You can enter a password up to 32 characters.

223

5 Scan

Permissions The [PDF Security - Permissions] screen appears.


Refer to "[PDF Security - Permissions] Screen" (P.224).

[PDF Security - Permissions] Screen


Allows you to assign access privileges to a file.

1 2 3 4 5

Select [Security Password]. Select [On]. Select [Keyboard], enter the security password, and select [Save]. Likewise, reenter the security password, and select [Save]. Select any item

Security Password
Scan

The [PDF Security - Security Password] screen appears. Security Password allows to assign access privileges to files. The password is required when changing the access privileges or performing unauthorized operations. You can enter a password up to 32 characters. Printing The [Authorization - Printing] screen appears. Configure whether to allow printing the file. If allowed, select the print resolution as well. Changes Allowed The [Authorization - Changes Allowed] screen appears. Configure whether to allow changing the file contents such as inserting pages or adding notes. Allow Contents Copying and Extraction The [Authorization - Allow Contents Copying and Extraction] screen appears. Configure whether to allow copying the file contents such as text and images. Text Editing by Screen Reader The [Text Editing by Screen Reader] screen appears. Configure whether to allow using application software that reads out displayed documents for the visually handicapped.

224

General Scan Features

[File Format - DocuWorks Security] Screen


Allows you to encrypt a Docuworks file with a password, and assign the access privileges for the file operation.

Select any item.

Off The file is not encrypted, and no access privilege is configured. Password (V4 Compatible) Encrypts the file by the 56 bit DES method using a password. Files encrypted by this method can be opened with DocuWorks Ver4.0 or later. Select [Open Password], and set a password.
Scan

Password (V4 Incompatible) Encrypts the file by the 128 bit AES method using password. Files encrypted by this method can be opened with DocuWorks Ver5.0 or later. Select [Open Password], and set a password. Digital Certificate (V4 Incompatible) Encrypts the file by the 128 bit AES method using certificate. Files encrypted by this method can be opened with DocuWorks Ver.5.0 or later. Select [Certificate] to set a certificate.
Important If you encrypt a file using a certificate without Basic Constraints, DocuWorks Ver.5.0.1 and Ver.6.0.1 cannot open the file. To use such certificates, use DocuWorks Ver.5.0.2, or Ver.6.0.2 or later.

Encryption Algorithm Displays the encryption methods. Restricted Operations Select file operations to whom access privileges are assigned. When assigning access privileges, configure [Full Access Password]. Open Password The [DocuWorks Security - Open Password] screen appears. If you select [On] and set a password, the file is encrypted. To open the file, the password is required. The access privileges set in [Restricted Operations] are assigned. You can enter a password up to 32 characters. Full Access Password The [DocuWorks Security - Full Access Password] screen appears. When setting a password, the password is required to change the access privileges set in [Restricted Operations]. You can enter a password up to 32 characters.

225

5 Scan

Certificate The [DocuWorks Security - Certificate] screen appears.


Note This feature is supported only by the ApeosPort series.

Refer to "[DocuWorks Security - Certificate] Screen" (P.226).

[DocuWorks Security - Certificate] Screen


Allows you to select parties to whom the encrypted file is disclosed, and addresses to which privileges are assigned.
Note This feature is supported only by the ApeosPort series.

Grant full access to this document Displayed only when [List all public entries] is selected. Configure certificates of persons who are allowed to change access privileges including editing or operating the file (full access). List all public entries Displays the local address list.
For information on Local Search, refer to "List all public entries" (P.204).

Scan

Search Public Searches recipients in the local address list.


For information on Local Search, refer to "Search Public" (P.204).

Search Network
For information on Remote Search (Directory Svc.), refer to "Search Public" (P.204). For information on Directory Service, refer to "5 Tools" > "Connectivity & Network Setup" > "Remote Authentication/Directory Service" > "LDAP Server/Directory Service Settings" in the Administrator Guide.

Name/E-mail Address/DN Lists names and their e-mail addresses. Certificate Details The [Certificate Details] screen appears. Certificate information including issuer, expiration date, persons to whom the certificate is issued, and the like is displayed. Add Displayed only when [List all public entries] is selected. Enter a recipient number using the numeric keypad to display the recipient on the list.

226

Advanced Settings

Advanced Settings
On the [Advanced Settings] screen under [E-mail], [Scan to Mailbox], [Network Scanning], or [Scan to PC], you can set the image quality features. The following shows the reference section for each feature.
Photographs (Scanning a Color Photograph) ........................................................................... 227 Image Options (Adjusting Scan Density and Image Sharpness).............................................. 228 Image Enhancement (Erasing the Background Color of Documents/Adjusting Contrast)...... 228 Shadow Suppression (Suppressing the Document Background) ............................................. 229 Color Space (Specifying Color Space)..................................................................................... 229

1 2

On the [All Services] screen, select [E-mail], [Scan to Mailbox], [Network Scanning] or [Scan to PC]. Select the [Advanced Settings] tab, and select a feature on the [Advanced Settings] screen.
Scan
Note [Color Space] is not available for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more information, contact our Customer Support Center. A setting must be made in the System Administration mode to activate [Color Space]. For information on the setting procedure, refer to "Color Space (Specifying Color Space)" (P.229) and "5 Tools" > "Scan Service Settings" > "Other Settings" > "Color Space" in the Administrator Guide.

Photographs (Scanning a Color Photograph)


Configure when scanning a color photograph. This feature is only available when [Color Scanning] is set to [Color].
Important You cannot use the document feeder with this feature. When this feature is enabled, the [Shadow Suppression] and [Background Suppression] features cannot be used.

1 2

Select [Photographs]. Select [Enhance Photographs].

227

5 Scan

Image Options (Adjusting Scan Density and Image Sharpness)


You can adjust the scan density and image sharpness.

1 2

Select [Image Options]. Adjust the scan density and sharpness with [ ] and [ ].

Lighten/Darken You can select a scan density level from among 7 levels between [Lighten] and [Darken]. Moving the arrow mark to the upper position makes the scan density lighter, and moving to the lower position makes darker. Sharpness You can select a sharpness level from 5 levels between [Soften] and [Sharpen]. Selecting an upper cell on the bar makes the contours of images sharper, and selecting a lower cell makes softer.
Scan

Image Enhancement (Erasing the Background Color of Documents/ Adjusting Contrast)


This feature allows you to suppress the background color of a document such as newspaper and colored paper. In addition, when [Color Scanning] is set to [Color] or [Grayscale], you can adjust the contrast.

1 2

Select [Image Enhancement]. Select [Background Suppression] and [Contrast]. Adjust contrast with [ ] and [ ].

Background Suppression No Suppression Scans the document backgrounds with no filtering. Auto Suppression When [Color Scanning] is set to [Black & White], the background of a document printed on colored paper, such as newspaper, will be suppressed. When [Color Scanning] is set to [Color], the background of a document printed on white-color paper will be suppressed.

228

Advanced Settings

Contrast You can select a contrast level from 5 levels between [Least Contrast] and [Most Contrast]. Selecting an upper cell on the bar makes the difference between light and dark areas greater; light areas become lighter and dark areas darker. In contrast, selecting a lower cell on the bar makes the difference between light and dark areas smaller.

Shadow Suppression (Suppressing the Document Background)


When you scan a 2-sided document printed on thin paper, this feature allows you to suppress the image and colors on the reverse side of each document page from appearing in the scan image. This feature is enabled only when [Color Scanning] is set to [Color] or [Grayscale].
Important This feature cannot be used with [Photographs].

1 2

Select [Shadow Suppression]. Select [Auto Suppression].


Scan

5
Color Space (Specifying Color Space)
This feature allows you to set the color space.
Note Color Space is available when [Color Scanning] is set to [Color]. To display [Color Space] on the [Layout Adjustment] screen, a setting must be made in the System Administration mode. For more information, refer to "5 Tools" > "Scan Service Settings" > "Other Settings" > "Color Space" in the Administrator Guide.

1 2

Select [Color Space]. Select either [sRGB] or [Device Color Space].

sRGB Uses the color space that conforms to sYCC. Device Color Space Uses advanced color settings.
Note You can find profile data in the CD-ROM of the Driver CD Kit. When [Device Color Space] is selected, the image quality features described below are changed to their defaults. Lighten/Darken, Sharpness, Shadow Suppression, Contrast, Background Suppression When [Color Scanning] is set to [Auto Detect], [sRGB] is applied to color pages of the documents.

229

5 Scan

Layout Adjustment
On the [Layout Adjustment] screen under [E-mail], [Scan to Mailbox], [Network Scanning], or [Scan to PC], you can adjust the scan options. The following shows the reference section for each feature.
Resolution (Specifying a Scanning Resolution) .......................................................................230 2 Sided Scanning (Scanning Both Sides of a Document).........................................................230 Book Scanning (Scanning Facing Pages on Separate Sheets) ..................................................231 Original Size (Specifying a Scan Size) .....................................................................................232 Mixed Sized Originals (Scanning Different Size Documents Simultaneously) .......................232 Edge Erase (Erasing Edges and Margin Shadows in the Document) .......................................233 Reduce/Enlarge (Specifying a Scanning Ratio)........................................................................234

1 2
Scan

On the [All Services] screen, select [E-mail], [Scan to Mailbox], [Network Scanning], or [Scan to PC]. Select the [Layout Adjustment] tab, and then select a feature on the [Layout Adjustment] screen.

5
Resolution (Specifying a Scanning Resolution)
This feature allows you to set the resolution to scan a document. As the value increases, the scan becomes more detailed, but the data size also increases. The scanning and transfer time increases as well.

1 2

Select [Resolution]. Select a resolution.


Note Select from [200 dpi] or [300 dpi] when [MRC High Compression] is set to [On] for PDF, DocuWorks or XPS files on the [File Format] screen. Select from [200 dpi] or [300 dpi] when [Searchable Text] is set to [Searchable] for PDF or DocuWorks files on the [File Format] screen.

2 Sided Scanning (Scanning Both Sides of a Document)


This feature is the same as [2 Sided Scanning] in the [E-mail]/[Scan to Mailbox]/[Network Scanning]/ [Scan to PC] tab. Refer to "2 Sided Scanning (Scanning Both Sides of a Document)" (P.218).

230

Layout Adjustment

Book Scanning (Scanning Facing Pages on Separate Sheets)


This feature allows you to scan facing pages of a document onto separate sheets of paper in page order. This feature is useful if you need to make separate scans for facing pages of bound originals such as a booklet.
Note You cannot use the document feeder with this feature. Use the document glass. Non-standard sized documents will not be separated into two accurately.

1 2

Select [Book Scanning]. Select any item.

Off
Scan

Does not scan as a bound document. Left Page then Right Scans the left page and then the right page of facing pages. Right Page then Left Scans the right page and then the left page of facing pages. Top Page then Bottom Scans the top page and then the bottom page of facing pages. Both Pages Scans both pages in page order. Left Page Only Scans the left page only in page order. You can select this item when [Left Page then Right] or [Right Page then Left] is selected. Right Page Only Scans the right page only in page order. You can select this item when [Left Page then Right] or [Right Page then Left] is selected. Top Page Only Scans the top page only in page order. You can select this item when [Top Page then Bottom] is selected. Bottom Page Only Scans the bottom page only in page order. You can select this item when [Top Page then Bottom] is selected. Binding Edge Erase Erases the shadow from the center section of the document. You can set the binding erase width within the range from 0 to 50 mm in 1 mm increments.

231

5 Scan

Original Size (Specifying a Scan Size)


This feature allows you to set the scan size for a document. Use this feature when a document is a non-standard size, or when you want to scan a document at a size different from the original size.

1 2

Select [Original Size] on the [Layout Adjustment] screen. Select a size.


If you select a non-standard size, specify values for the X and Y directions.

Auto Detect Detects the document size automatically. Automatically-detectable sizes are: Document feeder
Scan

Document glass
B6, B5, B5 , B4, A6, A5, A5 , A4, A4 , A3, 8.5 x 11"

Document size

B5, B5 , B4, A5 , A4, A4 , A3, 8.5 x 11", 8.5 x 11" , 11 x 17"

Important If the document size cannot be detected automatically, a screen to input the document size appears. Note The standard document sizes that can be detected automatically depend on the [Paper Size Settings] in the System Administration mode. For information on the paper size settings, refer to "5 Tools" > "Common Service Settings" > "Other Settings" > "Paper Size Settings" in the Administrator Guide.

Standard Size Select from preset sizes. Variable Size Enter the desired scan size when scanning a non-standard size document or when scanning at a size different from the original document size. You can specify a value in the range of 15 to 432 mm for the scan length (X), and a value in the range of 15 to 297 mm for the scan width (Y), in 1 mm increments. The scales attached on the upper and left edges of the document glass are helpful for you to specify values.
Note If [MRC High Compression] is enabled for a PDF, DocuWorks, or XPS file on the [File Format] Screen, the variable ranges are 50 to 432 mm for the scan length (X) and 50 to 297 mm for the scan width (Y), in 1 mm increments.

Mixed Sized Originals (Scanning Different Size Documents Simultaneously)


When using the document feeder, you can simultaneously scan different size documents with the respective sizes. You can also specify a size to scan different size documents with the same size.
Important When selecting [Color] for [Color Scanning], and [2 Sided] for [2 Sided Scanning], set the [Resolution] to a maximum of [400dpi]. Always load the A5-size documents in portrait orientation. When loading B5 documents together with A3 documents loaded in landscape orientation or A4 documents loaded in portrait orientation, load the B5 documents in portrait orientation.

232

Layout Adjustment

When upper-left corners of the documents are not aligned properly, they may not be scanned correctly. The recommended document size combinations are A4 portrait and A3 landscape, or B5 portrait and B4 landscape. If another combination of document sizes is used, the documents can be fed at an angle and may not be copied properly. Note When [Reduce/Enlarge] is set to [Auto %] and the output size is specified for [Output Size], the scanned data is automatically reduced/enlarged to the specified size. However, since the scanned image is not rotated, the image will be reduced/enlarged to fit the specified size while keeping its orientation. For example, when an A3 landscape original is loaded and the output size is set to A4 portrait, the scanned image is reduced to A5 landscape and printed on A4 portrait paper. If the document size cannot be detected automatically, a screen to input the document size appears.

1 2

Select [Mixed Sized Originals]. Select [On].

Scan

Off Select this item when all documents are of the same size. On When scanning documents of different sizes, the machine automatically detects the size of each document. Original Orientation In order to identify the top of the document, the orientation of the document must be configured. When the scanned document which was loaded [Sideway Images] is viewed on a computer, the document is displayed in the [Upright Images] orientation.
Note If the [Original Orientation] differs from the actual document orientation, then the machine may mistakenly detect the top of the document.

Upright Images Select this item when placing the top edge of the document against the top side of the document glass or document feeder. Sideways Images Select this item when placing the top edge of the document against the left side of the document glass or document feeder.

Edge Erase (Erasing Edges and Margin Shadows in the Document)


When you scan a document with the document cover open or when you scan a book, the edges and center margin of the document may be scanned as black shadows. The Edge Erase feature allows you to erase such shadows.
Note For 2-sided originals, the same edge erase amounts are set for the front and back sides. If you set [Reduce/Enlarge], the edge erase amounts will be reduced or enlarged in proportion to the ratio you configured.

233

5 Scan

1 2 3 4

Select [Edge Erase]. Select [All Edges] or [Parallel Edges]. Use [ ] and [ ] to set the erase widths of top and bottom, left and right, and center of the document. Select [Original Orientation].

All Edges Sets the Edge Erase amounts to 2 mm for the top and bottom, and left and right edges. If you do not want to erase edges, select [Parallel Edges] and then specify 0 mm for the required edges. Parallel Edges Allows you to specify Edge Erase values. Top & Bottom Erases the shadows of top and bottom edges of the document in accordance with the orientation of the loaded document. You can set the edge erase width within the range from 0 to 50 mm in 1 mm increments. Left & Right Erases the shadows of left and right edges of the document in accordance with the orientation of the loaded document. You can set the edge erase width within the range from 0 to 50 mm in 1 mm increments. Center Erases the shadow in the center of facing pages of a bound document. You can set the center erase width within the range from 0 to 50 mm in 1 mm increments. Original Orientation In order to identify the top of the document, the orientation of the document must be configured. When the scanned document which was loaded [Sideway Images] is viewed on a computer, the document is displayed in the [Upright Images] orientation.
Note If the [Original Orientation] differs from the actual document orientation, then the machine may mistakenly detect the top of the document.

Scan

Upright Images Select this item when placing the top edge of the document against the top side of the document glass or document feeder. Sideways Images Select this item when placing the top edge of the document against the left side of the document glass or document feeder.

Reduce/Enlarge (Specifying a Scanning Ratio)


This feature allows you to set the scanning ratio for the document to be scanned.
Note When [Searchable Text] on the [File Format] screen is set to [Searchable], [Reduce/Enlarge] is 100%.

234

Layout Adjustment

1 2

Select [Reduce/Enlarge]. Select or enter a ratio.

Proportional % Select a preset ratio, or enter a value within the range of 25 to 400% in 1% increments. To enter a value, touch the entry box, and then use the numeric keypad or the [ ] and [ ] buttons.
You can change settings to display scanning ratios other than [100%]. For information on how to set, refer to "5 Tools" > "Scan Service Settings" > "Reduce/Enlarge Presets" in the Administrator Guide.

Enter Output Size In [Output Size], select the output size of the scanned document. The machine automatically calculates the scanning ratio based on the selected output size and the original document size.
Note Selecting [Auto %] may generate blank margin areas.

Scan

100 % Scans at the same image size as the original document. Proportional % Selects from preset ratios.

235

5 Scan

E-mail Options/Filing Options


On the [E-mail Options]/[Filing Options] screen under [E-mail], [Scan to Mailbox], [Network Scanning], or [Scan to PC], you can configure the output formats. For more information, refer to below.
Quality/File Size (Specifying an Image Compression Ratio When Scanning) ........................236 Read Receipts (Specifying Read Receipts)...............................................................................237 Split Send (Sending in Sections)...............................................................................................237 File Name (Specifying a Name for the File to be Sent)............................................................238 Reply To (Specifying a Reply Address) ...................................................................................238 File Name Conflict (Setting the Action to be Taken for File Name Conflict)..........................239 Document Name (Specifying a Name for the File to be Saved)...............................................239 Encryption (Sending E-mail Encrypted by S/MIME)...............................................................239 Digital Signature (Sending E-mail with a Digital Signature by S/MIME) ...............................240 Login Name...............................................................................................................................240 Password ...................................................................................................................................240 Meta Data..................................................................................................................................240

1 2

Scan

On the [All Services] screen, select [E-mail], [Scan to Mailbox], [Network Scanning], or [Scan to PC]. Select the [E-mail Options]/[Filing Options] tab, and then select a feature on the [E-mail Options]/[Filing Options] screen.
Note The buttons displayed on the screen depend on the scan service selected on the [All Services] screen. The screen on the right is for the [E-mail] feature.

Quality/File Size (Specifying an Image Compression Ratio When Scanning)


This feature allows you to select an image compression level. The setting is effective when [Color Scanning] is set to [Color] or [Grayscale].

1 2

Select [Quality/File Size]. Adjust Quality/File Size with [


Note

] and [

].

If High-compression Image Kit is installed, and when [PDF High Compression] is selected for [Output Format], three image compression levels are available.

Small File Size The image is saved with low compression. Image quality improves, but the file size increases. Large File Size The image is saved with high compression. Image quality degrades, but the file size decreases.

236

E-mail Options/Filing Options

Read Receipts (Specifying Read Receipts)


This feature allows you to receive read receipts from e-mail recipients when using the [E-mail] feature. This feature is not available unless recipients support the MDN feature.
Note This feature is displayed only when [Tools] > [System Settings] > [E-mail/Internet Fax Settings] > [Read Receipts] > [E-mail Control] is set to [On]. When multiple e-mails are sent using [Split Send], then a read receipt is requested for each e-mail. Read receipts are returned to the address specified in [Reply To], or they are returned to the address specified in [From] if [Reply To] is not set. This feature is only available when the recipient also sets to return read receipts.

1 2

Select [Read Receipts]. Select [On].

Scan

Off Select this item when you do not request read receipts. On Select this when you request read receipts.

Split Send (Sending in Sections)


When you use the [E-mail] feature and the size of the data to be attached is large, you can split the data at page breaks or by a certain data size and then send the data.
For information about the Split Send setting, refer to "5 Tools" > "E-mail/Internet Fax Service Settings" > "E-mail Control" > "Split Send Method", "Maximum Data Size per E-mail", "Maximum Total Job Size", and "Maximum Split Count" in the Administrator Guide.
Note [Split Send] is available only when the [File Format] is set to [PDF - Images Multiple Pages per File], [DocuWorks], [mTIFF - Multiple Pages per File], or [XPS].

1 2

Select [Split Send]. Select any item.

Split by Page The data is split at page breaks. Split by Data Size The data is split by a certain data size.
Note Select this option if your e-mail application supports message/partial.

237

5 Scan

File Name (Specifying a Name for the File to be Sent)


When using the [E-mail] or [Scan to Mailbox] feature, you can specify a name for the document to be sent. Auto Set The file name is "img-xxx-yyy.zzz" (where xxx is the date and time, yyy is the page number, and zzz is the extension). The extension depends on the setting in [File Format]. When [Multi-page TIFF] or [TIFF] is set for [File Format]: tif When [PDF] is set for [File Format]: pdf When [XPS] is set for [File Format]: xps When [DocuWorks] is set for [File Format]: xdw To set the file name

1 2
Scan

Select [File Name]. Enter a name of up to 128 characters using the displayed keyboard.
For information on how to enter characters, refer to "Entering Text" (P.53).
Note When each page is saved as one file, the page number is added to the end of each file name.

Reply To (Specifying a Reply Address)


When using the [E-mail] feature, you can specify the address for reply.

1 2

Select [Reply To]. Enter an address for reply.

[Reply To] box Touching the [Reply To] box displays the keyboard screen allowing you to enter a reply address. Clear Deletes the address entered in [Reply To]. Reply To Me Uses the address specified in [From] as a reply address.
Note This button is enabled only when an address is set for [From] on the [E-mail] screen.

Address Book Allows you to select a reply address from the Address Book.
Refer to "Address Book (Specifying an E-mail Address)" (P.203).

238

E-mail Options/Filing Options

Note

When using a job template, the template name becomes a file name, which cannot be changed.

File Name Conflict (Setting the Action to be Taken for File Name Conflict)
When using the [Scan to PC] feature, you can set the action to be taken when the file name conflicts with another file stored in the destination.

1 2

Select [File Name Conflict]. Select any item.

Do Not Save The job is cancelled and the file is not saved. Rename New File The file name is automatically changed and saved. The machine adds a number (0001 - 9999) to the end of the file name. Overwrite Existing File The existing file is replaced with the new one.
Scan

Document Name (Specifying a Name for the File to be Saved)


When using the [Scan to Mailbox] feature, you can specify a name for the document to be saved. Auto Set The file name is "img-xxx" (where xxx is the date and time). To set the file name

1 2

Select [Document Name]. Enter a name of up to 28 characters using the displayed keyboard.
For information on how to enter characters, refer to "Entering Text" (P.53).

Encryption (Sending E-mail Encrypted by S/MIME)


When using the [E-mail] feature, you can send e-mail encrypted by S/MIME. When sending encrypted e-mail, select an e-mail address associated with a valid certificate from Address Book.
Note This feature is supported only by the ApeosPort series.

Off Sends e-mail without encryption.

239

5 Scan

On Sends e-mail with encryption.

Digital Signature (Sending E-mail with a Digital Signature by S/MIME)


When using the [E-mail] feature, you can send e-mail with a digital signature by S/MIME. Digital Signature allows a recipient to confirm whether contents of the e-mail are changed, or whether the e-mail is sent from the proper sender. To use this feature, the machine's mail address must be linked to a certificate.
Note This feature is supported only by the ApeosPort series.

For information on how to link a certificate to the e-mail address, refer to "5 Tools" > "Setup" > "Add Address Book Entry" > "S/MIME Certificate" in the Administrator Guide.

Off Sends e-mail without a digital signature. On Sends e-mail with a digital signature.
Scan

Login Name
Use this feature to enter the login name for a destination server.
Note This feature is displayed only when [Network Scanning] is selected on the [All Services] screen.

1 2

Select [Login Name]. Enter the login name using the keyboard displayed on the screen.
For information on how to enter characters, refer to "Entering Text" (P.53).

Password
Use this feature to enter the password for a destination server.
Note This feature is displayed only when [Network Scanning] is selected on the [All Services] screen.

1 2

Select [Password]. Enter the password using the keyboard displayed on the screen.
For information on how to enter characters, refer to "Entering Text" (P.53).

Meta Data
Use this feature to change the values of the Document Management Field (DMF) if they are specified for a selected job template.
Note This feature is displayed only when [Network Scanning] is selected on the [All Services] screen.

240

6 Send from Mailbox


This chapter describes the basic mailbox operation and mailbox features. Mailbox Operating Procedure ...................................................................242 Selecting a Mailbox...................................................................................244 Checking/Operating Documents in a Mailbox...........................................245 Checking Document Details .....................................................................247 Printing Documents in a Mailbox ..............................................................248 Configuring/Starting Job Flow...................................................................251

6 Send from Mailbox

Mailbox Operating Procedure


The following shows the reference section for each procedure.
Step 1 Opening the [Send from Mailbox] Screen .....................................................................242 Step 2 Selecting a Mailbox .......................................................................................................242 Step 3 Checking/Selecting Mailbox Documents ......................................................................243 Step 4 Operating Mailbox Documents......................................................................................243

Step 1 Opening the [Send from Mailbox] Screen


Follow the procedure below to open the [Send from Mailbox] screen.
Note Features displayed depend on the machine configuration.

1
Send from Mailbox

Press the <All Services> button.


1 4 7 2 5 8 0 C 3 6 9 #

<All Services> button

Select [Send from Mailbox].

Step 2 Selecting a Mailbox


Selectable mailboxes depend on the settings on the user authentication feature.
For information on selectable mailboxes, refer to "13 Authentication and Account Administration" > "Authentication for Job Flow Sheets and Mailboxes" in the Administrator Guide.

Select a mailbox.
For information on the [Send from Mailbox] screen, refer to "Selecting a Mailbox" (P.244).

242

Mailbox Operating Procedure

Step 3 Checking/Selecting Mailbox Documents

Select a document.
For information on the [Document List] screen, refer to "Checking/Operating Documents in a Mailbox" (P.245).

Step 4 Operating Mailbox Documents


The following shows the reference sections for operations available on the [Send from Mailbox] screen.
Checking Document Details..................................................................................................... 247 Printing Documents in a Mailbox ............................................................................................ 248 Configuring/Starting Job Flow................................................................................................. 251

Send from Mailbox

243

6 Send from Mailbox

Selecting a Mailbox
The following describes the procedure to select a mailbox. Selectable mailboxes depend on the settings on the user authentication feature.
For information on selectable mailboxes, refer to "13 Authentication and Account Administration" > "Authentication for Job Flow Sheets and Mailboxes" in the Administrator Guide.

Select a mailbox on the [Send from Mailbox] screen.


Note Select [ ] to return to the previous screen and select [ ] to move to the next screen. An arrow is displayed next to each mailbox which has a link to a job flow sheet and for which the auto start is set. If you are prompted for a passcode, enter a passcode and select [Enter].

Send from Mailbox

Go to Displays a mailbox at the top when you enter the three-digit mailbox number with the numeric keypad.

244

Checking/Operating Documents in a Mailbox

Checking/Operating Documents in a Mailbox


You can confirm or operate documents stored in a mailbox.

On the [Send from Mailbox] screen, select a mailbox.

Select a document.
Note Select [ ] to return to the previous screen or [ ] to move to the next screen. You can sort documents in ascending or descending order by selecting either [Document Name] or [Stored Date]. At the left of each document name, an icon is displayed to show the document type. : Scanned document : Print document : Document for Store for Polling (Private Mailbox) : Fax document : Internet Fax document Up to 100 documents can be selected separately. You can also select all documents. If you select documents separately, a number appears to the left of the document icon indicating the order in which it was selected. Documents are processed in this order.

Send from Mailbox

Select any item. Refresh Displays the refreshed information. List Lists the documents stored in the mailbox, with their stored dates and pages. Thumbnail Displays the images and names of the documents stored in the mailbox
Important If power supply is cut off immediately after a scanned document is stored in a mailbox, or if the hard disk space is insufficient to display thumbnails, documents in the mailbox may not be displayed in thumbnail view. In that case, display them in list view. The thumbnail view may not available for long documents. If a long document is not displayed in thumbnail view, display it in list view. Characters and images in thumbnail view may not be correctly displayed because they are scaled down from the actual sizes. Note The orientation of an image displayed in thumbnail view depends on which orientation the document was stored in. This feature may not be displayed depending on the machine configuration. Some models require an optional package to use this feature. For more information, contact our Customer Support Center.

245

6 Send from Mailbox

Documents Stored Displays the number of documents stored in the selected mailbox. Select All Selects all the documents in the mailbox. Delete Deletes the selected documents in the mailbox. Document Details Previews the selected document to allow you to check its details.
For more information, refer to "Checking Document Details" (P.247).
Note Some models require an optional package to use this feature. For more information, contact our Customer Support Center.

Job Flow Settings Displays the [Job Flow Settings] screen. This screen allows you to create, link, and execute job flows.
Refer to "Configuring/Starting Job Flow" (P.251).
Note Job flows are not available for print documents. If print documents are included in the selected documents, a job flow can be executed for the documents other than the print documents.

Send from Mailbox

Print Allows you to print the selected documents.


Refer to "Print" (P.248).

Batch Print Allows you to print the selected multiple documents as one document.
Refer to "Batch Print" (P.249).

246

Checking Document Details

Checking Document Details


You can preview a document to check its details.
Note Monochrome images with high gradation levels may appear bluish when previewed. When the Image Log Control feature is used, it may take more time than expected to preview a document. Some models require an optional package to use this feature. For more information, contact our Customer Support Center.

1 2 3

Select a document on the [Mailbox Document List] screen. Click [Document Details]. Select any item.

Send from Mailbox

View Size Select whether to display the whole page or to enlarge the image by 200%.
Note A small document may not be enlarged even if you select [Enlarged View].

Rotation Select an angle to preview the image from [Right 90 degrees], [Left 90 degrees], and [180 degrees]. Change Document Name Allows you to change the document name. Use the keyboard displayed to enter a new name. Current Page Specify a page to preview on the screen.

247

6 Send from Mailbox

Printing Documents in a Mailbox


You can print selected documents in a mailbox.

On the [Document List] screen, select documents.

2
Send from Mailbox

Select [Print] or [Batch Print]. Enter the number of print sets using the numeric keypad, if necessary.
Note When multiple documents are selected, [Batch Print] treats the selected documents as one single document, while [Print] deals them as separate documents.

6
Print

3 4

Select any item. Click [Print].


Note When a document stored by [Save to Mailbox] of a print driver is printed, the settings specified on the control panel or CentreWare Internet Services will override the settings specified on the print driver except the [Multiple-Up], [Skip Blank Page], and print position settings.

Configure the Print settings. Paper Supply Allows you to select paper. 2 Sided Printing Allows you to set 2-sided printing. Output Allows you to set stapling, punching, and a tray where the output is delivered.
Note This feature does not appear for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more information, contact our Customer Support Center.

For examples of the settings of stapling and hole punching, refer to "When stapling/punching holes" (P.249).

Document Details Displays the [Document Details] screen. Select a document from the list to check its preview image.
For details on previewing a document, refer to "Checking Document Details" (P.247).
Note Some models require an optional package to use this feature. For more information, contact our Customer Support Center.

248

Printing Documents in a Mailbox

Print Prints the selected document.

Batch Print
Allows you to set batch printing. You can print multiple documents as one document. Up to 100 documents can be bound in selected order.
Note For 2-sided printing, the last page becomes blank when the total number of printed pages is odd. For printing of multiple documents, a blank page is inserted after the final page of each document. If a different size document is included in multiple documents, it may be printed in improper orientation. [Batch Print] is not available while interrupting another job. [Batch Print] is not available for documents received by fax or Internet Fax, or documents for Store for Polling (Private Mailbox). When the selected documents contain fax or Internet Fax documents, the machine will not print the fax or Internet Fax documents but only the scanned and print documents.

Send from Mailbox

Paper Supply Allows you to select paper. 2 Sided Printing Allows you to set 2-sided printing. Output Allows you to set stapling and punching, and a tray where the output is delivered.
Note This feature does not appear for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more information, contact our Customer Support Center.

For examples of the settings of stapling and hole punching, refer to "When stapling/punching holes" (P.249).

Document Details Displays the [Document Details] screen. Select a document from the list to check its preview image.
For details on previewing a document, refer to "Checking Document Details" (P.247).
Note Some models require an optional package to use this feature. For more information, contact our Customer Support Center.

Print Prints the selected document.

When stapling/punching holes


The following table shows the stapled/punched positions with the example of [1 Staple] for stapling and [2 Holes] for punching for documents stored in a mailbox by specifying [Save to Mailbox] on a print driver and for scanned documents.

249

6 Send from Mailbox

For documents in a mailbox stored by specifying [Save to Mailbox] on a print driver

Original

Report

Report

Report

For scanned documents stored in a mailbox


Important Ensure that the orientation of the document, and the [Original Orientation] setting of [Edge Erase] or the [2 Sided Scanning] setting of [Layout Adjustment] tab, are the same.

6
Original
Report Report

Report

Report
Report
tropeR tropeR

Punching Position

Original Orientation

tropeR

Stapling Position

tropeR

Report

Report

Report Report Report Report Report

Stapling Position

Punching Position

Report

Report

250

Report

Send from Mailbox

Configuring/Starting Job Flow

Configuring/Starting Job Flow


Job flow is a feature that allows you to register transfer settings of scan data or documents received by fax, such as a transfer method and destination, to simplify datatransfer tasks. A job flow operates on documents stored in a mailbox, and starts in either of the following ways: 1) manually or automatically start a job flow when a document is stored in a mailbox, or 2) select a job flow to act on documents stored in a mailbox manually. To automatically start a job flow, you must make a link with a mailbox and a job flow sheet in advance. Documents are automatically processed with the job flow sheet when they are stored in the linked mailbox.
Important If the Authentication feature is not used, a job flow created in [Send from Mailbox] can only be used/edited/duplicated/deleted through the mailbox where the job flow is created. This type of job flow is not displayed on the [Job Flow Sheets] screen. When using the Authentication feature, job flows whose owners are authenticated are displayed on the [Job Flow Sheets] screen.

For information on job flows for the scanned documents, refer to "Job Status" (P.289).

Send from Mailbox

Features that can be registered are listed below. Forward Multiple forwarding recipients can be configured for each forwarding method. FTP (ApeosPort series only) Forwards via FTP. Up to 2 recipients can be specified. SMB (ApeosPort series only) Forwards via SMB. Up to 2 recipients can be specified. Mail (ApeosPort series only) Forwards via E-mail. Up to 100 recipients can be specified. Fax Forwards via fax. Up to 100 recipients can be specified. Internet Fax Forwards via Internet Fax. Up to 100 recipients can be specified. Print Documents in a mailbox can be printed. Some features are unavailable depending on the store type of the document. When your machine is the DocuCentre series Output Input
Store for Polling (Private Mailbox) Scanning Fax document Internet Fax document Print Stored

Print
O O O*2 O X

Fax
O O O O X

Internet Fax*1
O O O

Mail
X X X X

FTP
X X X X X

SMB
X X X X X

251

6 Send from Mailbox

When your machine is the ApeosPort series Output Input


Store for Polling (Private Mailbox) Scanning Fax document Internet Fax document Print Stored
O: X: : *1

Print
O O O*2 O X

Fax
O O O O X

Internet Fax*1
O O O

Mail
O O O

FTP
O O O O

SMB
O O O O X

Available Not available Available depending on the settings in the System Administration mode. When the profile is set to TIFF-S for the Internet Fax Transfer, always load A4 documents in landscape orientation. If you load the documents in portrait orientation, Internet Fax images will be reduced in size. *2 Even if you set to delete documents from a mailbox after a print job is completed, if the USB cable for Fax is pulled out while a document is being printed.

Send from Mailbox

Note

When you forward a monochrome (2-color) document via Mail, FTP or SMB while the Input is set to Document for Store for Polling (Private Mailbox) or Fax document, the recipient will not be able to open the file if [Output Format] of Job Flow is set to [JPEG].

1 2

On the [Document List] screen, select documents. Select [Job Flow Settings].

Select any item.

Auto Start This sets auto start of the job flow for documents stored in the mailbox. The job flow automatically starts when a document is stored. Start Current Job Flow Select documents from the mailbox and select this button to start the job flow linked to this mailbox.
Important After executing the job flow, print the job history report to check the result. For information on the job history report, refer to "5 Tools" > "Common Service Settings" > "Reports" > "Job History Report" in the Administrator Guide.

Cut Link Cancels the link between a mailbox and the linked job flow sheet.

252

Configuring/Starting Job Flow

Create/Change Link Displays the [Link Job Flow Sheet to Mailbox] screen.
Refer to "[Link Job Flow Sheet to Mailbox] Screen" (P.253).

Select Job Flow Sheet When selecting this button while documents are selected, the [Select Job Flow Sheet] screen is displayed.
Refer to "[Select Job Flow Sheet] Screen" (P.254).

[Link Job Flow Sheet to Mailbox] Screen


You can change the link between the mailbox and its job flow sheet.
Note Linking, delinking, and auto start settings can be also performed during the creation of a mailbox.

Select a job flow sheet to link to.


Important Selecting [Save] without selecting a job flow sheet does not set a link. If the selected job flow sheet is already linked, then the link is cancelled. Note Select [ ] to return to the previous screen or [ ] to move to the next screen. You can sort the list in ascending or descending order by touching either [Name] or [Updated]. At the left of the name, an icon showing the target of the job flow is displayed. :Mailbox Document

Send from Mailbox

Select any item. Refresh Refreshes the information. Create Displays the [Create New Job Flow Sheet] screen.
Refer to "5 Tools" > "Setup" > "Create Job Flow Sheet" > "Create" in the Administrator Guide.

Edit/Delete Displays the [Details] screen.


Refer to "5 Tools" > "Setup" > "Create Job Flow Sheet" > "Edit/Delete" in the Administrator Guide.

Search by Name Searches for job flows that partially match the entry. The machine searches through job flow names that were registered upon each job flow creation. The entry can be up to 128 characters long.
For information on how to enter characters, refer to "Entering Text" (P.53).

Search by Keyword Searches for job flows that fully match the entry. The machine searches through keywords that were registered upon each job flow creation. The entry can be up to 12 characters long.
For information on how to enter characters, refer to "Entering Text" (P.53).

253

6 Send from Mailbox

Select Keyword Displays the [Select Keyword] screen. Select a keyword to search for job flows. Job flows that fully match the entry are searched. The machine searches through keywords that were registered upon each job flow creation. Sheet Filtering Displays the [Sheet Filtering] screen allowing you to filter the job flow sheets displayed.
For more information, refer to "[Sheet Filtering] Screen" (P.254).

[Sheet Filtering] Screen


Filters the job flow sheets displayed.
Displayed job flow sheets may vary depending on the user authentication feature. Refer to "13 Authentication and Account Administration" > "Authentication for Job Sheets and Mailboxes" in the Administrator Guide.

1
Send from Mailbox

Select the filtering conditions, then select [Save].


Note The job flows that can be displayed on [Send from Mailbox] are those whose [Target] is [Mailbox], and those stored on the machine.

Owner Allows you to select an owner. Target Allows you to select the target of the job flow sheet.

[Select Job Flow Sheet] Screen


You can select and modify job flow sheets associated with the mailbox.

Select a job flow, and press the <Start> button.


Note Select [ ] to return to the previous screen or [ ] to move to the next screen. You can sort the list in ascending or descending order by pressing either [Name] or [Updated]. At the left of the name, an icon showing the target of the job flow is displayed. :Mailbox Document

Start Executes the selected job flow sheet. Details Displays the [Details] screen.
Refer to "5 Tools" > "Setup" > "Create Job Flow Sheet" > "Edit/Delete" in the Administrator Guide.

Change Settings If the selected job flow sheet setting is editable, the [Change Settings] screen appears. You can temporarily change the settings.

254

Configuring/Starting Job Flow

Search by Name Searches for job flows that partially match the entry. The machine searches through job flow names that were registered upon each job flow creation. The entry can be up to 128 characters long.
For information on how to enter characters, refer to "Entering Text" (P.53).

Search by Keyword Searches for job flows that fully match the entry. The machine searches through keywords that were registered upon each job flow creation. The entry can be up to 12 characters long.
For information on how to enter characters, refer to "Entering Text" (P.53).

Select Keyword Displays the [Select Keyword] screen. Select a keyword to search for job flows. Job flows that fully match the entry are searched. The machine searches through keywords that were registered upon each job flow creation. Sheet Filtering Displays the [Sheet Filtering] screen.
For more information, refer to "[Sheet Filtering] Screen" (P.254).

Send from Mailbox

Job Flow Restrictions


A job flow sheet can be used by only one user, can be shared by multiple users, or can be used for only certain mailboxes.
Job flow restrictions may vary depending on the user authentication feature. For more information, refer to "13 Authentication and Account Administration" > "Authentication for Job Sheets and Mailboxes" in the Administrator Guide.

255

7 Job Flow Sheets


This chapter describes the scanning operation using a job flow sheet created on a network computer and registered in the machine. Job Flow Sheets is a feature that allows you to register transfer settings of scan data, such as a transfer method and destination, to simplify data-transfer tasks.
Note This feature is supported only by the ApeosPort series.

Job Flow Procedure..................................................................................258 Selecting/Changing a Job Flow Sheet......................................................260

7 Job Flow Sheets

Job Flow Procedure


Job flow sheets are categorized into two types according to the target. One type of job flow sheets targets scanned documents, and the other type targets documents stored in mailboxes. This chapter describes the first type of job flow sheets, targeting scanned documents.
For details on the job flow sheets that target documents stored in mailboxes, refer to "Configuring/ Starting Job Flow" (P.251).

This section explains how to select a job flow sheet and execute the job flow. Refer to the following sections for detailed steps.
To create and register a job flow sheet, use a personal computer. Step 1 Opening the [Job Flow Sheets] Screen ..........................................................................258 Step 2 Selecting a Job Flow Sheet ............................................................................................259 Step 3 Confirming/Changing the Job Flow Sheet.....................................................................259 Step 4 Starting the Job Flow Sheet ...........................................................................................259 For information on how to create and register job flow sheets, refer to the manual stored on the CDROM in the Driver CD Kit.

Job Flow Sheets

Step 1 Opening the [Job Flow Sheets] Screen


Follow the procedure below to open the [Job Flow Sheets] screen.

Press the <All Services> button.


1 4 7 2 5 8 0 C 3 6 9 #

<All Services> button

Select [Job Flow Sheets].

258

Job Flow Procedure

Step 2 Selecting a Job Flow Sheet

Select a job flow sheet.


For more information on the [Job Flow Sheets] screen, refer to "Selecting/Changing a Job Flow Sheet" (P.260).

Step 3 Confirming/Changing the Job Flow Sheet

To see the details, select [Details]. To change the settings, select [Change Settings].
For information on checking/changing job flow settings, refer to "Selecting/Changing a Job Flow Sheet" (P.260).

Job Flow Sheets

Step 4 Starting the Job Flow Sheet

1 2

Load the originals.


Note A job flow sheet with application linkage does not require loading documents.

Press the <Start> button.


Important After executing the job flow, be sure to print the job history report to check the result. For information on the job history report, refer to "5 Tools" > "Common Service Settings" > "Reports" > "Job History Report" in the Administrator Guide.

259

7 Job Flow Sheets

Selecting/Changing a Job Flow Sheet


To use a job flow sheet whose target is scanned documents from a network computer with CentreWare EasyOperator, select the job flow sheet from this list.
Important If characters not supported by the machine are used in the name or description of a job flow sheet, the characters will not be displayed or will be garbled on the screen. For information on characters that can be used in the names or descriptions of job flow sheets, refer to "15 Appendix" > "Notes and Restrictions" > "Notes and Restrictions on the Use of the Machine" in the Administrator Guide. Note To communicate with network computers, the SOAP port must be enabled on the machine. A job flow sheet created on a network computer can be deleted, but cannot be changed or duplicated. Note, however, change-permitted items can be used by making a temporary change to them.

For information on how to enable the port, refer to "5 Tools" > "Connectivity & Network Setup" > "Port Settings" in the Administrator Guide.

Select a job flow sheet.


Note Displayed job flow sheets may vary depending on the user authentication feature. For more information, refer to "13 Authentication and Account Administration" > "Authentication for Job Sheets and Mailboxes" > "Overview" > "Job Flow Sheet Types and Overview" in the Administrator Guide. Select [ ] to return to the previous screen or [ ] to move to the next screen. You can sort the list in ascending or descending order by selecting either [Name] or [Last Updated].

Job Flow Sheets

7
Refresh

Displays refreshed information. Details The [Details] screen appears. Allows you to confirm the details of a job flow such as the name, last update and save location. When you select [Details...], the whole text of the description which was registered when creating the job flow sheet is displayed. Change Settings Displays the [Change Settings] screen. Allows you to change the job flow settings.
Refer to "[Change Settings] Screen" (P.261).

Search by Name Searches for job flows that partially match the entry. The machine searches through job flow names that were registered upon each job flow creation. The entry can be up to 128 characters long. Search by Keyword Searches for job flows that fully match the entry. The machine searches through keywords that were registered upon each job flow creation. The entry can be up to 12 characters long.

260

Selecting/Changing a Job Flow Sheet

Select Keyword Displays the [Select Keyword] screen. Select a keyword registered in the system settings to search for job flows. Job flows that fully match the entry are searched. The machine searches through keywords that were registered upon each job flow creation. Sheet Filtering Displays the [Sheet Filtering] screen allowing you to filter the job flow sheets displayed.
For more information, refer to "[Sheet Filtering] Screen" (P.262).

[Change Settings] Screen

Select a group to be changed from [Group of Items].

Job Flow Sheets

2 3

Select the item to be changed.


Note A triangle icon appears at the left of each mandatory item.

Select any item.

7
Items The items set for the job flow sheet. Current Settings The values set for the job flow sheet. Previous Group Displays the items of the previous group. Next Group Displays the items of the next group. Add E-mail Recipient Adds recipients for the e-mail.

261

7 Job Flow Sheets

[Sheet Filtering] Screen


Filters the job flow sheets displayed. Job flow sheets displayed on the screen depend on the settings of the Authentication feature.
Displayed job flow sheets may vary depending on the user authentication feature. For more information, refer to "13 Authentication and Account Administration" > "Authentication for Job Sheets and Mailboxes" > "Overview" > "Job Flow Sheet Types and Overview" in the Administrator Guide.

Select the filtering conditions, then select [Save].

Owner Select an owner of job flow sheets displayed on the screen. Target Select a target for the job flow sheet.
Note Job flow sheets whose [Job Flow Target] is [Mailbox] can be used only from Send from Mailbox.

Job Flow Sheets

262

8 Stored Programming
This chapter describes the Stored Programming feature that enables you to store customized job settings. Stored Programming Overview.................................................................264 Registering/Deleting/Renaming Stored Programs....................................265 Calling a Stored Program .........................................................................270

8 Stored Programming

Stored Programming Overview


This feature allows you to store settings that you expect to use frequently and call them with a single button operation. You can also assign a screen to a stored program button, to use the button as a short-cut to the screen. A stored program can store not only settings of a feature, but a flow of settings configured on multiple screens. For example, this feature is available when you want to record a procedure starting from pressing the <Machine Status> button, to displaying the [Report Job] screen to print a job history report. In addition, while Build Job is running, this feature can be used for the remaining document stacks.
For information on Build Job, refer to "Build Job (Processing Documents Scanned with Different Settings as One Job)" (P.118).

The following shows the reference section for each feature.


Registering/Deleting/Renaming Stored Programs ....................................................................265 Calling a Stored Program..........................................................................................................270

Stored Programming

264

Registering/Deleting/Renaming Stored Programs

Registering/Deleting/Renaming Stored Programs


The [Stored Programming] screen allows you to register and delete stored programs.
Important When registering a stored program to select paper size or type loaded on the bypass tray, register both the paper size and the paper type. If only the paper size or type is registered, the stored program may not be called properly. If any of the following operations is performed while a stored program is being registered, the stored program may not be registered or may not work correctly. - Removing or inserting a paper tray - Loading or reloading paper on the bypass tray If any of the following operations is performed after a stored program registration, the registered stored program may not be called properly. - If the stored program has the Watermark feature and the Watermark value is changed. - If any registered feature becomes disabled due to its value change under System Settings. - If the stored program has an operation for a mailbox and the mailbox passcode is changed. Note Any services that are set using the following cannot be registered: System Settings, [Browse...] under Scan to PC, Job Flow Sheets, Network Scanning, Address Book, and other stored programs. A stored program registration is cancelled when the <Interrupt> button is pressed, the Auto Clear feature causes a time-out, or a popup window (such as a paper jam window) appears.

Press the <All Services> button.


1 4 7 2 5 8 0 C 3 6 9 #

Stored Programming

<All Services> button

Select [Setup].

Select [Stored Programming].

265

8 Stored Programming

Select the feature.

Store Register a stored program.


Refer to "Registering Stored Programs" (P.266).

Store Build Job Register a stored program for Build Job.


Refer to "Registering Stored Programs for Build Job" (P.267).

Delete Deletes a stored program.


Stored Programming
Refer to "Deleting Stored Programs" (P.268).

Enter/Change Name Enter or change a stored program name.


Refer to "Entering/Changing a Stored Program Name" (P.268).

Assign/Change Icon Configure an icon for a registered stored program.


Refer to "Assigning/Changing Icons for Stored Programs" (P.269).

Registering Stored Programs


Up to 100 actions can be registered with one stored program. Up to 40 stored programs can be registered in the machine. Actions registered in stored programs No.1 to 20 can also be performed by using one touch buttons <M01> to <M20>. (This feature is available only when the optional Fax service is installed). The following is the procedure for registering actions with stored programs.
Important If registered settings such as tray paper size and comments, or default values in the system settings are changed after a stored program is registered, then the program's content also changes. Note Services using System Settings, Job Flow Sheet, Network Scanning, or Address Book cannot be registered. The registering procedure for a stored program is cancelled when the <Interrupt> button is pressed, the Auto Clear feature causes a time-out, or a popup window (paper jam, etc.) appears.

266

Registering/Deleting/Renaming Stored Programs

1 2

Select [Store]. Select the number to register.


Note Once a job is stored to a button, it cannot be overwritten. Select [ ] to return to the previous screen or [ ] to move to the next screen.

Set the feature you want to register.


Note The machine produces an audible tone while a stored program is registered. Press the <Interrupt> button to cancel registration.

You can change the volume of the sound that notifies of stored program registration. For information on the settings, refer to "5 Tools" > "Common Service Settings" > "Audio Tones" > "Stored Programming Tone" in the Administrator Guide.

Press the <Start> button or <Clear All> button.


Note If no name is entered for a registered stored program, the name becomes "No Name".

For information on how to name a registered stored program, refer to "Entering/Changing a Stored Program Name" (P.268).

Stored Programming

Registering Stored Programs for Build Job


Up to 100 actions can be registered with one stored program for Build Job. Up to 40 stored programs can be registered in the machine. The following is the procedure for registering actions with stored programs.

1 2

Select [Store Build Job]. Select a number to register a stored program.


Note Once a job is stored to a button, it cannot be overwritten. Select [ ] to return to the previous screen or [ ] to move to the next screen.

Set the feature you want to register.


Note The machine produces an audible tone while a stored program is registered. Press the <Interrupt> button to cancel registration.

You can change the volume of the sound that notifies of stored program registration. For information on the settings, refer to "5 Tools" > "Common Service Settings" > "Audio Tones" > "Stored Programming Tone" in the Administrator Guide.

Press the <Start> button or <Clear All> button.


Note At the left of a stored program for Build Job on the list, the icon is displayed. If no name is entered for a registered stored program, the name becomes No Name.

For information on how to name a registered stored program, refer to "Entering/Changing a Stored Program Name" (P.268).

267

8 Stored Programming

Deleting Stored Programs


The following is the procedure for deleting stored programs.

1 2

Select [Delete]. Select the number to delete.


Note Select [ ] to return to the previous screen or [ ] to move to the next screen.

Select [Delete].

Delete Deletes the stored program.


Note Deleted stored programs cannot be restored.

Stored Programming

Cancel Cancels deleting the stored program.

Entering/Changing a Stored Program Name


The following is the procedure for entering or changing the name of a stored program. Up to 36 characters are allowed for a stored program's name.
For information on how to enter characters, refer to "Entering Text" (P.53).

8
1 2

Select [Enter/Change Name]. Select the number to register or change a name.


Note Select [ ] to return to the previous screen or [ ] to move to the next screen.

Enter a name, and select [Save].

268

Registering/Deleting/Renaming Stored Programs

Assigning/Changing Icons for Stored Programs


The following is the procedure for assigning or changing an icon of a stored program. 12 icons are available.

1 2

Select [Assign/Change Icon]. Select the number to assign or change an icon.


Note Select [ ] to return to the previous screen or [ ] to move to the next screen.

Select an icon, and select [Save].

Stored Programming

No Icon No icon is assigned to a registered stored program. Icon Select an icon according to the content of the registered stored program.

269

8 Stored Programming

Calling a Stored Program


This describes the procedure for calling a stored program. When calling a specified stored program, the last screen shown when you registered the stored programming appears.

Press the <All Services> button.


1 4 7 2 5 8 0 C 3 6 9 #

<All Services> button

2
Stored Programming

Select [Stored Programming].

Select the number of a stored program containing the features you want to use.
Note You can only select registered numbers. Select [ ] to return to the previous screen or [ ] to move to the next screen.

4 5

After the stored program is called, select other features if necessary. Press the <Start> button.
1 4 7 2 5 8 0 C 3 6 9 #

<Start> button

270

Calling a Stored Program

Calling a Stored Program for Build Job


You can call a stored program for Build Job on the [Copy] screen displayed while Build Job is running.

1 2 3 4

Select [Change Settings...]. Select the [Job Assembly] tab. Select [Stored Programming]. Select a number of a stored program containing the features you want to use.
Note You can only select registered numbers.

Stored Programming

271

9 Web Applications
This chapter describes the operations when the Remote Access Kit (optional) is installed.
Note This feature is supported only by the ApeosPort series.

Web Applications ......................................................................................274 Accessing Web Applications.....................................................................275 Accessing Using Buttons Registered on the All Services Screen ............276

9 Web Applications

Web Applications
You can access web applications to store scanned document in folders or print stored files. The machine offers the following features: Allows you to access web applications from the machine, and displays the web application screen on the machine Allows you to store the scanned document directly in a web application folder Allows you to print a file that is stored on a server directly
Note The web applications that can be displayed on the machine are those which are compatible with the machine. You cannot access website on the Internet.

To access the web application on the machine, you need to configure the settings in advance. For information on web application settings, refer to "5 Tools" > "Web Applications Service Setup" in the Administrator Guide.

Web Applications

274

Accessing Web Applications

Accessing Web Applications


To access web applications, follow the procedure below. An access destination must be registered in advance.
For information on how to register an access destination, refer to "5 Tools" > "Web Applications Service Settings" > "Server Setup" in the Administrator Guide.

Press the <All Services> button.


1 4 7 2 5 8 0 C 3 6 9 #

<All Services> button

Select [Web Applications].


Note If Auto Jump Destination has been set, the machine can access the remote service.

Web Applications

Select an access destination.

Select [Open] on the pop-up menu displayed.

Open Accesses the specified remote service. Details Displays the information of the specified remote service. Close Menu Hides the pop-up menu.

275

9 Web Applications

Accessing Using Buttons Registered on the All Services Screen


The following describes how to register frequently used web applications on the All Services screen as buttons, and access the applications by simply selecting the buttons.
For information on how to register buttons on the All Services screen, refer to "5 Tools" > "Common Service Settings" > "Screen/Button Settings" > "All Services" in the Administrator Guide.

Press the <All Services> button.


1 4 7 2 5 8 0 C 3 6 9 #

<All Services> button

Select [Head Office] registered on the [All Services] screen.


Note In this example, an access destination named [Head Office] is registered in the position of Job Flow Sheets. You can place the button anywhere on the screen.

Web Applications

276

10 Media Print (Text and Photos)


This chapter describes the basic procedures and features of Media Print - Text and Media Print - Photos when the Media Print Kit (optional) and the USB Memory Print Kit (optional) are installed. Overview of Media Print............................................................................278 Components and their Functions..............................................................281 Inserting and Ejecting Media ....................................................................282 Selecting Files ..........................................................................................283 Setting the Printing Options ......................................................................285

10 Media Print (Text and Photos)

Overview of Media Print


When the Media Print Kit (optional) is installed on the machine, the machine can directly import and print image data (Exif) taken with a digital camera and document files (PDF, TIFF, XPS). This feature is called the Media Print feature. If a USB memory is connected to the machine, the data stored in the USB memory can also be printed.
Important Data stored in media, such as SmartMedia or CompactFlash, may be lost or damaged for the following reasons. Make sure to back up data in media before use. - When ejecting media, switching the power off/on, disconnecting/connecting USB cables by methods other than described in this guide. - When receiving the effect of electrical noise or an electrical discharge - When a failure occurs or repairing - When receiving damage resulting from a natural calamity We assume no responsibility for any direct and indirect damages arising from or caused by such data loss. Note "Exif" is a file format that embeds information required to print the image data taken with a digital camera.

The Media Print feature includes the Media Print - Photos mode that prints data stored with the standard digital camera format, as well as the Media Print - Text mode that prints data stored with the text format. It also includes index printing that prints a list of files imported with the Media Print - Photos mode and the Media Print - Text mode.

10

Media Print (Text and Photos)

Supported Media and File Formats


The machine supports only CompactFlash. To use media other than CompactFlash, insert the media into a CompactFlash adapter.
Note You must purchase the media and a CompactFlash adapter separately.

The following media and file formats can be used. Supported Media
Smart Media CompactFlash CompactFlash (MicroDrive) SD Card Memory Stick xD-Picture Card

Supported File Format Media Print - Photos


JPEG files TIFF files Supports DCF1.0 (Exif2.0, Exif2.1, Exif2.2) JPEG/TIFF files

Media Print - Text


PDF files Extension: pdf, PDF 1.3 or later TIFF files Extension: tif, Grayscale 4 bit/8bit uncompressed, 8bit/ 24 bit JPEG compressed, MH/MMR compressed XPS files Extension: xps

Important MagicGate Memory Stick cannot be used. Do not store image files and document files in a single medium. If the medium contains more than 900 folders, you may not be able to confirm them correctly. In the Media Print -Text mode, PDF files or TIFF files cannot be printed if they are stored in folders. PDF files saved on Mac OS cannot be displayed and printed on the screen. If a file name contains characters that are not supported by the machine, the file name will not be displayed on the screen.

278

Overview of Media Print

Note

In the Media Print - Photos mode, up to 8 characters can be recognized as a file name. In the Media Print - Text mode, up to 255 characters can be recognized. If the name exceeds 100 characters, the data is displayed excluding the file name. Up to 900 files can be processed with the Media Print feature. Use media formatted with digital cameras or computers (FAT 12, 16, 32 only).

Notes and Restrictions


The following notes and restrictions apply on use of the Media Print feature. Use the Media Print feature with the medium inserted into the Memory Card Reader. Otherwise, an error code (016-794/116-212) is displayed. Image files other than files in Exif format (JPEG/TIFF files created on computers) cannot be printed. Take note that once an image in Exif format is edited or saved on a computer, the Exif format is erased. If the media fails, the process is terminated within a few minutes, and an error message is displayed. Be sure to eject the media before switching off the machine. Be sure to wait until printing completes and then eject the media by following the procedure described in this guide. Be sure to back up data in media before use. Printing data may take from a few minutes to several tens of minutes, depending on the volume or quantity of files on the media. Depending on the type of adaptor, the Memory Card Reader may not be able to read the data. For more information, contact our Customer Support Center. To store image data on a media card, use image data formatted with a digital camera. To store document files on a media card, use document files formatted with a computer. - In the Media Print - Photos mode, files are printed only from the DCF directory located directly under the DCIM directory. Only a file name or folder name with 8 characters in DCF format can be recognized. - In the Media Print - Text mode, files are printed only from the directory located directly under. A file name or folder name can be recognized even if exceeding 8 characters. When printing a PDF file using Media Print, [PDF Bridge] is selected regardless of the [Print Processing Mode] setting in [PDF Direct Print].
For more information on Print Processing Mode, refer to "15 Appendix" > "PDF Direct Print" > "PDF Direct Print Settings" in the Administrator Guide.

Media Print (Text and Photos)

10

When using the Memory Card Reader, be sure to connect the USB cable of the Memory Card Reader to the machine before switching the machine on. When the <Access> indicator of the Memory Card Reader is lit, do not press the <CompactFlash Eject> button, disconnect the USB cable, or switch the machine off. The data in the media may become damaged. Do not connect multiple USB memories to the machine simultaneously. The machine does not support all types of USB memory. (Example: USB memory with the encryption feature or with multiple partitions is not supported.) When changing from the Memory Card Reader to USB memory, be sure to switch the machine off and then on again.

279

10 Media Print (Text and Photos)

Do not use media if it stores data that cannot be backed up, such as music data with the copyright protection function. We assume no responsibility for any direct and indirect damages arising from or caused by such data loss.

10

Media Print (Text and Photos)

280

Components and their Functions

Components and their Functions

No.
1 2 3

Component
<Access> indicator <CompactFlash Eject> button CompactFlash slot

Function
Lights when the medium is accessed. Press this button to eject a CompactFlash card. The button pops up when a CompactFlash card is inserted. Insert a CompactFlash card here.

Media Print (Text and Photos)

10

281

10 Media Print (Text and Photos)

Inserting and Ejecting Media


This section describes how to insert and eject media.

Inserting Media

Insert a CompactFlash card into the CompactFlash slot of the Memory Card Reader, with the side with the insertion mark, such as , facing up.

The <CompactFlash Eject> button pops up when a CompactFlash card is inserted correctly. To print, refer to "Selecting Files" (P. 275), and "Setting the Printing Options" (P. 277). After printing, refer to "Ejecting Media" (P. 274), and eject the media.
Media Print (Text and Photos)

Ejecting Media
Before ejecting media, make sure that the <Access> indicator of the Memory Card Reader is not lit.
Important When the <Access> indicator of the Memory Card Reader is lit, do not press the <CompactFlash Eject> button, disconnect the USB cable, or switch the machine off. The data in the media may become damaged.

10
1

Press the <CompactFlash Eject> button (1), and then remove the CompactFlash card (2).

282

Selecting Files

Selecting Files
You can select files using any of the following three methods. Selecting all files. Selecting the desired files from the [Select From List] screen. You can select up to 100 files in the Media Print - Photos mode, or up to 32 files in the Media Print - Text mode, simultaneously. Selecting with index numbers (one or a range)

1 2

Press the <All Services> button. Select [Media Print - Text] or [Media Print Photos]. Media importing starts. While the files are being imported, the <Access> indicator lights. After the files are imported, the <Access> indicator goes off.
Note The file is imported in the mode selected here. Index numbers from 001 to 900 automatically are assigned to the files imported.

Media Print (Text and Photos)

After the files are imported, select files with either [Select Pictures] or [Select Documents].
Note The screen on the right is an example when [Media Print - Photos] is selected.

After selecting files to be printed, set the printing options.


For more information on the printing options, refer to "Setting the Printing Options" (P.285).
Note On the pop-up menu displayed when selecting files, you can cancel the selection or display details. Select [ ] to return to the previous screen or [ ] to move to the next screen.

10

Select All Selects all image data or document files to be printed.


Note Depending on the types of files stored on the media or the directory configuration, not all of the files selected may be printed.

Select From List Displays the [Select From List] screen.


Refer to "[Select From List] Screen" (P.284).

Select Range Specify the range to be printed using [ ] and [ ] in [First picture] and [Last picture].
Note Select [Select From List] to display a list of files, and reference the list when selecting the range.

283

10 Media Print (Text and Photos)

Index Print Applies the numbers automatically assigned to the selected files, and prints them in a list.
For more information on Index Print, refer to "Index Print" (P.287).

[Select From List] Screen


You can select the desired files from a list of files.
Note The screen on the right is an example when [Media Print - Photos] is selected Select [ ] to return to the previous screen or [ ] to move to the next screen. A check mark is inserted in the check box next to each file selected. Touch a file selected (highlighted) to deselect it.

List Displays the file names, and the date and time that the files were registered.
Note You can sort the list in ascending or descending order by selecting either [(No.) or [Date & Time]. ], [Name],

10

Media Print (Text and Photos)

Thumbnail Displays a list of the images and names of the files.


Note The thumbnail view may not be available for some files. If a file is not displayed in thumbnail view, display it in List view or in Index Print. Characters and images may not be correctly displayed in thumbnail view because they are reduced in size. Important An image is displayed in thumbnail view in the orientation with which the document was stored. This feature may not be displayed depending on the machine configuration. Some models require an optional package to use this feature. For more information, contact our Customer Support Center.

Details Displays detailed information on the file selected (highlighted). To print the file, select [Print] on the [Details] screen. Deselect All Deselects all selected files. Select All Selects all files.

284

Setting the Printing Options

Setting the Printing Options


You can set the printing options on the [Media Print Text] or [Media Print Photos], and [Advanced Settings] tabs. To display a list of the setting values, press the <Review> button on the control panel.

Media Print - Photos

Tab
Media Print Photos Quantity

Item

Setting Value
Specify the print quantity within the range of 1 - 999, using the numeric keypad. [Color], [Black & White] Trays 1 - 5
Note Any of the following sizes of paper must be loaded in the selected tray: [SRA3], [A3], [B4], [A4], [A4 ], [B5], [B5 ], [8.5 x 11"], [8.5 x 11" ], [Post card] \tIf the tray to be used is not displayed, select [More], and on the screen displayed, select the desired tray.

Output Color Paper Supply

Media Print (Text and Photos)

If you select [More] and then [Tray (Bypass)], [Paper Size] and [Paper Type] are selectable. Paper Size [SRA3], [A3], [B4], [A4], [A4 ], [B5], [B5 ], [8.5 x 11"], [8.5 x 11" ], [Post card] Paper Type Select the paper type to be used from the list displayed. 2 Sided Printing Output Photo Size [1 Sided], [2 Sided, Flip on Long Edge], [2 Sided, Flip on Short Edge] Full Page Print 5 x 7" Select [More] and then select [Output Size] on the screen displayed, and you can select the next size. [3.5 x 5"], [5 x 7"], [100 x 148mm], [A4], [8.5 x 11"]
Note According to the print paper size and the size selected here, only the photos fitting on one sheet of paper are aligned and printed. If you select [1 Picture per Page], one sheet of paper is used for one file and printed.

10

3 Pictures per Page Select [More] and then select [Pictures per Page] on the screen displayed, and you can select the next quantity. [2 Pictures], [3 Pictures (Center)], [3 Pictures (Left)], [4 Pictures], [6 Pictures], [8 Pictures] Advanced settings Bitmap Smoothing [Off], [On]

285

10 Media Print (Text and Photos)

Note

When selecting a paper size smaller than the image size, the image automatically is reduced. When selecting a paper size larger than the image size, the image is printed at its original size.

Media Print - Text

Tab
Media Print Text Quantity

Item

Setting Value
Specify the print quantity within the range of 1 - 999, using the numeric keypad. [Color], [Black & White] Auto Paper Select, Trays 1 - 5
Note Select [Auto] or a tray that holds any of the followings sizes of paper: [A3], [B4], [A4], [A4 ], [B5], [B5 ], [A5], [A5 ], [8.5 x 11"], [8.5 x 11" ], [8.5 x 14"], [11 x 17"] \tWhen selecting [Auto], a paper tray of the size of the document is selected automatically, and the document is printed at its original size. \tWhen the tray to be used is not displayed, select [More], and select the tray on the screen displayed.

Output Color Paper Supply

10

Media Print (Text and Photos)


Advanced settings
Note

If you select [More] and then [Tray (Bypass)], [Paper Size] and [Paper Type] are selectable. Paper Size [A3], [B4], [A4], [A4 ], [B5], [B5 ], [A5], [A5 ], [8.5 x 11"], [8.5 x 11" ], [8 x 14"], [11 x 17"] Paper Type Select the paper type to be used from the list. 2 Sided Printing Output [1 Sided], [2 Sided, Flip on Long Edge], [2 Sided, Flip on Short Edge] Specify the stapled/punched positions. To specify a position not displayed on the screen, select [Details].
Important\tIf you select and print multiple documents, all of the documents are stapled together. To staple only one document, print only that document.

Multiple-Up Bitmap Smoothing

[Off], [2 Pages Up], [4 Pages Up] [Off], [On]

When selecting a paper size smaller than the size set for the document, the document automatically is reduced. When selecting a paper size larger than the document size, the document is printed at its original size.

286

Setting the Printing Options

Index Print
For the Media Print - Photos mode, a list of 30 x 40mm reduced images, plus the numbers, the file names, and the dates the images were exported to the media are printed. For the Media Print - Text mode, the file names (maximum 2 lines and 100 characters), the dates the documents were exported to the media, and the total file quantity are printed. For Index Print, only the print quantity (in one-set units within the range of 1 - 999 sets) can be set. Items other than the print quantity are printed with the settings displayed on the screen (Media Print Photos or Media Print Text settings prior to executing Index Print mode). To change the settings, deselect [Index Print], change the settings, and then execute Index Print. The setting values return to the default values if the machine is restarted. When selecting [Index Print], the following items are restricted. Setting Item
Output Color Paper Supply

Value
For the Media Print - Text mode Only [Black & White] Trays 1 - 5
Note Any of the following sizes of paper must be loaded in the selected tray: [A3], [A4], [A4 ], [8.5 x 11"], or [8.5 x 11" ]

Media Print (Text and Photos)

Output Photo Size Multiple-Up

Not available Not available

10

287

11 Job Status
This chapter describes the job status feature. Job Status Overview.................................................................................290 Checking Current/Pending Jobs ...............................................................291 Checking Completed Jobs........................................................................292 Printing and Deleting Stored Documents..................................................293 Printing Pending Jobs...............................................................................304 Handling Error Terminations.....................................................................305

11 Job Status

Job Status Overview


The job status feature allows you to check current, pending, and completed jobs. You can also cancel printing and print pending jobs.

Press the <Job Status> button.


1 4 7 2 5 8 0 C 3 6 9 #

<Job Status> button

You can do the following on the [Job Status] screen. Checking Current/Pending Jobs Lists current and pending jobs, and displays their details. Also allows you to cancel current or pending jobs.
For more information, refer to "Checking Current/Pending Jobs" (P.291).

Checking Completed Jobs Displays the status of completed jobs. Also displays their details.
For more information, refer to "Checking Completed Jobs" (P.292).

Checking Stored Documents Prints or deletes documents stored using the Charge Print, Secure Print, Private Charge Print, Sample Set, and Delayed Print features.
For more information, refer to "Printing and Deleting Stored Documents" (P.293).

11

Job Status

290

Checking Current/Pending Jobs

Checking Current/Pending Jobs


This section describes how to check current or pending jobs. On the status screen, you can cancel or preferentially execute jobs.

1 2

Press the <Job Status> button. Select the job to be cancelled or preferentially executed.
Note Select [ ] to return to the previous screen or [ ] to move to the next screen. From the pull-down menu, you can select and display the types of jobs ([All Jobs], [Printer & Print from Mailbox Jobs], [Scan, Fax, & Internet Fax Jobs], [Job Flow & Auto File Transfer Jobs]).

Select [Cancel] or [Promote Job].

Print Waiting Jobs Select this to print the jobs that are waiting to be output.
For more information, refer to "Printing Pending Jobs" (P.304).

Job Status

Cancel Cancels the current or pending job. Promote Job Preferentially executes the selected job. A [ ] will be marked on the [Status] of the job set to [Promote Job]. Stop Stops the job processing. Last Original Select this to end scanning of documents. The job is then executed. Next Original Select this when you have another document to scan. Start Resumes the stopped job.

11

291

11 Job Status

Checking Completed Jobs


This section describes how to check completed jobs. You can check whether a job has been completed successfully. Also, you can select a job to see the details.

1 2

Press the <Job Status> button. Select the [Completed Jobs] tab.
Note Select [ ] to return to the previous screen or [ ] to move to the next screen. From the pull-down menu, you can select and display the types of jobs ([All Jobs], [Printer & Print from Mailbox Jobs], [Scan, Fax, & Internet Fax Jobs], [Job Flow & Auto File Transfer Jobs]).

3 4

Select a job to see the details. Select [Close] after the check.

Group Parent Jobs Allows you to check the list or history of related jobs (such as job flow jobs). Show Children Jobs Displays a job list. Print this Job History Report Prints the job results to allow you to check the job history. Print this Job Report Prints a job status information report.
Job Status

11

292

Printing and Deleting Stored Documents

Printing and Deleting Stored Documents


This section describes how to print or delete documents stored with the Secure Print or Sample Set feature, or stored with the charge print receiving control. The [Job Status] screen allows you to print or delete stored documents. The following shows the reference section for each item.
Secure Print .............................................................................................................................. 293 Sample Set................................................................................................................................ 295 Delayed Print............................................................................................................................ 296 Charge Print.............................................................................................................................. 298 Private Charge Print ................................................................................................................. 300 Public Mailbox ......................................................................................................................... 302 Undelivered Faxes.................................................................................................................... 303

1 2

Press the <Job Status> button. Select the [Secure Print Jobs & More] tab.
The buttons displayed on the screen vary depending on the settings related to the Private Charge Print feature. For more information, refer to "5 Tools" > "Authentication/Security Settings" > "Authentication" > "Charge/Private Print Settings" > in the Administrator Guide.

Secure Print
This feature allows you to temporarily store print data in the machine to print it with the print command from the machine. This section describes how to print or delete documents stored with the Secure Print feature.
For information on secure print operations, refer to the print driver's help.
Note This feature is not displayed when [Receive Control] under [Charge/Private Print Settings] is set to either of the followings: [According to Print Account] is selected, and [Job Login Success] is set to [Save in Private Print] [Save in Private Print] is selected.

Job Status

11

When you have selected [Save in Private Charge Print] or [Save in Charge Print] for [Receive Control] under [Charge/Private Print Settings], jobs will not be saved in [Secure Print] under [Secure Print Jobs & More] even if you select [Secure Print] on the print driver. For more information, refer to "5 Tools" > "Authentication/Security Settings" > "Authentication" > "Charge/Private Print Settings" in the Administrator Guide.

Select [Secure Print].

293

11 Job Status

Select the user to be checked, and select [Document List].


Note Select [Refresh] to display the updated information Select [ ] to return to the previous screen or [ ] to move to the next screen. Entering a 3-digit billing ID with the numeric keypad specifies the user directly.

Enter the passcode, and select [Confirm].


Note If no passcode is assigned, the passcode entry screen will not appear.

4 5 6

Select the document to be printed or deleted. When printing, specify the number of print using the numeric keypad. Select any item. Select All Selects all documents. To deselect all the documents, select this button again.

11

Job Status

Delete Deletes the selected document.


Note If documents with the same Billing ID are all deleted, the Billing ID will be deleted.

Refer to "When [Delete] is Selected" (P.294).

Print Prints the selected document.


Refer to "When [Print] is Selected" (P.295).

When [Delete] is Selected

Select [Delete]. Delete Deletes the document.


Important Once the document is deleted, it cannot be restored.

Cancel Cancels deleting the document.

294

Printing and Deleting Stored Documents

When [Print] is Selected

Select what to do with the document after printing.

Print and Delete Starts printing the document. After printing, deletes the document. Print and Save Starts printing the document. After printing, the document remains undeleted. Cancel Cancels printing the document.

Sample Set
Before printing multiple sets of a document, you can first print one copy for trial, and then print the rest from the machine. This section describes how to print or delete documents stored with the Sample Set feature.
For information on Sample Set operations, refer to the print driver's help.
Note When you have selected [Save in Private Charge Print] or [Save in Charge Print] for [Receive Control] under [Charge/Private Print Settings], jobs will not be saved in [Sample Set] under [Secure Print Jobs & More] even if you select [Sample Set] on the print driver.

For more information, refer to "5 Tools" > "Authentication/Security Settings" > "Authentication" > "Charge/Private Print Settings" in the Administrator Guide.

Job Status

1 2

Select [Sample Set]. Select the user to be checked, and select [Document List].
Note Select [Refresh] to display the updated information. Select [ ] to return to the previous screen or [ ] to move to the next screen. Entering a 3-digit user ID with the numeric keypad specifies the user directly.

11

3 4 5

Select the document to be printed or deleted. When printing, specify the number of print using the numeric keypad. Select any item.

Select All Selects all documents. To deselect all the documents, select this button again.

295

11 Job Status

Delete Deletes the selected document.


Refer to "When [Delete] is Selected" (P.296).

Print Prints a Sample Set document. After printing the remaining sets of the document, the stored Sample Set document is deleted.
Refer to "When [Print] is Selected" (P.296)

When [Delete] is Selected

Select [Delete].

Delete Deletes the document.


Important Once the document is deleted, it cannot be restored.

Cancel Cancels deleting the document.

When [Print] is Selected

Select [Yes].

Yes Starts printing the document. After printing, deletes the document.
Note If a time period specified in [Auto Job Release] elapses with no operation carried out after printing the first print set, the machine automatically prints the second print set. If you do not want the second print set to be printed automatically, specify a longer time period in [Auto Job Release]. For how to set [Auto Job Release], refer to "5 Tools" > "Common Service Settings" > "Machine Clock/Timers" > "Auto Job Release" in the Administrator Guide.

11
No

Job Status

Cancels printing the document.

Delayed Print
This feature allows you to temporarily store print data on the machine to print it at specified time. This section describes how to print or delete documents stored with the Delayed Print feature.
For information on Delayed Print operations, refer to the print driver's help.

296

Printing and Deleting Stored Documents

Note

When you have selected [Save in Private Charge Print] or [Save in Charge Print] for [Receive Control] under [Charge/Private Print Settings], jobs will not be saved in [Delayed Print] under [Secure Print Jobs & More] even if you select [Delayed Print] on the print driver. For more information, refer to "5 Tools" > Authentication/Security Settings" > "Authentication" > "Charge/Private Print Settings" in the Administrator Guide.

1 2

Select [Delayed Print]. Select the document to be printed or deleted.


Note Select [Refresh] to display the updated information. Select [ ] to return to the previous screen or [ ] to move to the next screen. [Print Time] shows the time to start printing.

3 4

When printing, specify the number of print using the numeric keypad. Select any item. Delete Deletes the selected document.
Refer to "When [Delete] is Selected" (P.297).

Print Prints the selected document. After printing, deletes the document. If printed manually, the document will not be printed at the specified time.
Refer to "When [Print] is Selected" (P.298).

When [Delete] is Selected


Job Status

Select [Delete].

Delete Deletes the document.


Important Once the document is deleted, it cannot be restored.

11

Cancel Cancels deleting the document.

297

11 Job Status

When [Print] is Selected

Select [Yes].

Yes Starts printing the document. After printing, deletes the document. No Cancels printing the document.

Charge Print
This feature prevents unauthorized users from operating print jobs by authenticating the users on the machine. When this feature is set, the machine prints only the jobs of authenticated users. You can also set the machine to store print jobs temporarily, and print them from the machines control panel. When you set to use the Charge Print feature under [Tools] > [Authentication/Security Settings] > [Authentication] > [Charge/Private Print Settings] > [Receive Control], received print jobs are saved for each Billing ID. Any jobs that were not given a Billing ID on the print driver are saved in [No User ID].
For more information, refer to "5 Tools" > "Accounting" > "Create/View User Accounts" in the Administrator Guide.
Note This item is displayed when you have set to save in Charge Print. To set to save in Charge Print, perform one of the following settings in the System Administration mode: Set [Receive Control] to [Save in Charge Print]. Set [Receive Control] to [According to Print Account], and [Job Login Failure] to [Save in Charge Print]. Set [Receive Control] to [According to Print Account] or [Private Charge Print], and [Job without User ID] to [Save in Charge Print].

11

Job Status

For more information, refer to "5 Tools" > "Authentication/Security Settings" > "Authentication" > Charge/Private Print Settings" in the Administrator Guide.

The following describes how to print or delete documents stored in Charge Print.

1 2 3

Press the <Log In/Out> button. Enter the user ID using the numeric keypad or the keyboard displayed, and select [Enter]. Select [Charge Print].

298

Printing and Deleting Stored Documents

Select the user to be checked, and select [Document List].


Note Select [Refresh] to display the updated information. Select [ ] to return to the previous screen or [ ] to move to the next screen. Entering a 3-digit user ID with the numeric keypad specifies the user directly.

Enter the passcode, and select [Confirm].


Note If no passcode is assigned, the passcode entry screen will not appear.

6 7 8

Select the document to be printed or deleted. When printing, specify the number of print using the numeric keypad. Select any item.

Delete Deletes the document stored with Charge Print.


Refer to "When [Delete] is Selected" (P.299).

Job Status

Print Prints the document stored with Charge Print.


Refer to "When [Print] is Selected" (P.300).

11

When [Delete] is Selected

Select [Delete].

Delete Deletes the document.


Important Once the document is deleted, it cannot be restored.

Cancel Cancels deleting the document.

299

11 Job Status

When [Print] is Selected

Select what to do with the document after printing.

Print and Delete Starts printing the document. After printing, deletes the document. Print and Save Starts printing the document. After printing, the document remains undeleted. Cancel Cancels printing the document.

Private Charge Print


The feature allows you to temporarily store print data in the machine for each authentication user ID, and request on the machine's control panel to print the data. As the feature enables you to select and print only the necessary documents, you can avoid printing unneeded jobs. Because the machine displays only the documents of authenticated users, privacy of the users is securely protected. The Private Print feature is suitable for authenticating and managing specific users managed by the system administrator. When you set to use the Private Charge Print feature, received print jobs are saved for each authentication user ID.
Note This item is displayed when the Private Charge Print feature is enabled by using one of the following procedures: [According to Print Accounting] is selected, and [Job Login Success] is set to [Save in Private Charge Print]. [Save in Private Charge Print] is selected.

11

Job Status

When deleting the print job instructed with an invalid user ID, display the list of print jobs in the authenticated system administrator mode, and then select the job to be deleted. For more information, refer to "3 Maintenance" > "Deleting the Private Print with an Invalid User ID" in the Administrator Guide. For information on how to set a User ID, refer to "5 Tools" > "Authentication/Security Settings" > "Authentication" > "Charge/Private Print Settings" in the Administrator Guide.

The following describes how to print or delete a document stored with the Private Charge Print feature.

1 2 3

Press the <Log In/Out> button. Enter the user ID with the numeric keypad or the keyboard displayed, and select [Enter]. Select [Private Charge Print].
Note If you are authenticated as a system administrator, selecting [Private Charge Print] will display a list of authentication user IDs. Select a user ID from the list, and then select [Document List] to display a list of documents stored for the selected user.

300

Printing and Deleting Stored Documents

4 5 6

Select the document to be printed or deleted. When printing, specify the number of print using the numeric keypad. Select any item.

Select All Selects all documents. To deselect all the documents, select this button again. Delete Deletes the Private Charge Print document.
Note If documents with the same user ID are all deleted, the user ID will be deleted.

Refer to "When [Delete] is Selected" (P.301).

Print Prints the Private Charge Print document.


Refer to "When [Print] is Selected" (P.301).

When [Delete] is Selected

Select [Delete].

Delete Deletes the document.


Important Once the document is deleted, it cannot be restored.

Job Status

Cancel Cancels deleting the document.

11

When [Print] is Selected

Select what to do with the document after printing.

Print and Delete Starts printing the document. After printing, deletes the document. Print and Save Starts printing the document. After printing, the document remains undeleted. Cancel Cancels printing the document.

301

11 Job Status

Public Mailbox
This feature allows you to store data in the machine, and send the data by operating on a remote terminal. This section describes how to print or delete a document stored in a public mailbox.
For information on how to operate Public Mailbox, refer to "Store for Polling (Allowing Remote Machines to Retrieve Documents from Your Machine)" (P.177).
Note This feature does not appear for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more information, contact our Customer Support Center.

1 2

Select [Public Mailbox]. Select the document to be printed or deleted.


Note Select [Refresh] to display the updated information. Select [ ] to return to the previous screen or [ ] to move to the next screen.

Select any item. Select All Selects all documents. To deselect all the documents, select this button again. Delete Deletes the selected document.
Refer to "When [Delete] is Selected" (P.302).

Print Prints the selected document.


Refer to "When [Print] is Selected" (P.302).

11

Job Status

When [Delete] is Selected

Select [Delete].

Delete Deletes the document.


Important Once the document is deleted, it cannot be restored.

Cancel Cancels deleting the document.

When [Print] is Selected


Starts printing the document.

302

Printing and Deleting Stored Documents

Undelivered Faxes
This section describes how to re-send or delete an undelivered fax document.
Note This feature does not appear for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more information, contact our Customer Support Center. This feature may not be displayed depending on the system settings.

1 2

Select [Undelivered Faxes]. Select the document to be re-sent or deleted.


Note Select [Refresh] to display the updated information. Select [ ] to return to the previous screen or [ ] to move to the next screen.

Select any item. To re-send to the previously specified fax number, press the <Start> button. Delete This Document Deletes the selected document.
Refer to "When [Delete] is Selected" (P.294).

Change Recipients... Allows you to change the number, and resend the document.
Refer to "When [Change Recipients...] is Selected" (P.303).

When [Delete This Document] is Selected

Job Status

Select [Delete].

Delete Deletes the fax document. Cancel Cancels deleting the fax document.

11

When [Change Recipients...] is Selected


Specify a fax recipient for the undelivered fax document. Besides the fax recipient, the following features can be changed on the control panel:
Starting Rate Recipient
Important If the fax number is changed, the setting for adding a header will be disabled.

For information on how to specify a fax number, refer to "Step 3 Specifying Destinations" (P.131).

303

11 Job Status

Printing Pending Jobs


This section describes how to print pending jobs.
Note If there are no pending jobs, the [Print Waiting Jobs] button is disabled.

1 2

Press the <Job Status> button. Select [Print Waiting Jobs].

11

Job Status

304

Handling Error Terminations

Handling Error Terminations


This section describes how to handle error terminations. For a Print Job Select a job shown as an error termination in the [Completed Jobs] tab to check the error code. Follow the error code instructions.
For information on error codes, refer to "14 Problem Solving" > "Error Code" in the Administrator Guide.

For a Fax Job A transmission report (undelivered) is printed.


For more information on transmission reports (undelivered), refer to "4 Machine Status" > Machine Information" > "Automatically Printed Reports/Lists" > "Transmission Report - Undelivered" in the Administrator Guide. For details on how to print transmission reports (undelivered) automatically, refer to "5 Tools" > "Common Service Settings" > "Reports" > "Scan File Transfer Report" in the Administrator Guide.

For a Scan Job A transmission report (undelivered) is printed.


For more information on transmission reports (undelivered), refer to "4 Machine Status" > Machine Information" > "Automatically Printed Reports/Lists" > "Transmission Report - Undelivered" in the Administrator Guide. For details on how to print transmission reports (undelivered) automatically, refer to "5 Tools" > Common Service Settings" > "Reports" > "Scan File Transfer Report" in the Administrator Guide.

For Other Jobs Print a Job History Report, and check the execution results.
For information about job history reports, refer to "5 Tools" > "Common Service Settings" > "Reports" > "Job History Report" in the Administrator Guide. When an error code is displayed in [Transmission Report - Job Undelivered] or [Job History Report], refer to "14 Problem Solving" > "Error Code" in the Administrator Guide.

Job Status

11

305

12 Computer Operations
This chapter describes how to print documents, import scanned documents, perform Direct Fax, and operate CentreWare Internet Services on your computer.
Note Some models do not support the features described in this chapter. An optional package is necessary. For more information, contact our Customer Support Center. The computer screen images shown in this section are as of June 2008.

Features Overview....................................................................................308 Printing......................................................................................................311 E-mail Printing ..........................................................................................312 Sending Fax..............................................................................................314 Importing Scanned Data ...........................................................................316 CentreWare Internet Services ..................................................................323

12 Computer Operations

Features Overview
This section describes the overview of features that can be operated on a computer. Printing Submits a print job to the machine from a computer.
For details, refer to "Print" (P.309).

E-mail Printing Submits a print job to the machine from a computer by sending an E-mail attached with a document in TIFF, PDF, JPEG (JFIF), XPS or TXT format.
For details, refer to "E-mail Printing" (P.312).

Sending Fax Sends a fax directly from a computer.


For details, refer to "Sending Fax" (P.314).

Importing Scanned Data Imports documents stored in a mailbox of the machine to a computer.
For details, refer to "Importing Scanned Data" (P.316).

CentreWare Internet Services Displays the machine status and job status. The feature also allows you to change the settings. You can also import documents stored in a mailbox.
For details, refer to"CentreWare Internet Services" (P.323). For details on how to import scanned data stored in a mailbox, refer to "Importing Using CentreWare Internet Services" (P.320).

12

Computer Operations

308

Print

Print
The following describes how to print with the machine by operating on a PC.

Print Features
The main print features of the machine are as follows:
To learn about print features, click [Help] on the print driver screen to see the print driver's online help. For information on printing, refer to "Printing" (P.311).
Note Some features are not available unless you perform optional component settings in the [Printer] tab. The unavailable features are grayed out.

Multiple-Up Prints multiple pages onto one sheet of paper. 2 Sided Printing Prints data on both sides of paper.
Note This feature does not appear for some models. To use the feature, an optional package is necessary. For more information, contact our Customer Support Center.

Poster Splits one page of print data into multiple sheets of paper and enlarges the printed image to fit the size of each sheet. Used to create large posters, etc. Booklet Creation Performs 2-sided printing and page allocation for printing a booklet in the correct page order. Only available when the machine has the 2-sided printing feature.
Note This feature does not appear for some models. To use the feature, an optional package is necessary. For more information, contact our Customer Support Center.

Computer Operations

Transparency Separators Automatically inserts a blank sheet of paper as a separator each time a transparency is printed. Watermark Prints fixed text, such as "Confidential", over the print data. Secure Print Temporarily stores the print data on the machine, to print it with the print command from the machine. This feature allows you to set a passcode, which is helpful to print confidential documents.
For information on how to print, refer to "Secure Print" (P.293).

12

Sample Set Before printing multiple sets of a document, you can first print one copy for trial, and then print the rest from the machine.
For information on how to print, refer to "Sample Set" (P.295).

Delayed Print Temporarily stores the print data on the machine to print it at specified time.
For information on how to print, refer to "Delayed Print" (P.296).

309

12 Computer Operations

Save to Mailbox Temporarily stores the print data in a registered mailbox, to print it with the print command from the machine.
Important The print result of the Print from Mailbox feature may be inferior to the other print results in quality. This feature does not appear for some models. To use the feature, an optional package is necessary. For more information, contact our Customer Support Center.

For information on how to print, refer to "Printing Documents in a Mailbox" (P.248).

E-mail Printing
When the E-mail feature is available, allows you to send e-mail with the TIFF, PDF, JPEG (JFIF), XPS, or TXT format documents attachment from a computer to the machine. The received e-mail is automatically printed from the machine.
Note If the Authentication feature is enabled, received e-mails are not printed automatically. This feature does not appear for some models. To use the feature, an optional package is necessary. For more information, contact our Customer Support Center.

For details on how to use this software, refer to "E-mail Printing" (P.312).

Print Features Using Authentication Information


Charge Print Authenticates users to prevent unauthorized printing. The machine holds a print job and prints it when the user is authenticated. The machine can also be configured to store multiple print jobs until the user requests to print them on the control panel.
In addition, by registering a user ID and passcode for the authentication on the machine in advance, only the registered user can print the documents.
Note To prohibit users other than you from operating documents, a passcode should be registered for the Billing ID on the print driver.

For details on how to setup charge printing, refer to "5 Tools" > "Authentication/Security Settings" > "Authentication" > "Charge/Private Print Settings" in the Administrator Guide. For information on how to print, refer to "Charge Print" (P.298).

12

Computer Operations

Private Charge Print The feature allows you to temporarily store print data in the machine for each authentication user ID, and request on the machine's control panel to print the data. As the feature enables you to select and print only the necessary documents, you can avoid printing unneeded jobs. Because the machine displays only the documents of authenticated users, privacy of the users is securely protected. This feature is suitable for authenticating and managing specific users managed by the system administrator.
Note If you do not want to store unneeded documents, you can configure the machine to store only the jobs whose authentication succeeded.

For details on how to set up private charge print, refer to "5 Tools" > "Authentication/Security Settings" > "Authentication" > "Charge/Private Print Settings" in the Administrator Guide. For information on how to print, refer to "Private Charge Print" (P.300).

Setup
In order to print from your computer, a print driver must be installed on the computer.
For instructions on installing the print driver, refer to the manual contained in the CD-ROM of the Driver CD Kit.
Note When printing using authentication information, you must configure the settings of a printer on your computer. Set items as necessary on the [Default Settings] tab of the printers property screen. For more information, refer to the help of the printer.

310

Print

Printing
This section describes the print procedure. The print procedure depends on the application software you use. For details, refer to the documentation provided with the application.
To learn about print features, click [Help] on the print driver screen to see the print driver's online help.

1 2 3 4

Select [Print] from the [File] menu on the application. Confirm [Printer Name] and click [Properties] if necessary. Set the properties if necessary.
Note You can change the print feature with [Job Type].

Click [OK].

Click [OK] in the [Print] dialog box.

Computer Operations

12

311

12 Computer Operations

E-mail Printing
You can send e-mail attaching TIFF, PDF, JPEG (JFIF), or XPS documents from a computer to the machine. Received e-mail is automatically printed. This feature is called "E-mail Printing".
Note If the machine is in the authentication mode, received E-mails will not be printed automatically. This feature does not appear for some models. To use the feature, an optional package is necessary. For more information, contact our Customer Support Center.

Setup
To use the E-mail Printing feature, the following setup is necessary. Check with your system or network administrator whether these settings have been completed. Network Environment Settings In order to use E-mail Printing, an e-mail account must be registered. E-mail Environment Settings Settings for the port activation, machine's e-mail address, TCP/IP environment, e-mail server, etc.
For information on E-mail Environment Settings, refer to "8 E-mail Environment Settings" in the Administrator Guide.

Sending E-Mail
The following describes how to send e-mail from the computer to the machine, using Outlook Express as an example.
Computer Operations

Use your e-mail software to create an e-mail body, and then attach a document to the e-mail if necessary.
Important Only plain text is permitted for the e-mail body. Change the body text format to plain text by the e-mail software setting. Any forwarded e-mail (that is attached to another e-mail) cannot be printed. Note If the extension of the attached files is other than ".tif", ".tiff", ".pdf", ".jpeg", ".jpg", ".jpe", ".jfif", and ".xps", the file may not be printed correctly. Up to 31 documents can be attached.

12
2

Enter the machine's e-mail address as a recipient.

Send the e-mail.


Note The printer prints the e-mail body and the attached documents according to the following settings. The offset output setting is disabled in all cases.

312

E-mail Printing

E-mail body: Default values of the PCL print driver for this machine which is installed on the computer TIFF or JPEG formatted attached file: Default values of the logical printer set in [Memory Settings] of [TIFF/JPEG] in [Emulation Settings] of CentreWare Internet Services PDF formatted attached file: Settings of the PDF direct print when [Print Processing Mode] of the PDF direct print is set to [PDF Bridge]. Default values of the logical printer configured by [Logical Printer Number] of [PostScript] in [Emulation Settings] of CentreWare Internet Services when [Print Processing Mode] of the PDF direct print is set to [PS].

Computer Operations

12

313

12 Computer Operations

Sending Fax
This section describes how to use the Direct Fax feature. The Direct Fax procedure depends on the application you use. For details, refer to the documentation provided with the application.
For details on the Direct Fax feature, click [Help] on the print driver screen to see the print driver's online help.
Important The Direct Fax feature is not available when the Fax Server is enabled. This feature does not appear for some models. To use the feature, an optional package is necessary. For more information, contact our Customer Support Center.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Select [Print] from the [File] menu on the application. Select a fax printer from [Printer Name]. Click [Properties], and select [Fax] for [Job Type]. Click [OK]. Click [OK] in the [Print] dialog box. Specify a destination in the [Fax Recipient] dialog box. Click [OK]. The [Fax Job Confirmation] dialog box appears after you have sent a fax job. A list of recipients to whom the fax job is being sent will be displayed.

12

Computer Operations

Registering Destinations
The following describes how to register fax destinations from the machine to another machine (ApeosPort-III C3300/C2200/C2201, DocuCentre-III C3300/C2200/C2201) in one operation through a computer. You can use the same procedure to register fax destinations from another machine (ApeosPort-III C3300/2200/C2201, DocuCentre-III C3300/C2200/C2201) to this machine. The registration requires CentreWare Internet Services.
For information on CentreWare Internet Services, refer to "CentreWare Internet Services" (P.323). The control panel allows you to register destinations separately. For details, refer to "5 Tools" > "Setup" > "Add Address Book Entry" in the Administrator Guide.
Important Because CentreWare Internet Services is accessible by multiple users simultaneously, the registered data will have a risk to be overwritten if a system administrator ID and passcode are not set. We recommend that data edit is permitted only by a system administrator with a passcode. Be sure not to perform this operation simultaneously with the address number registration from the control panel. If a number is duplicated, the existing number will be overwritten by the new one.

314

Sending Fax

A file in CSV format exported by CentreWare Internet Services (address book data) is not designed to be edited or changed by editing software. The data may be damaged when it is edited or changed. Due to the altered data, fax may be sent to undesired recipients. Therefore, do not edit or change the file in CSV format (address book data) with software such as Microsoft Excel.

1 2

Start up the computer, and a web browser. Enter the machine's IP address or Internet address in the browser address field and press the <Enter> key.
Note If your network uses DNS (Domain Name System) and the machine's host name is registered in the domain name server, you can access the machine using the URL with the combination of the host name and the domain name. For example, if the host name is "myhost", and the domain name is "example.com", then the URL is "myhost.example.com". Ask your system administrator for the IP address or Internet address. When specifying a port number, add ":" and the port number after the address. The default port number is "80". When using the Authentication feature on the machine, enter a user ID and passcode into the [User Name] and [Password] fields respectively. Ask your system administrator for the user ID and passcode. If communications are encrypted, you must specify an address that starts with "https" instead of "http" to access CentreWare Internet Services.

3 4 5

Click the [Properties] tab, and select [Address Book] in the left frame on the screen. Click [Map Existing Address Book] for [Export]. Specify the destination to save the file in.
Computer Operations

6 7 8 9

Enter the IP address or Internet address of the machine (ApeosPort-III C3300/C2200/ C2201, DocuCentre-III C3300/C2200/C2201) into the browser address field, and press the <Enter> key. Click the [Properties] tab, and select [Address Book] in the left frame on the screen. Click [Browse] in [Import] to specify the file saved in Step 5. Click [Import Now].
Important Only fax destinations can be registered. Any addresses of iFax and e-mail, or destination servers for Scan to PC cannot be registered.

12

315

12 Computer Operations

Importing Scanned Data


There are four methods for importing documents from a machine's mailbox to your computer.
Importing to a TWAIN Compatible Application......................................................................316 Importing Using Mailbox Viewer 3..........................................................................................318 Importing Using CentreWare Internet Services........................................................................320 Importing Using EasyOperator .................................................................................................322

Each procedure is as follows.

Importing to a TWAIN Compatible Application


The following describes how to import documents from a machine's mailbox to application software. Network Scan Driver is used to import stored documents. Network Scan Driver is software to allow a client-side application to import documents (scan data) from a machine's mailbox via a network. To use Network Scan Driver, your computer needs to have Network Scan Utility 3 installed.
Note Install Network Scan Utility 3 using the CD-ROM in the Driver CD Kit.

To import documents stored in a mailbox, some items such as port status must be set in advance. For more information, refer to "9 Scanner Environment Settings" > "Configuration of Scan to Mailbox" in the Administrator Guide. For information on the operation on the application, refer to the documentation provided with the application. For information on how to install Network Scan Driver, refer to the manual contained in the CD-ROM in the Driver CD Kit. To learn about fields in the displayed dialog box, click [Help] to refer to the Network Scan Driver's online help.

12

Computer Operations

Launch application software to which documents are imported.


Important The application must support TWAIN. TWAIN is a standard for scanners and other input devices. Note For information on supported applications, refer to the "Readme" contained in the CD-ROM of the Driver CD Kit.

2 3

From the [File] menu, select the command for selecting the scanner (source). Select [FX Network Scanner 3 TWAIN], and click [Select].

From the [File] menu, select the command for importing the image from the scanner.

316

Importing Scanned Data

From the displayed list, click the scanner name of the machine, and click [Next].
Note If no items are shown in the list, click [Search Again]. The application searches for scanners. To display the scanner names, use the dialog box which can be displayed by clicking [Search/Display Settings]. For information on how to change the displayed scanner names, refer to "Changing the display of scanner names" (P.318). Only scanners on the network are automatically listed. To view a scanner on another network, click [Search/Display Settings], and register the IP Address and scanner name. For information on changing settings, refer to "Changing Network Scan Driver Settings" (P.318).

In the [Mailbox Number] field, enter the mailbox number (001 - 200) that contains the document to be imported. In the [Passcode] field, enter a password (up to 20 digits).
Note From the next time you perform this operation and onward, you will be able to select a mailbox number from [Registered Mailboxes]. Clicking [Select Scanner] returns to Step 5, where you can reselect a scanner.

7 8

Click [Confirm]. Select a document to import from the list, and click [Import].
Note You can select one or more documents. [Import], [Refresh], and [Delete] are available from the menu that appears when you right-click on the list.

Computer Operations

When the import starts, the scan data is forwarded from the mailbox to the client. After the forwarding, the data is loaded onto the application software and is deleted from the mailbox.
Note An icon is attached to a document that is scanned in pages and whose forwarding operation has not been completed. For most applications except DocuWorks, Network Scan Driver expands the compressed data and transfers the data to the applications in BMP format. For DocuWorks, on the other hand, Network Scan Driver transfers the data without data expansion processing. For this reason, it does not take much time for data transfer. The machine can be set not to delete the document from the mailbox after forwarding operation. For details on how to set this, refer to "9 Scanner Environment Settings" > "Configuration of Scan to Mailbox" in the Administrator Guide.

12

317

12 Computer Operations

Changing Network Scan Driver Settings


To learn about fields in the displayed dialog box, click [Help] to refer to the Network Scan Driver's online help.

Changing the display of scanner names You can change the display of scanner names listed. To change the display of scanner names, click [Search/Display Settings] in the scanner selection dialog box. Under [Scanner Name Display], you can change the method in which scanner names are displayed in [Scanner for Searching]. Specify scanners to search for under [Search Target Settings].
Note If you register a scanner by clicking [Add], you can display scanners from other networks.

Import Method for Scanned Documents You can change the display and the import settings for documents scanned from a mailbox. To change the import method, click [Import Settings] from [File] menu in the document selection dialog box, and configure the settings in the dialog box that appears.
Computer Operations

Importing Using Mailbox Viewer 3


The following describes how to use Mailbox Viewer 3 to import a document from a machine's mailbox. Mailbox Viewer 3 is software to import documents from a machine's mailbox without using any client-side application. To use Mailbox Viewer 3, your computer needs to have Network Scan Utility 3 installed.
Note Install Network Scan Utility 3 using the CD-ROM in the Driver CD Kit.

12

To import documents stored in a mailbox, some items such as port status must be set in advance. For more information, refer to "9 Scanner Environment Settings" > "Configuration of Scan to Mailbox" in the Administrator Guide. For information on the operation on the application, refer to the documentation provided with the application. For instructions on installing Mailbox Viewer 3, refer to the manual contained in the CD-ROM of the Driver CD Kit. To learn about fields in the displayed dialog box, click [Help] to see the Mailbox Viewer 3 online help.

Click [Start] and select [Programs] > [Fuji Xerox] > [Network Scanner Utility 3] > [Mailbox Viewer 3].
Note If you used another directory for installation, specify the directory instead of above.

318

Importing Scanned Data

From the displayed list, click the scanner name of the machine, and click [Next].
Note If no items are shown in the list, click [Search Again]. The application searches for scanners. To display the scanner names, use the dialog box which can be displayed by clicking [Search/Display Settings]. For information on how to change the displayed scanner names, refer to "Changing the display of scanner names" (P.320). Only when the machine is connected to the network, the scanner name is automatically shown in the list. To view the machine connected to other networks, click on [Search/Display Settings] and register an IP address and scanner name. For information on how to change the settings, refer to "Changing the display of scanner names" (P.320).

In the [Mailbox Number] field, enter the number of the mailbox (001 - 200) that contains the document to be imported. In the [Passcode] field, enter a password (up to 20 digits).
Note From the next time you perform this operation and onward, you will be able to select a mailbox number from [Registered Mailboxes]. Clicking [Select Scanner] returns to Step 2, where you can reselect a scanner.

4 5

Click [Confirm]. Select a document from the list, and click [Import].
Note One or more documents can be selected. When [Always display destination to save] is set for [File Saving Options] under the import settings, a dialog box for specifying a save destination is displayed. When the dialog box appears, specify a save destination, and select [OK]. For information on Mailbox Viewer 3 settings, refer to "Import settings for scanned documents" (P.320).

Computer Operations

12

The document is imported to the specified directory.


Note When [Save in fixed destination] is set for [File Saving Options] under the import settings, a document is saved in the specified directory. For information on importing documents, refer to "Import settings for scanned documents" (P.320)

319

12 Computer Operations

Changing Mailbox Viewer 3 Settings


To learn about fields in the displayed dialog box, click [Help] to see the Mailbox Viewer 3 online help.

Changing the display of scanner names You can change the display of scanner names listed. To change the display of scanner names, click [Search/Display Settings] in the scanner selection dialog box. Under [Scanner Name Display], you can change the method in which scanner names are displayed in [Scanner for Searching]. Specify scanners to search for under [Search Target Settings].
Note If you register a scanner by clicking [Add], you can display scanners from other networks.

Import settings for scanned documents You can change the display and the import settings for documents scanned from a mailbox. To change the import method, click [Details] from [File] menu in the document selection dialog box, and configure the settings in the dialog box that appears.

12

Computer Operations

Importing Using CentreWare Internet Services


This section describes how to import documents stored in a machine's mailbox using CentreWare Internet Services. CentreWare Internet Services allows you to import documents from a machine's mailbox to a computer through no application software.
For overview of CentreWare Internet Services, refer to "CentreWare Internet Services" (P.323).

1
320

Start up the computer, and a web browser.

Importing Scanned Data

Enter the machine's IP address or Internet address in the browser address field and press the <Enter> key.
Note If your network uses DNS (Domain Name System) and the machine's host name is registered in the domain name server, you can access the machine using the Internet address with the combination of the host name and the domain name. For example, if the host name is "myhost", and the domain name is "example.com", then the Internet address is "myhost.example.com". Ask your system administrator for the IP address or Internet address. When specifying a port number, add ":" and the port number after the Internet address. If using the authentication feature on the machine, enter a user ID and passcode into the [User Name] and [Password] fields. Ask your system administrator for the user ID and passcode. If communications are encrypted, you must specify an address that starts with "https" instead of "http" to access CentreWare Internet Services.

3 4

Select [Mailbox] from the [Scan] tab. Click [Document List] of the mailbox that contains the documents to be imported.
Note If a passcode is set, enter the passcode in the [Passcode] field (up to 20 digits).

Place a check next to each document to be imported, and click [Retrieve].

Computer Operations

Click [Save this link].


For details on this operation, click [Help] in the bottom frame to see the online help.

12

321

12 Computer Operations

Importing Using EasyOperator


When you use Fuji Xerox applications such as EasyOperator, you can import documents stored in a machines mailbox to your computer without using a network scan driver. The documents in a mailbox can also be listed/displayed with thumbnails.
To import documents stored in a mailbox, some items such as port status need must be set in advance. For more information, refer to "9 Scanner Environment Settings" > "Configuration of Scan to Mailbox" in the Administrator Guide. For information on the operation on the application, refer to the documentation provided with the application.

The following describes how to import documents stored in a machines mailbox by using EasyOperator as an example.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Click the [Start] menu, and select [Programs] > [Fuji Xerox] > [CentreWare EasyOperator] > [EasyOperator].
Note If you have changed the directory when installing the application, specify the new directory.

In the left frame of the window displayed, add a machines mailbox to [Mailbox].
Add the mailbox in which documents to be imported are stored. For details on how to add a mailbox, refer to the EasyOperators online help.

Select [Refresh] on the [Display] menu. Click [+] on the left-hand side of [Mailbox] to display the added mailbox. When you select the added mailbox, the document will be displayed in the right frame. Select [Thumbnails] in the [Display] menu to display the document with thumbnail. Check the thumbnails of the document to be retrieved, and select the document. Select [Retrieve] from the [Tools] menu. Select a save destination in the [Browse For Folder] dialog box, and click [OK].

12

Computer Operations

322

CentreWare Internet Services

CentreWare Internet Services


CentreWare Internet Services requires a TCP/IP environment, and enables you to view the status of the machine and its jobs, as well as change settings via a web browser. You can also import documents saved in a mailbox.
For information on importing documents, refer to "Importing Using CentreWare Internet Services" (P.320). For CentreWare Internet Services, refer to "6 Using CentreWare Internet Services Settings" in the Administrator Guide.

CentreWare Internet Services Screen


The [CentreWare Internet Services] screen consists of five frames (divided windows). The information displayed in each frame depends on the feature: [Status], [Jobs], [Print], [Scan], [Properties], or [Support].
Note Clicking [Help] in the top frame displays the online help for CentreWare Internet Services.

Top frame

Upper left frame Right frame

Left Center Frame

Lower left frame

Computer Operations

Top Frame Displayed at the top of the window. This frame includes the logo, the machine model name, a link to the online help, user information, and tabs (links) leading to each feature.
For details on each feature provided by CentreWare Internet Services, click [Help] in this frame to see the help.

Right Frame / Upper Left Frame Information appearing in the right and upper left frames changes depending on the feature. Selecting a feature displays its available features and information in these frames. Left Center Frame Displays the machine information and status, and the [Refresh Status] button. Clicking [Refresh Status] updates the information. This frame does not appear on the [Status] or [Properties] screen. Lower Left Frame Displays a link to the Fuji Xerox home page.

12

323

12 Computer Operations

Main features of CentreWare Internet Services are listed below. Tab Name
Status

Main Features
Displaying the machine status Displaying the status of the paper trays, output trays and consumables such as toner cartridges. Linking to the copyright screen. Deleting lists of jobs and jobs, and displaying job history and error history. Job Submission Allows you to specify and print a file stored on your computer. Mailbox Allows you to register and set mailboxes. Job flow sheets Allows you to create, edit, and delete job flow sheets. Displaying and setting the items such as Machine configuration, Interface, and Emulation settings. Displaying support information

Jobs Print Scan

Properties Support
Note

Some field settings take effect after a reboot (after power-cycling the machine or after changing a system setting from the control panel). If a setting is changed by CentreWare Internet Services during operation on the control panel, the updated information does not appear on the control panel. Power-cycle the machine in that case. To change the settings of items set by the system administrator, you will need to enter the user ID and passcode. Contact the system administrator for the user ID and passcode.

Browser
CentreWare Internet Services supports the following browsers: For Windows OS Microsoft Internet Explorer 6.0 Service Pack 1 or later Netscape Navigator 7.1 or later For Mac OS 9.2 Netscape Navigator 7.0.2 or later For Mac OS X 10.3.9 Netscape Navigator 7.1 or later Safari 1.3 or later

12

Computer Operations

Browser Settings
Before using this service, ensure the following settings on your browser. The following is the setting procedure for Internet Explorer 6.0 SP1.

1 2 3

Select [Internet Options] from the [Tools] menu. In the [General] tab, click [Settings] for [Temporary Internet Files]. In the [Settings] dialog box, select [Every visit to the page] or [Every time you start Internet Explorer] for [Check for newer versions of stored pages:].

324

CentreWare Internet Services

Click [OK].

Proxy Server and Port Number


The following describes proxy server settings and a port number required for this service. Proxy Server We recommend that you access this service directly, not through a proxy server.
Note If using a proxy server, specifying the machine's IP address in the browser results in slower responses, and could prevent some screens from appearing. In this case, it is necessary to set the machine's IP address on the browser not to go through a proxy server. Refer to your browser's documentation for the setting instructions.

Port Number The default port number of this service is "80". The port number can be changed in [Properties] > [Protocol Settings] > [HTTP]. Usable ports are "1" to "65535". If you set the port to a number other than 80, you must add ":" and the port number after the IP address or the Internet address when entering the address into your browser. For example, if the port number is 8080, the URL is: http://[the machine's IP address]:8080/ or http://[the machine's Internet address]:8080/
You can check the port number in [Configuration Report]. For information on [Configuration Report], refer to "4 Machine Status" > "Machine Information" > "Print Reports" in the Administrator Guide.
Note If communications are encrypted, you must specify an address that starts with "https" instead of "http" to access CentreWare Internet Services.

Computer Operations

Starting CentreWare Internet Services


To use this service, perform the following procedure on your computer.

1 2

Start up the computer, and a web browser. Enter the machine's IP address or Internet address in the browser address field and press the <Enter> key.
Note If your network uses DNS (Domain Name System) and the machine's host name is registered in the domain name server, you can access the machine using the Internet address with the combination of the host name and the domain name. For example, if the host name is "myhost", and the domain name is "example.com", then the Internet address is "myhost.example.com". Ask your system administrator for the IP address or Internet address. When specifying a port number, add ":" and the port number after the Internet address. If using the authentication feature on the machine, enter a user ID and passcode into the [User Name] and [Password] fields. Ask your system administrator for the user ID and passcode. If communications are encrypted, you must specify an address that starts with "https" instead of "http" to access CentreWare Internet Services. If authentication of the system administrator fails, the following message is displayed in the right frame of web browser. "Authentication failed" If the number of times that authentication fails exceeds the set number, the following message is displayed in the right frame of web browser. "Switch the machine Off and then On for System Administrator login."

12

325

13 Appendix
This chapter contains a list of terms used in this guide. Glossary....................................................................................................328

13 Appendix

Glossary
Term
A3 A4 A5 Alias 420 297 mm paper 297 210 mm paper 210 148 mm paper An alternative name of the machine's e-mail address. For example, when the e-mail address for the machine is ifax@mb1.abc.fujixerox.com, you can use ifax@fuji-xerox.com (alias) to reach the same location. A feature that automatically moves an image to the center of paper when copying. A feature that automatically returns the touch screen to its default display when the machine is inactive for a certain period of time. Based on the document loaded and the magnification selected, the machine automatically selects an appropriate paper size. When paper runs out during copying, another tray of identical paper size and orientation automatically begins supplying paper. 364 257 mm paper 257 182 mm paper When creating a booklet, this feature adds margins to the center binding area of documents. A feature that copies the left and right pages of an unfolded document onto two separate sheets of paper. One more sheet is used when the length of the transmitted document exceeds the length of paper installed on the receiving terminal. A margin at the bottom of a received document can be eliminated so that the data can be printed on one page. The amount of space that can be removed from the bottom of a document is the border limit. When the border limit value is small, the data is printed on the next page. But when it is large, a larger space can be cut so that data can be printed on one page. This refers to smoothness of colors. Calibration levels are shown in gradation steps. The greater the step, the smoother the color will be. Color Management System. It corrects device-dependent color differences to match the colors printed on your output with the colors displayed on your screen. A feature where each copy set is delivered in the same order the documents were copied. A communications network that can offer voice data (telephone), image data (fax), video data (videotex) and PC data (PC communication service) over the same channel. In this guide, it is mostly referred to as transmitting/receiving images as well as speaking with a remote user.

Description

Auto Center Auto Clear

Auto Paper Select

Auto Tray Switching

B4 B5 Binding Shift Book Scanning Border Limit (Page split threshold value)

13

Appendix
Calibration CMS Collate Communication(s)

328

Glossary

Term
Cut Paper Default Screen

Description
Standard paper sizes, such as A4 and B5. A screen displayed on the touch screen immediately after switching the power on, or pressing the <Clear All> button. The screen is also displayed when the Auto Clear feature is used. A factory default value, or a value set in the System Administration mode. In this guide, it refers to entering a recipient's fax number. The method of dialing provided by the machine include: manual dialing using the numeric keypad, speed dialing, one touch dialing, and using the address book, etc. A tone generated from the telephone line. It indicates that you are connected to the line. The dial type of connected line. The machine offers two dial types: Tone (push circuit) and 10PPS (dial circuit / 10PPS). An image of a document scanned by the machine. Dots per inch. A unit used to describe printing resolution in terms of the number of dots printed in one inch. Used as a unit to describe resolution. Error Correction Mode. A type of G3 transmission. ECM transmission sends the document image data in segments and retransmits segments that the remote machine receives incorrectly. "ECM" described on the [Activity Report] shows that the communication was processed using ECM. A feature that erases the top/bottom, left/right or center edge of a document image when copying. This refers to operating the printer to achieve the same print results as when printing with other manufacturers' printers. This mode is called the Emulation Mode. A code is displayed on the control panel or a report when a problem occurs. A transmission method defined by Communications and Information Network Association of Japan (CIAJ) for use of T.30 sub-addresses standardized by ITU-T. Between the machines with the F code feature, including those manufactured by other companies, various features making use of F Code can be used. (: Communication standard) With the Internet Fax (iFax) feature of the machine, you can use F Code to forward fax documents received in mailboxes by e-mail. This refers to communicating with a remote terminal outside the country. It is also one of the Transmission Mode selections that reduces transmission speed to enable reliable communications even under poor line conditions. Connects the Internet network to regular telephone lines, enabling e-mail documents to be sent as fax documents to regular fax machines.

Default Value Dial

Dial Tone Dial Type Document Image DPI

ECM

Edge Erase Emulation

Error Code F Code

Appendix

13

F4800

Fax Gateway

329

13 Appendix

Term
Fax Server

Description
A feature that transfers image data received by the machine to a Server Fax server and transfers image data received by a Server Fax server to the machine via a network based on the settings you made. Using this feature enables you to manage multiple machines. A facsimile communication system standardized by the advisory committee for International Telecommunications (CCITT, now the ITU-T). A record of the sender. It is printed on the top edge of a received document. Image Color Matching. A color management software used with Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003. It corrects device-dependent color differences to match the colors printed on your output with the colors displayed on your screen. A feature which makes the border between black and white smooth, with rough edges reduced, giving the appearance of a higher resolution. This feature rotates a document image by 90 degrees when the document orientation is not the same as the paper supply orientation. A feature that transforms a document image horizontally or vertically. A worldwide communications network that combine miscellaneous networks. Unlike a regular fax machine, Internet Fax uses corporate networks or the Internet to send or receive e-mail (TIFF attachments). This feature outputs sheets in alternating offsets to make each set easier to recognize. Allows you to audibly monitor a transmission through the speaker after dialing and until you are connected. This term refers to this machine. This is a general term for terminals such as telephones, facsimile machines, personal and computers. A tone the device sounds when the drum/toner cartridge needs to be replaced. A tone produced when the status of the machine changes from standby to ready, such as when the power is switched on. Multipurpose Internet Mail Extension. A method for determining what kind of data was received by email. A MIME type refers to the type of data. A feature that copies two or four documents onto one sheet of paper. A non-volatile memory, which stores the settings information of the printer even when the printer is switched off. Dialing with the handset off the hook. Dialing with the handset on the cradle.

G3

Header ICM

Image Enhancement

Image Rotation

Independent X-Y% Internet Internet Fax

Job Offset Line Monitor

13

Appendix

Local Device

Low Toner Alert Tone Machine Ready Tone MIME Type

Multiple-Up NV Memory Off-hook Dialing On-hook Dialing

330

Glossary

Term
Optional accessory

Description
This refers to a product that is sold separately. In addition to the machine's basic configuration, various optional features are available as separately-sold optional accessories. (For more information on optional accessories, contact our Customer Support Center.) Printer Job Language. A command language for controlling printers developed by Hewlett Packard. A feature that allows you to retrieve a document from a remote machine. Post Office Protocol Version 3. One of the commonly used communications protocols used for receiving e-mail. It sets up a private mailbox on a provider's e-mail server, and receives messages when a communication is made. POP3 is for receiving only. SMTP is used for sending e-mail. A feature that switches the machine status to standby after a period of inactivity. The following energy saver features can be set for the machine. Low Power Mode: The power to the fuser unit and motor is lowered when the machine is left unused for a fixed amount of time. The touch screen goes out, and the <Energy Saver> button lights. Sleep Mode: Most of the units in the machine are in standby status. The machine consumes the least power. A location where print data is rendered. The actual area on paper which can be printed. A protocol controlling image resolution, paper size, and other attributes when sending or receiving faxes using Internet Fax (iFax). The profiles that can be used vary with the Internet Fax of the remote terminal. When specifying a profile, check that it can be handled by the other party's iFax-compatible machine. Random Access Memory. It is a storage device (memory) where information can be retrieved as well as stored. A space used to temporarily store data sent from a client computer. A feature that specifies the output paper size for received fax documents. The specified paper size will be declared to recipients from the sender. The person or terminal you send a document to. "Dialing" indicates the operation of entering a recipient's telephone number. For Internet Fax (iFax), this refers to the recipient's e-mail address. A terminal with which you want to communicate. This is a general term for terminals such as telephones, facsimile machines and personal computers.

PJL

Polling POP3

Energy Saver Feature

Print Page Buffer Printable Area Profile

Appendix

RAM Receive Buffer Receiving Paper Size

13

Recipient

Remote Terminal

331

13 Appendix

Term
Resolution

Description
Represents a fineness of detail that can be distinguished on an image. It is usually described in terms of the number of dots per square inch (dpi), and a higher value indicates a higher resolution (finely represented). Read Only Memory. It is a storage device (memory) specific for the retrieval of information. Raster Output Scanner. It is a device for writing image signals to a drum (light sensitive). A ROS is often referred to as a laser beam scanner. Sensing or reading a paper document and converting the optical image of the document to an electronic image. The machine offers two scanning devices: document glass and document feeder. The screen that is displayed on the touch screen. It displays messages and feature buttons. In this document, "Select" refers to highlighting a feature selection by touching the feature button on the touch screen with your finger. This feature requires to enter an "S" and the ID of a remote terminal after entering its fax number. This prevents transmission errors. Originator of a communication. It is used as opposed to "recipient". A blank, colored, or copied paper inserted between two copy sets. A feature that outputs copies to the Side Tray with the copied face up. Simple Mail Transfer Protocol. A communications protocol (an agreement governing the way data is transmitted) commonly used for sending and receiving e-mail. In this guide, this refers to loading a document, selecting features, and pressing the <Start> button immediately after switching the power on. Once the machine is warmed up and ready, it will automatically start copying. A code that indicates the machine status. When an error occurs on the machine, a status display code appears on the touch screen. In this guide, it is referred to as scanning an image of a document and saving the image on the machine. By registering a series of operations, the machine executes the operations with just one press of [Stored Programming] on the touch screen. A G3 communication system conforming to ITU V.34. This system offers higher transmission speed (33.6 kbps) than the normal G3 mode. The period between transmissions. A feature that copies on transparency films or inserts a sheet of blank or copied paper between transparency films.

ROM ROS

Scan

Screen Select

Send Password

Sender Separator Side Tray SMTP

Start Reservation

13

Appendix

Status Display Code

Store Stored Programming

Super G3 (SG3)

Transmission Interval Transparency Copy

332

Glossary

Term
UNC

Description
UNC (Universal Naming Convention) is a way to specify a path describing the location of a network resource, such as shared folders, or shared printers, on a network, Microsoft Networks (SMB). The UNC syntax uses "\\" before the hostname, hostname and resource name are delimited by "\". If the hostname is "myhost", and if its host shared folder name is "sharefolder", the UNC syntax is described as follows: \\myhost\sharefolder

Appendix

13

333

Index

Index
Symbols
+ Add ................................................................. 145

B
Background Suppression .................................. 228 Batch Print ......................................................... 249 Book Copying ...................................................... 81 Book Faxing ....................................................... 157 Book Scanning .......................................... 157, 231 Booklet ................................................................. 94 Booklet Creation .......................................... 94, 309 booklet staple cartridge ....................................... 39 booklet tray .......................................................... 42 booklet unit .................................................... 39, 42 booklet unit side cover ......................................... 39 bottom left cover .................................................. 35 breaker ................................................................ 45 brightness dial ..................................................... 51 Broadcast .......................................................... 180 Broadcast Send ................................. 136, 145, 184 Browse ............................................................... 214 Build Job ............................................................ 118

Numerics
10BASE-T/100BASE-TX connector .................... 35 2 Sided Book Copying ........................................ 82 2 Sided Printing ................................................. 309 2 Sided Scanning ...................................... 152, 218

A
<Access> indicator ............................................ 281 Add Me .............................................................. 207 adding a stamp/a date/page numbers to copies ............................................................ 103 adding originals ................................................. 123 adding sender name and phone number to faxes .......................................................................... 163 adding the senders address ............................. 207 Address Book .................................... 146, 203, 214 adjusting color balance ....................................... 79 adjusting contrast ................................................ 78 adjusting copy density/sharpness/saturation of images ................................................................ 77 adjusting fax density ......................................... 151 adjusting foot ....................................................... 34 adjusting scan density and image sharpness ... 228 adjusting the color tone ....................................... 80 adjusting the copy density ................................... 75 adjusting the image position ............................... 87 Advanced Settings ............................................ 227 <All Services> button .................................... 49, 51 allowing remote machines to retrieve documents from your machine ............................................ 177 Annotations ....................................................... 103 attaching covers to copies .................................. 98 Auto Detect ............................................... 155, 232 Auto Receive ..................................................... 189

C
<C (Clear)> button ......................................... 49, 51 Calculator % ........................................................ 68 calling a stored program .................................... 270 calling a stored program for Build Job ............... 271 Cancel ............................................................... 291 center tray .......................................... 34, 40, 41, 42 CentreWare Internet Services ................... 320, 323 changing the orientation of images ...................... 89 Chapter Start ..................................................... 121 Charge Print .............................................. 298, 310 checking completed jobs ................................... 292 checking the finished output of the copy ........... 122 checking/selecting mailbox documents ............. 243 circuit breaker ................................................ 35, 45 <Clear All> button .......................................... 48, 51 Color .................................................................... 75 Color Balance ...................................................... 79 Color Effects ........................................................ 79 Color Scanning .................................................. 217 Color Shift ............................................................ 80

Index

335

Color Space .......................................................229 Combine Original Sets .......................................123 combining multiple pages into one sheet ...........168 <CompactFlash Eject> button ...........................281 CompactFlash slot .............................................281 Compression Method .........................................221 confirmation indicator ...........................................37 confirming remote machine response prior to transmission .......................................................178 confirming the fax job in Job Status ...................133 Contrast .............................................................229 control panel ........................................................34 Copies ..................................................................92 Copy Output ....................................................... 115 copying both sides of an ID card ....................... 116 copying facing pages onto separate sheets ........81 copying multiple pages onto one sheet .............100 Cover Page ........................................................164 Covers .................................................................98 creaser unit ..........................................................39 creating a booklet ................................................94 ct ..........................................................................26 <Custom> buttons .........................................49, 50

DocuWorks ................................................ 220, 221 drum cartridge ..................................................... 36 drum cartridge cover ........................................... 36 drum cartridge release lever ................................ 36

E
Edge Erase .................................................. 86, 233 editing a recipient .............................................. 207 editing the Internet Fax mail contents ............... 166 ejecting media ................................................... 282 E-mail ................................................................ 203 E-mail Printing ........................................... 310, 312 Encryption ......................................................... 173 <Energy Saver> button ................................. 48, 51 Energy Saver mode ............................................. 46 enlarged copies ................................................... 65 Enter Output Size .............................................. 235 entering an address ........................................... 206 entering specific symbols .................................. 150 entering text ......................................................... 53 entering the e-mail body .................................... 209 entering/changing a stored program name ....... 268 erasing edges and margin shadows in the document ..................................................... 233 erasing edges and margin shadows of the document ....................................................... 86 erasing the background color of documents ........................................................... 78 erasing the background color of documents/adjusting contrast ............................ 228 exit cover ............................................................. 42

D
Delay Start .........................................................162 Delayed Print .............................................296, 309 Delete Outside/Delete Inside .............................124 deleting charge print documents ........................299 deleting outside or inside of the selected area ..124 deleting private print documents ........................301 deleting secure print documents ........................294

Index

deleting stored documents .................................293 deleting stored programs ...................................268 density levels .....................................................228 <Dial Pause> button ......................................49, 51 Digital Signature ................................................174 Direct Fax ..........................................................314 document cover ...................................................34 document feeder ..................................56, 128, 194 document feeder tray ...........................................37 document glass ........................34, 37, 57, 129, 195 document guides .................................................37 Document Name ................................................239 document output tray ...........................................37

F
F Code ............................................................... 170 Facsimile Information Services ......... 175, 179, 191 Fax .................................................................... 145 Fax/Internet Fax ................................................ 145 Fax/Internet Fax Options ................................... 159 File Format ........................................................ 220 File Name .......................................................... 238 File Name Conflict ............................................. 239 finisher tray .................................................... 39, 42 Finisher-A1 .......................................................... 41 Finisher-B1 .......................................................... 39

336

Index Finisher-C1 ......................................................... 42 Finisher-C1 with Booklet Maker .......................... 42 Folding ...............................................................113 Forced 4800 bps ............................................... 161 From .................................................................. 208 front cover ......................................... 34, 39, 41, 42 front transport cover ................................ 39, 40, 42 fuser unit ............................................................. 36 Job Assembly .................................................... 118 Job Flow Sheets ................................................ 258 <Job in Memory> indicator ............................ 48, 51 Job Status .......................................................... 290 <Job Status> button ...................................... 48, 51 JPEG ................................................................. 221

G
G3 ..................................................................... 161 General Scan Features ..................................... 217

L
Layout Adjustment ............................... 81, 155, 230 left cover .............................................................. 37 Left Page then Right .......................................... 231 lever ..................................................................... 37 license ................................................................. 26 Lighten/Darken .............................................. 75, 77 Lighten/Darkern ................................................. 151 LINE 1 .................................................................. 38 LINE 2 .................................................................. 38 LINE 3 .................................................................. 38 loading documents ............................................ 194 local terminal information ................................... 149 locking casters ..................................................... 34 <Log In/Out> button ....................................... 48, 51 Login Name ....................................................... 240 Low Power Mode ................................................. 46

H
handling error terminations ............................... 305 Hidden Text ........................................................113 hole-punch unit 2 and 3 holes ............................. 40 hole-punch unit 2 and 4 holes ............................. 40 hole-punch waste container ................................ 39

I
ID Card Copying ................................................116 iFax transmission .............................................. 138 Image Enhancement ................................... 78, 228 Image Options ............................................. 77, 228 Image Rotation .................................................... 89 Image Shift .......................................................... 87 importing scanned data ..................................... 316 Independent X - Y% ............................................ 67 Index Print ......................................................... 287 inner cover .......................................................... 37 inner output tray .................................................. 34 inserting blank sheets between transparencies .. 99 inserting media .................................................. 282 interface connector to fax .................................... 35 Internet Fax ....................................................... 145 Internet Fax Message ....................................... 166 Internet Fax Profile ............................................ 172 Internet Fax Subject .......................................... 166 <Interrupt> button ......................................... 49, 51 Invert Image ........................................................ 91

M
machine components .......................................... 34 <Machine Status> button ............................... 48, 51 Mailbox .............................................................. 242

Index

Mailbox Receive ................................................ 190 Mailbox Viewer 3 ............................................... 199 making 2-sided copies of facing pages ............... 82 making enlarged copies spread over multiple sheets ................................................................ 101 making enlarged/reduced copies ......................... 65 making multiple copies on a single sheet .......... 114 making multiple copies on one sheet ................ 102 making reversed copies of images ...................... 91 managing documents security ........................... 112 Manual Receive ................................................. 189 Manual Send ..................................................... 178 Media Print ........................................................ 278

337

Media Print - Photos ..................................278, 285 Media Print - Text ......................................278, 286 Media Print Kit ...................................................278 Memory card reader ............................................35 Message ............................................................209 Meta Data ..........................................................240 Mirror Image/Negative Image ..............................91 Mixed Sized Originals ..........................85, 156, 232 MRC High Compression ....................................221 mTIFF ................................................................221 Multiple-Up .........................................100, 168, 309

power switch ........................................................ 34 preferentially printing pending jobs .................... 304 Preset Repeat Image ........................................ 114 Primary Relay Station ID ................................... 187 Print ................................................................... 311 print driver ......................................................... 310 Print from Mailbox ............................................. 310 printing control numbers on the background of copies ................................................................ 109 printing delayed print documents ...................... 298 printing multiple sets at the destination machine .......................................................................... 167 printing sample set documents .......................... 296 printing secure print documents ................ 295, 301 printing security print documents ............... 295, 301 printing stored documents ................................. 293 Priority Send ...................................................... 162 Private Charge Print .................................. 300, 310 processing documents scanned with different settings as one job ............................................ 118 Promote Job ...................................................... 291 Proportional % ............................................. 67, 235 Public Mailbox ................................................... 302 Punching ........................................................... 116

N
Network Scan Driver ..........................................318 Network Scanning .............................................. 211 New Recipient ....................................................206 non-standard size document ...............................84 Non-target Area Color ..........................................74 numeric keypad .............................................49, 51

O
One touch buttons .......................................49, 148 One touch panels .................................................49 On-hook .............................................................178 <Online> indicator ..........................................48, 51 Original Orientation .....85, 87, 88, 91, 93, 101, 104, 110, .................... 113, 116, 123, 125, 219, 233, 234 Original Size ........................................84, 155, 232 Original Type .......................................76, 153, 219 Originals ...............................................................92 Output Color ........................................................72

Q
Quality/File Size ................................................ 236

R
Read Receipts ................................................... 237 receiver .............................................................. 178 Recipient Print Sets ........................................... 167 Recipient(s) ....................................................... 207 Reduce/Enlarge ......................................... 158, 234 reduced copies .................................................... 65 registering stored programs .............................. 266 release lever ........................................................ 35 Remote Mailbox ................................................ 168 Remote Polling .................................................. 175 removing/confirming a recipient ........................ 151 Repeat Image .................................................... 102 Reply To ............................................................ 238 Resolution ................................................. 153, 230 retrieving documents from remote machines .... 175

Index

Output Format ......................................................94 output tray ......................................................34, 42

P
Paper Supply .......................................................69 parallel interface connector ..................................35 Password ...................................................216, 240 PDF ............................................................220, 221 Photo .................................................................219 Photo & Text ......................................................219 Photographs ......................................................227 Poster ........................................................101, 309

338

Index <Review> button ........................................... 48, 51 Right Page then Left ......................................... 231 RSA BSAFE ........................................................ 26 Server Fax ......................................................... 143 setting the action to be taken for file name conflict ............................................................... 239 setting the printing options ................................. 285 setting the senders address .............................. 208 setting the subject .............................................. 209 Sample Job ....................................................... 122 Sample Set ............................................... 295, 309 Saturation ............................................................ 78 saving the scanned data ................................... 199 Scan .................................................................. 316 scan density ...................................................... 228 Scan to Mailbox ................................................ 210 Scan to PC ........................................................ 213 scanning a color photograph ............................. 227 scanning both sides of a document .................. 218 scanning different size documents simultaneously .................................................................. 156, 232 scanning different size documents simultaneously .................................................... 85 Scanning Facing Pages on Separate Sheets .......................................................................... 157 scanning facing pages on separate sheets ....... 231 Searchable Text ................................................ 221 Secondary Relay Station ID .............................. 187 Secure Print .............................................. 293, 309 Secure Watermark .............................................112 Segment Separators ......................................... 120 selecting a color mode ...................................... 217 selecting a communication mode ...................... 161 selecting a file format for output data ................ 220 selecting a mailbox ........................................... 244 selecting an image quality ................................... 79 selecting files .................................................... 283 selecting iFax/Fax ............................................. 145 selecting the color for copying ............................ 71 selecting the document type ............... 76, 153, 219 selecting the paper for copying ........................... 69 selecting/changing a job flow sheet .................. 260 Send from Mailbox ............................................ 242 Sending faxes to multiple recipients ................. 145 sending iFax encrypted by S/MIME .................. 173 sending iFax with a digital signature by S/MIME ........................................................ 174 sending in sections ........................................... 237 Server ............................................................... 215 Shadow Suppression ......................................... 229 Shared Name .................................................... 215 Sharpness ........................................................... 78 sharpness .......................................................... 228 side tray ............................................................... 34 Sideways Images .............................................. 219 Sleep Mode ......................................................... 46 Source Color ........................................................ 74 Specifying a Destination .................................... 215 specifying a destination PC by browsing your network .............................................................. 214 specifying a destination PC using the address book ............................................... 214 specifying a destination PC using the screen keyboard ............................................................ 215 specifying a destination using a one touch button ........................................................................... 148 specifying a destination using an address number .. 148 specifying a destination using the address book ..................................................... 146 specifying a name for the file to be saved ......... 239 specifying a name for the file to be sent ............ 238 specifying a reply address ................................. 238 specifying a scan ratio ....................................... 158 specifying a scan size ........................................ 232 specifying a scanning ratio ................................ 234 specifying a scanning resolution ........................ 230 specifying an e-mail address ............................. 203 specifying an image compression ratio when scanning ................................................... 236 specifying color space ....................................... 229 specifying destination using the keyboard screen ................................................ 149 specifying destinations ...................................... 131 specifying finishing options ................................ 115 specifying Internet Fax profiles .......................... 172 specifying read receipts ..................................... 237 specifying Send Priority ..................................... 162 specifying Send Time ........................................ 162

Index

339

specifying the Internet Fax subject ....................166 specifying the orientation of the loaded documents ...............................................91 specifying the scan size for the document ...........84 specifying the scan size for the original .............155 specifying the scanning resolution .....................153 <Speed Dial> button ......................................49, 51 Speed Dialing ....................................................148 Split Send ..........................................................237 Standard Size ............................................156, 232 staple cartridge ........................................39, 41, 42 Stapling .............................................................. 115 <Start> button ................................................49, 51 Starting Rate ......................................................161 <Stop> button ................................................49, 51 stopping the fax job ............................................134 Store for Polling .................................................177 Subject ...............................................................209 suppressing the document background .............229

Tray 5 (Bypass) ................................................... 34 tray attachment .................................................... 39

U
Undelivered Faxes ............................................ 303 upper left cover .................................................... 35 Upright Images .................................................. 219 USB 2.0 interface connector ............................... 35 USB memory connector ...................................... 35 User Name ........................................................ 215 using F Code transmission ................................ 170 using remote mailbox ........................................ 168

V
variable size ...................................................... 232

W
waste toner bottle ................................................ 36 Watermark ................................................. 109, 309 Web Applications ............................................... 274

T
Target Area Color ................................................74 TEL ......................................................................38 Text ....................................................................219 TIFF ...................................................................221 TIFF/JPEG Auto Select .....................................220 TIFF-F ................................................................173 TIFF-J ................................................................173 TIFF-S ................................................................173 toner cartridge ......................................................36 top cover ........................................................39, 41 top left cover ........................................................35

X
XPS ................................................................... 221

Index

Top Page then Bottom .......................................231 Touch screen .......................................................50 touch screen ........................................................48 Transfer Protocol ...............................................213 Transmission Header Text .................................163 transmitting 2-sided originals .............................152 transmitting documents with a cover page ........164 Transparency Options .........................................99 Transparency Separators ..................................309 Tray 1 ...................................................................34 Tray 2 ...................................................................34 Tray 3 ...................................................................34 Tray 4 ...................................................................34

340

ApeosPort-III C3300/C2200/C2201, DocuCentre-III C3300/C2200/C2201 User Guide


ME4283E2-1 (Edition 1) Fuji Xerox Co., Ltd. June 2008 Copyright 2008 by Fuji Xerox Co., Ltd.